Ektron CMS400.NET Administrator Manual

Ektron CMS400.NET Administrator Manual

Ektron CMS400.NET

Administrator Manual

Version 6.0 for .Net 2.0, Revision 9

Ektron® Inc.

5 Northern Blvd., Suite 6

Amherst, NH 03031

Tel: +1 603-594-0249

Fax: +1 603-594-0258

Email: [email protected]

http://www.ektron.com

Copyright 2006 Ektron®, Inc. All rights reserved.

EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron, Inc.

Version 6.0 for .Net 2.0, Revision 9, July 17, 2006

For the latest version of this manual, go to

http://www.ektron.com/web-content-management-solutions.aspx?id=4020

EKTRON, INC. SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

** READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE**

YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE

AGREEMENT. USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE

LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT DOWNLOAD.

CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program(s) contained herein (the

“Software”). Downloading and/or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER’S computer hard drive indicates

CUSTOMER’S acceptance of these terms and conditions. If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement, CUSTOMER should not download.

Ektron, Inc. (“Ektron”) grants, and the CUSTOMER accepts, a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions:

1. Right to use: The Software is licensed for use only in delivered code form. Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL. Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below (the “Basic Package”). Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate. Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package, the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats (see product pages for current price). The Basic Packages are as follows:

Ektron CMS300 - Licensed for ten seats (10 named users) per URL.

Ektron CMS400.NET - Licensed for ten seats (10 named users) per URL.

Ektron eWebEditPro - Licensed for ten seats (10 named users) per URL.

Ektron eWebEditPro+XML - Licensed for ten seats (10 named users) per URL.

For purposes of this section, the term “seat” shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software.

The CUSTOMER may not modify, alter, reverse engineer, disassemble, or decompile the Software. This software product is licensed, not sold.

2. Duration: This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License. Should

CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder, CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron.

3. Copyright: The Software (including any images, “applets,” photographs, animations, video, audio, music and text incorporated into the Software) as well as any accompanying written materials (the “Documentation”) is owned by Ektron or its suppliers, is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties, and contains confidential information and trade secrets.

CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation. CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person, other than its employees, without the prior consent of Ektron; CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license.

4. Limited Warranty: Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal, proper and intended usage for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt. Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free, nor that program errors will be corrected. This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from (i) machine error, (ii) Customer's failure to follow operating instructions,

(iii) negligence or accident, or (iv) modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company. In the event of a breach of warranty, Customer’s sole and exclusive remedy, is repair of all or any portion of the Software. If such remedy fails of its essential purpose, Customer’s sole remedy and Ektron’s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only. This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires.

5. Limitation of Warranties and Liability: THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY

WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTIBILITY, DESIGN, OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE. NO WARRANTY OF

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED. EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4, ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND

IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.

NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL, LOSS

OF DATA OR USE OF DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF, OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT, HOWEVER,

CAUSED, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE,

EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS.

6. Miscellaneous: This License Agreement, the License granted hereunder, and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron. This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New

Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof. The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this

Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken. The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the

State of New Hampshire for all such purposes. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License. If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable, such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof. Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision. If you fail to comply with any term of this License,

YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED. This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter.

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT, AND UNDERSTAND

THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE, BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, OR BY PLACING OR

COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT’S TERMS AND

CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT, EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU, THIS

AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES.

Copyright 1999 - 2006 Ektron, Inc. All rights reserved.

LA10031, Revision 1.7

Trademarks

All terms in this manual that are known to be trademarks have been capitalized. Ektron, Inc. cannot attest to the accuracy of this information. Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark.

The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals:

Active Directory®, ActiveX®, Authenticode®, BackOffice®, ClearType®, Developer Studio®, FrontPage®, IntelliSense®, JScript®, Microsoft ®,

MS-DOS®, SharePoint ® Visual C++®, Visual C#®, Visual InterDev®, Visual J++®, Visual J#®, Visual Studio®, Visual Web Developer TM,

Win32®, Win32s®, Windows®, Windows NT®, Windows Server TM, Windows Server System TM, Netscape®, Netscape Navigator®, Mozilla TM,

Firefox TM

Securing Ektron CMS400.NET

S e c u r i n g E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Security Checklist

The following is a checklist of things an Administrator must do to secure

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

Change Admin user password

Change builtin user password

I

MPORTANT

!

If you changed the builtin user password during the site setup, you do not need to

change it again. See ”Editing Builtin” on page ii for additional information.

Remove Sample users

I

MPORTANT

!

Some users in this list might not appear in your User list. This depends on which version of the software you have installed.

Admin2 jedit tbrown jsmith vs

EkExplorerUser

Explorer

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 i

Securing Ektron CMS400.NET

Additional Information

You do not need to make these changes if you are using the

CMS400.NET for demonstration or evaluation purposes. These changes should be completed once the decision is made to purchase the product and go live with your site.

I

MPORTANT

!

Ektron recommends creating your own Administrator user and deleting the Admin user.

I

MPORTANT

!

Ektron recommends deleting any users from the CMS400.NET that are not needed on the system.

I

MPORTANT

!

By default, when the Ektron Explorer client is installed, it has the Explorer or

EkExplorerUser username and password installed. Client side users should use their own Ektron CMS400.NET username and password when using the Ektron

Explorer. To learn how to change this information, see the Administrator Manual section “Ektron Explorer” > “Configuring Ektron Explorer.”

Editing Builtin

I

MPORTANT

!

The “builtin” user does not appear in the Users list. This user appears on the application setup screen.

To change the builtin account information, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > Setup.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. Locate the Built In User field.

4. Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 ii

What’s New in the 6.0 Release

W h a t ’s N e w i n t h e 6 . 0 R e l e a s e

A new Roles feature lets you assign limited administrator

privileges to users. See ”Defining Roles” on page 42

A new Content Analytics feature tracks statistics about visits to your Web site. See

”Content Analytics Feature” on page 213

A new Content Ratings feature lets site visitors rate selected content. You can view the collected data. See

”Content Rating” on page 82

Improvements have been made to the export and import of

XLIFF files. See

”Using the Language Export Feature” on page 131

There are two new types of Custom User Properties:

SelectList Field and MultiSelectList Field. See ”SelectList Field” on page 14

and ”MultiSelectList Field” on page 16 .

Also, you can search for unverified membership users, and verify them if desired. See

”The View Not Verified Users

Screen” on page 268 .

Add, you can search and select membership users. See

”Sorting Membership Users” on page 445 and ”Searching for

Membership Users” on page 445

Load Balancing for assets has been introduced. See ”Load

Balancing Assets” on page 293

You can now optionally add a pre-approval phase for tasks.

See

”Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with Content” on page 301

Ektron CMS400.NET

now supports multiple Web sites, with

each having its own domain and IP address. See ”Support for

Multiple Sites” on page 227

New security features let you restrict the maximum number of failed login attempts, and make passwords case-sensitive. See

”Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6

You can now publish Office documents in an HTML format. See

”Publish Office documents as HTML” on page 45

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 iii

What’s New in the 6.0 Release

Multiple templates can now be assigned to a folder. Then, you can select any template and assign it to content within a folder.

See

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

Multiple XML configurations (now known as Smart Forms).

You can select a Smart Form when creating content in a folder.

See

”Smart Forms” on page 49

Multimedia and Open Office asset types are now supported.

See

”Managing Multimedia Assets” on page 250 and Ektron

CMS400.NET User Manual Section “Using the Document

Management Functionality” > “Working with Open Office Files”

Related Content Metadata lets you associate several content types with a content item. Then, you can set up a Web page so that whenever the source content item appears, the related information appears next to it. See

”Related Content Metadata” on page 93

Business Rules let you define conditions for Web pages on your site. You choose an action based on whether the condition is true or false when a visitor browses to your site. See

”Business Rules” on page 407

The View Contents of Folder screen display has been reorganized. Instead of several buttons, there are now a few menus that make it easy to find related functions. See

”Accessing the Content Folder” on page 36

Discussion boards let you post interactive forums on your

Web site. See ”Discussion Boards” on page 324

The screens of the Site Replication feature have been

reorganized so that they’re easier to use. See ”Configuring the

Receiving Server” on page 182

and ”Configuring the Sending

Server” on page 186

Also, Quick Deploy, which offers additional capabilities when replicating between a staging and production server, has been added. See

”Quick Deploy” on page 207

.

Use the Breadcrumb feature to define a site map, which gives

your site another navigation tool. See ”Breadcrumbs” on page 50

You can now create and publish Blogs. See the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Blogs.”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 iv

Summary Table of Contents

Securing Ektron CMS400.NET......................................................................... i

What’s New in the 6.0 Release .......................................................................iii

Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET........................................1

Getting Started ...........................................................................6

Modifying the Application Setup Screen........................................................ 25

Managing Content ...................................................................35

Managing Content Folders ............................................................................ 35

Managing HTML Content .............................................................................. 61

Metadata....................................................................................................... 87

Adding Content Programmatically ...............................................................112

Content Reports ..........................................................................................114

Managing Library Items ............................................................................... 115

Using eWebEditPro ..................................................................................... 125

Managing XML Content............................................................................... 126

XML Indexing ............................................................................................. 148

Using the Data Designer ............................................................................ 157

Managing HTML Forms............................................................................... 226

Managing Assets ......................................................................................... 240

Managing Tasks .......................................................................................... 290

Searching Web Site Content ....................................................................... 320

Discussion Boards....................................................................................... 324

Ektron Explorer............................................................................................ 357

Calendars .................................................................................................... 368

URL Aliasing................................................................................................ 386

Business Rules............................................................................................ 407

Web Site Navigation Aids .....................................................423

Collections................................................................................................... 423

Menu Feature .............................................................................................. 427

Managing Users and Permissions .......................................430

Managing Users & User Groups.................................................................. 430

Membership Users and Groups....................................................................... 1

Private Content................................................................................................ 1

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 i

Custom User Properties .................................................................................. 5

Setting Permissions....................................................................................... 25

Setting Approval Chains ................................................................................ 34

Defining Roles ............................................................................................... 42

Active Directory Feature ................................................................................ 47

Active Directory Integration .......................................................................... 49

User Authentication Only Mode.................................................................... 95

LDAP Authentication ................................................................................... 100

Multi-Language Support .......................................................116

Managing Your CMS400 System ..........................................156

Site Replication ........................................................................................... 156

Content Analytics Feature ........................................................................... 213

Support for Multiple Sites ............................................................................ 227

Web Alert Feature ....................................................................................... 238

Ektron Windows Service ............................................................................. 271

Web Services .............................................................................................. 277

Load Balancing............................................................................................ 278

email Features............................................................................................. 296

Font Manager .............................................................................................. 302

Integrating with Other Systems............................................306

Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration ........................................... 306

Syndicating Web Content as RSS............................................................... 347

JavaScript Syndication ................................................................................ 348

Additional Information ..........................................................355

Appendix A: List of Supported Languages .........................357

Appendix B: Browser Issues ................................................364

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 ii

Detailed Table of Contents

Securing Ektron CMS400.NET ............................................i

Security Checklist......................................................................... i

Additional Information ................................................................ ii

Editing Builtin......................................................................................ii

What’s New in the 6.0 Release ..........................................iii

Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET................. 1

Getting Started.................................................... 6

Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site ........................ 6

Accessing the Workarea ........................................................... 11

Workarea Navigation ................................................................. 13

Recognizing Content ................................................................. 14

Edit () ............................................................................................... 20

View Content Difference () .............................................................. 21

Approve ()........................................................................................ 22

View History () ................................................................................. 22

Preview () ........................................................................................ 23

Workarea ()...................................................................................... 23

Logout () .......................................................................................... 24

Site Preview................................................................................ 24

Modifying the Application Setup Screen ........................25

Viewing Application Setup Information ................................... 25

Updating Setup Information...................................................... 26

Enabling WebImageFX .............................................................. 30

Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders ......................... 31

BuiltIn User................................................................................. 32

Editor Options ............................................................................ 32

Managing Content ............................................ 35

Managing Content Folders ...............................................35

Accessing the Content Folder .................................................. 36

Folder Properties ....................................................................... 42

Purge History ............................................................................. 48

Smart Forms............................................................................... 49

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 iii

Breadcrumbs.............................................................................. 50

Inheritance and Breadcrumbs ......................................................... 51

Working with Breadcrumbs in a Folder............................................ 51

Adding Subfolders..................................................................... 59

Deleting Folders......................................................................... 60

Search Content Folder .............................................................. 60

Managing HTML Content ..................................................61

Creating/Updating Templates ................................................... 62

How Templates are Used ................................................................ 64

Declaring Templates ........................................................................ 64

Inheritance of Folder Templates ...................................................... 67

Assigning Templates to Folders....................................................... 68

Assigning Templates to Content ...................................................... 70

Adding Content .......................................................................... 72

Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400.NET Documents ............. 74

Viewing Content......................................................................... 75

Editing Content .......................................................................... 76

Moving or Copying Content...................................................... 76

Viewing and Restoring Historical Versions of Content .......... 79

Scheduling Content ................................................................... 80

Deleting Content ........................................................................ 80

Content History .......................................................................... 80

Content Permissions ................................................................. 80

Content Approvals..................................................................... 80

Content Workflow ...................................................................... 81

Link Checking ............................................................................ 81

Assigning Tasks to Content...................................................... 81

Content Properties .................................................................... 81

Content Rating ........................................................................... 82

Metadata.................................................................................. 87

Types of Metadata ...................................................................... 87

Meta Tags ........................................................................................ 88

Title Tag ........................................................................................... 89

Searchable Metadata ...................................................................... 91

Related Content Metadata............................................................... 93

Simple Dublin Core Metadata.......................................................... 96

Working with Metadata Definitions .......................................... 98

Adding a Metadata Definition .......................................................... 99

Viewing Metadata Definitions ........................................................ 107

Editing a Metadata Definition......................................................... 107

Deleting a Metadata Definition ...................................................... 108

Assigning Metadata to a Folder ..................................................... 108

Adding Metadata to Content ...........................................................111

Adding Content Programmatically ..................................... 112

Content Reports ................................................................... 114

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 iv

Managing Library Items ..................................................115

Library Folders and Permissions ........................................... 115

Folder Properties ..................................................................... 116

Performing Actions on Library Items..................................... 119

Load Balancing ........................................................................ 120

If You Have an Ektron WebImageFX License Key................. 123

Using eWebEditPro .........................................................125

Managing XML Content ..................................................126

Benefits of Using XML Data .................................................... 127

Before You Manage Smart Forms .......................................... 128

Adding a New Smart Form ...................................................... 130

Assigning Smart Forms .......................................................... 135

Viewing Smart Forms .............................................................. 136

Editing Smart Forms ............................................................... 141

Creating Smart Forms Based on Existing Configurations .. 144

Viewing Data Designer XSLTs................................................. 145

Deleting Smart Forms ............................................................. 146

XML Indexing........................................................................ 148

User vs. Developer Selected Search Criteria ........................ 148

Types of Search Criteria.......................................................... 149

Displaying Search Results...................................................... 149

Setting up a User-Defined Search .......................................... 151

Setting up a Developer-Defined Search................................. 152

Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed....................... 152

Search Dialog Setup ................................................................ 153

Editing the Search Labels ....................................................... 156

Using the Data Designer...................................................... 157

Differences in eWebEditPro+XML .......................................... 158

Design Mode vs. Data Entry Mode ......................................... 159

Designing a Screen ................................................................. 160

Sample Screen Design ............................................................ 161

Inserting a Field Type .............................................................. 170

Group Box () .................................................................................. 171

Tabular Data ()............................................................................... 175

Checkbox () ................................................................................... 183

Plain Text ().................................................................................... 184

Rich Area () ................................................................................... 189

Choices () ...................................................................................... 191

Select List ()................................................................................... 194

Calculated Field () ......................................................................... 198

Calendar Field ()............................................................................ 208

Image Only Field () .........................................................................211

File Link Field () ............................................................................. 214

Deleting a Field from the Screen ................................................... 217

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 v

Fields that Appear on Several Dialogs .......................................... 217

Custom Validation.......................................................................... 221

Managing HTML Forms...................................................226

Form Permissions ................................................................... 226

Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control 227

Preparing the Server to Send email ....................................... 228

Implementing a Form on a Web Page .................................... 229

Sending Data as XML .............................................................. 230

Redirecting Submitted Form Data.......................................... 238

Managing Assets.............................................................240

Asset Management Configuration.......................................... 240

Allowing File Types........................................................................ 243

Checking Document Management Permissions................... 244

Managing Multimedia Assets.................................................. 250

Supported Multimedia Players....................................................... 251

Multimedia File Types.................................................................... 251

Working with Multimedia Files in Ektron CMS400.NET................. 253

PDF Generation........................................................................ 258

Adding Assets Automatically ................................................. 262

Installing the Auto Add Asset Feature ........................................... 263

Updating the Configuration File ..................................................... 264

Start the Auto Add Asset Service .................................................. 268

Testing the Auto Add Asset Feature .............................................. 268

Troubleshooting....................................................................... 269

Setting Up the Indexing Service .................................................... 270

Installing the Acrobat PDF iFilter ................................................... 279

Disabling the System Indexing Service ......................................... 280

Turning on the Asset Indexing Service .......................................... 283

Using Microsoft Windows Server 2003 as a Client (Web Folders

Setup) ............................................................................................ 284

ERRMSG: AssetManagement error: Failed to save asset ............ 287

Managing Tasks...............................................................290

The Tasks Folder...................................................................... 291

Task Permissions..................................................................... 291

Task Categories and Types..................................................... 292

Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with Content ....... 301

Enabling Automatic Task Creation................................................. 302

Assigning a Preapproval Group to a Folder .................................. 303

How Automatic Task Creation Works ............................................ 305

Task States ............................................................................... 309

Task View Options ................................................................... 312

Email Notification .................................................................... 316

Archiving a Task ...................................................................... 316

Deleting a Task......................................................................... 318

Purging a Task ......................................................................... 318

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 vi

Searching Web Site Content ..........................................320

Search Options ........................................................................ 322

Limitations of the Search ........................................................ 323

Discussion Boards..........................................................324

Overview................................................................................... 324

Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements ............................. 325

Implementing Discussion Boards .......................................... 329

Working with Discussion Boards and Categories .......................... 330

Working with Forums ..................................................................... 335

Working with Topics ....................................................................... 338

Working with Posts ........................................................................ 343

Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board .................... 347

Initialization of Permission Values ................................................. 348

Discussion Board Permissions ...................................................... 349

Discussion Forum Permissions for Membership Users ................. 350

Granting Discussion Board Permissions to Users and User Groups

...

351

Removing Discussion Board Permissions from Users and User

Groups........................................................................................... 352

Editing Discussion Board Permissions for Users and User Groups

.....

352

Inserting the Forum Server Control ....................................... 353

Using Discussion Boards on Your Web Site ......................... 353

Suppressing User Information from the Forum Profile Display ..... 354

Ektron Explorer ...............................................................357

Access to Ektron CMS400.NET .............................................. 357

Configuring Ektron Explorer .................................................. 357

Viewing Administrative Information....................................... 365

Calendars .........................................................................368

Calendar Toolbar Buttons ....................................................... 369

Accessing the Workarea Using Calendars............................ 370

Calendar Permissions ............................................................. 370

Adding a New Calendar........................................................... 371

Display Weekends ......................................................................... 375

Editing a Calendar ................................................................... 376

Deleting a Calendar ................................................................. 376

Calendar Event Types.............................................................. 376

Displaying Calendars on Web Pages..................................... 379

Creating a Foreign Language Calendar................................. 380

Using an Existing Calendar ID or Creating a New One ................. 381

URL Aliasing ....................................................................386

Automatic vs. Manual URL Aliasing....................................... 387

Automatic URL Aliasing .......................................................... 387

Manual Aliasing ....................................................................... 390

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 vii

Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing ................................................... 392

Enabling Manual Aliasing .............................................................. 392

Activating/Deactivating Manual Aliasing........................................ 399

Permissions for Manual Aliasing ................................................... 400

Adding a Base Reference to a Template ....................................... 401

Assigning a Manual URL Alias ...................................................... 401

Editing a Manual URL Alias........................................................... 405

Removing a Manual URL Alias...................................................... 406

Business Rules ...............................................................407

Introduction .............................................................................. 407

Selecting a Rule ....................................................................... 408

Creating a New Business Rule Ruleset ................................. 409

Working with Rulesets ............................................................ 410

Edit a Ruleset .................................................................................411

Add a New Rule to a Ruleset ........................................................ 414

Add an Existing Rule to a Ruleset ................................................. 419

Edit a Rule in a Ruleset ................................................................. 421

Viewing a Rule in a Ruleset........................................................... 422

Web Site Navigation Aids .............................. 423

Collections .......................................................................423

Collection Permissions ........................................................... 424

Permissions for Collections Created from the View Contents of Folder

Screen ........................................................................................... 425

Menu Feature ...................................................................427

Managing Users and Permissions ................ 430

Managing Users & User Groups ....................................430

Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders ................... 431

Managing Users ....................................................................... 432

Creating a New User ..................................................................... 432

Viewing a User .............................................................................. 434

Editing a User ................................................................................ 434

Deleting a User.............................................................................. 435

Removing Users from User Groups .............................................. 436

Managing User Groups ........................................................... 436

Creating a New User Group .......................................................... 437

Assigning Users To User Groups .................................................. 437

Viewing the Users in a User Group ............................................... 438

Editing a User Group ..................................................................... 439

Deleting a User Group................................................................... 440

Removing Users from User Groups .............................................. 440

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 viii

Membership Users and Groups .........................................1

Privileges of Membership Users ................................................ 1

Membership User/User Group Example .................................... 1

Accessing the Membership Module Folder............................... 2

Working with Membership Users ............................................... 3

Adding Membership Users ................................................................ 3

Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group ................. 4

Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership Users........ 4

Viewing Membership User Information.............................................. 4

Editing Membership Users ................................................................ 6

Deleting Membership Users .............................................................. 7

Membership User Groups ........................................................... 7

Adding Membership User Groups ..................................................... 8

Viewing Users in a Membership User Group..................................... 9

Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group ................. 9

Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User Groups

9

Editing Membership User Group Name............................................. 9

Deleting User from Membership User Group .................................. 10

Deleting Membership User Groups ................................................. 10

Assigning Permissions for Memberships ............................... 11

Troubleshooting Problems with Membership Users and

Groups ........................................................................................ 12

Private Content....................................................................1

Making a Folder Private .............................................................. 3

Making Content Private ............................................................... 3

Making Assets Private................................................................. 4

Custom User Properties .....................................................5

The View Custom Properties Screen ......................................... 6

Adding a Custom User Property ................................................ 7

Editing a Custom User Property .............................................. 17

Deleting a Custom User Property ............................................ 18

Setting the Custom User Properties Order ............................. 19

Using Custom User Properties for Non-English Languages. 21

Setting Permissions..........................................................25

Who Is Authorized to Set Permissions .................................... 25

Setting Permissions through the Permissions Table ............. 25

Inheritance.................................................................................. 26

Standard & Advanced Permissions ......................................... 27

Setting Permissions for a Content Folder ............................... 29

Setting Permissions for Content .............................................. 32

Setting Approval Chains...................................................34

What is an Approval Chain? ..................................................... 34

Examples of Approval Chains .................................................. 35

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 ix

Inheritance and the Approval Chain ........................................ 35

Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder .................. 35

Editing an Approval Chain For Content................................... 39

The Approval Method ................................................................ 40

Defining Roles ...................................................................42

Using the Roles Screens........................................................... 42

Guidelines for Using The Folder-User Admin Role ......................... 44

List of Administrator Privileges ............................................... 45

Active Directory Feature...................................................47

Active Directory Integration .................................................. 49

How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET............................................................................... 49

Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET............................................................................... 50

Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration ................... 52

Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400.NET

.

61

Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET ............. 61

When Integration is First Enabled ................................................... 62

After Integration is Enabled ............................................................. 63

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET............................ 63

Deleting Users ................................................................................. 64

Replacing a User ............................................................................. 64

User Groups ............................................................................... 64

Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET ................. 65

Associating a User’s AD Group Information with Ektron CMS400.NET

66

Mapping the Administrator Group.................................................... 67

User Belongs to AD Group that Does Not Exist in Ektron

CMS400.NET .................................................................................. 69

User Belongs to Ektron CMS400.NET Group that Does Not Exist in

AD.................................................................................................... 69

Removing Users from a Group........................................................ 69

Adding User Groups ........................................................................ 70

Adding a User to a Group................................................................ 70

Replacing a User Group .................................................................. 70

Deleting a User Group..................................................................... 70

The Screens of the Active Directory Feature .......................... 71

The Edit Domains Screen................................................................ 71

The Active Directory Setup Screen ................................................. 75

The Active Directory Status Screen................................................. 80

The View Users Screen ................................................................... 84

The View User Groups Screen ........................................................ 87

Setup Guidelines ....................................................................... 90

Disabling AD Integration ........................................................... 92

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 x

User Authentication Only Mode............................................ 95

How Information is Transferred from Active Directory to Ektron

CMS400.NET............................................................................... 95

Which Information is Transferred from Active Directory to

CMS400.NET............................................................................... 95

Logging In .................................................................................. 95

Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET.... 95

Changing the User Login Name in AD ..................................... 96

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET ................... 96

Deleting Users............................................................................ 96

Replacing a User........................................................................ 96

User Groups ............................................................................... 97

The Screens of the Active Directory Feature in User Authentication Mode ................................................................................ 97

Setup Guidelines ....................................................................... 97

Disabling AD Authentication .................................................... 99

LDAP Authentication ......................................................100

Using LDAP with Ektron CMS400.NET .................................. 101

Enabling LDAP .............................................................................. 102

Adding an Organizational Unit During Setup ................................. 105

Adding User Information from an LDAP Server to Ektron

CMS400.NET ................................................................................ 106

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET...........................110

Deleting Users ................................................................................111

LDAP Screen Descriptions ..................................................... 111

The Active Directory Setup Screen ................................................111

The View Users Screen ..................................................................112

Disabling LDAP Authentication.............................................. 115

Multi-Language Support ................................ 116

Working with Multi-Language Content .................................. 116

Enabling/Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content ...........118

Viewing Your Site in Another Language .........................................119

What Happens if Chosen Language is Not Available .................... 120

Determining Which Languages are Available................................ 120

The Default Language ................................................................... 123

Disabling a Language.................................................................... 123

Creating New Content ................................................................... 124

Translating Content ....................................................................... 125

Translating Content Manually ........................................................ 126

Using Machine Translation ............................................................ 128

Using the Language Export Feature ...................................... 131

What is XLIFF?.............................................................................. 132

Overview of Exporting/Importing Translation Files ........................ 133

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xi

Creating the .zip File...................................................................... 133

Importing Translated Files into Ektron CMS400.NET.................... 138

Additional Multi-Language Topics ......................................... 141

Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site......................................... 144

Creating Web Pages that Support Several Languages ................. 145

Modifying Page Content Based on Language Selection ............... 146

Modifying Images Based on Language Selection ......................... 147

Using a Language Other than American English as the Default

148

Resolving Conversion Issues................................................. 148

Set the Language of Spell Checking...................................... 153

Character Encoding................................................................. 153

Translating the Workarea ........................................................ 153

Managing Your CMS400 System ................... 156

Site Replication ...............................................................156

Site Replication vs. the Move Site Procedure ....................... 157

Site Replication Overview ....................................................... 158

What Information is Synchronized......................................... 158

What Information is Not Synchronized.................................. 159

Possible Site Replication Configurations.............................. 159

Prerequisites ............................................................................ 160

Installing the Site Replication Utility...................................... 162

Additional Steps Prior to Configuring the Site Replication Utility ... 175

Updating Membership Users ......................................................... 178

Preserving Database Tables.......................................................... 179

Configuring the Site Replication Utility ................................. 180

Configuring the Receiving Server.................................................. 182

Configuring the Sending Server .................................................... 186

The Site Replication Status Page .................................................. 191

Setting up a Staging Server .................................................... 192

Previewing the Site Replication Process............................... 194

Performing Site Replication.................................................... 194

Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the Production Server 196

How Backup Files Are Maintained and Numbered ........................ 197

Restoring a Backup ....................................................................... 197

Replicating to Multiple Sites ................................................... 198

Supporting Several Sites on One Staging Server................. 198

Testing Site Replication Software .......................................... 202

Quick Deploy ............................................................................ 207

Introduction.................................................................................... 207

Information Copied During Quick Deploy ...................................... 208

Quick Deploy Prerequisites ........................................................... 209

Using Quick Deploy ....................................................................... 210

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xii

Content Analytics Feature..............................................213

Enabling the Content Analytics Feature................................ 213

Determining Which Templates are Tracked........................... 214

Specifying the Frequency of Writing to the Database.......... 215

The Statistical Data .................................................................. 216

Writing to the IIS Log............................................................... 217

Content Analytics Reporting .................................................. 218

Site Statistics ................................................................................. 219

Site Activity .................................................................................... 220

Top Content ................................................................................... 222

Top Templates ............................................................................... 223

Top Referrers................................................................................. 224

Changing the Date Range of the Statistical Data .......................... 224

Support for Multiple Sites...............................................227

Advantages of Multiple Sites .................................................. 227

Prerequisites ............................................................................ 228

Using Multiple Sites................................................................. 228

Installing the Multi-site Support Feature ............................... 229

Effect on Site Replication ....................................................... 236

Web Alert Feature............................................................238

How Web Alert Works.............................................................. 240

Server Configuration ............................................................... 241

Enabling the Web Alert Feature.............................................. 243

Setting Up the Message Queue and Asynchronous Processor

244

Creating the email Message ................................................... 249

Predefining Message Components ............................................... 249

Combining Message Components to Create the Message ........... 252

Previewing the email Message...................................................... 253

Defining Subscriptions ........................................................... 255

Assigning Web Alert Information to Folders and Content... 258

How Users Sign up for Subscriptions ................................... 265

What Happens if Verification email is Not Used ............................ 266

What Happens if Verification email is Used ................................... 266

Setting up Other Web Pages for Site Visitor.................................. 269

CMS User Subscription Sign Up ................................................... 269

Ektron Windows Service ................................................271

Functions Performed by the Ektron Windows Service ........ 271

Changing the Update Time............................................................ 272

Preventing Configuration Information from Being Updated ........... 272

Changing the Name of the data.config File ................................... 272

Viewing the Ektron Windows Service .................................... 272

Viewing in IIS................................................................................. 272

Viewing in the File System ............................................................ 275

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xiii

Web Services ...................................................................277

Load Balancing ...............................................................278

Load Balancing Library Images and Files ............................. 278

Using Site Replication for Load Balancing ........................... 279

Configuring Load Balancing without Site Replication ......... 280

Set Up Two Ektron CMS400.NET Web Sites ................................ 282

Set Up Virtual Directories for Two Web Sites ................................ 283

Ektron CMS400.NET on Three Servers .................................. 291

Setting Up Multiple Web Sites ....................................................... 292

Setting Up Virtual Directories for Three Sites ................................ 292

Setting Up Load Balancing for Three Servers ............................... 292

Load Balancing Assets ........................................................... 293

Setting up Load Balancing............................................................. 294

email Features .................................................................296

Configuring SMTP Server ....................................................... 296

Automatic eMail Notification .................................................. 296

Instant eMail ............................................................................. 297

Font Manager...................................................................302

Integrating with Other Systems .................... 306

Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Integration ...........306

Prerequisites ............................................................................ 307

Configuring Your SharePoint Portal Server .......................... 308

Performing the Installation............................................................. 308

Testing the Installation ................................................................... 310

What’s Next? ..................................................................................311

Installation Troubleshooting............................................................311

Updating Web.config Manually ...................................................... 313

Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server Overview....................... 316

SharePoint Portal Web Page Layout ............................................. 316

What is a Web Part?...................................................................... 317

Web Part Zones............................................................................. 318

SharePoint Server Permissions..................................................... 319

Personal vs. Shared View ............................................................. 319

Ektron CMS400.NET Web Parts .............................................. 320

Inserting Ektron CMS400.NET Web Parts..................................... 320

Modifying Web Parts ..................................................................... 323

Managing Ektron CMS400.NET Web Parts................................... 324

Approvals Web Part....................................................................... 325

Calendar Web Part ........................................................................ 327

Collection Web Part ....................................................................... 329

Content Web Part .......................................................................... 331

Form Content Web Part................................................................. 333

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xiv

Summary List Web Part................................................................. 336

Login Web Part.............................................................................. 340

Profile Web Part ............................................................................ 341

Search Web Part ........................................................................... 343

Syndicating Web Content as RSS .................................347

JavaScript Syndication...................................................348

What is Syndication? .............................................................. 348

Syndication Example............................................................... 348

Hosting & Syndication ............................................................ 352

Setting up a Syndicated Template ................................................. 353

Additional Information ................................... 355

Appendix A: List of Supported Languages.. 357

Appendix B: Browser Issues......................... 364

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xv

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 xvi

I n t r o d u c t i o n t o E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Thank you for purchasing Ektron CMS400.NET, the best and most affordable solution for Web content management. We welcome you to use Ektron CMS400.NET to maintain, update, and modify the contents of your Web site. All these efforts are easily achieved while preserving the look and feel that you originally designed for your site. With Ektron CMS400.NET, the tasks of maintaining your site and updating content are passed on to subject experts. Based on the page layouts and processes that you create, the highest level of quality is preserved and maintained throughout the life cycle of the site.

See Also:

”About Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 1

”Who Should Read This Documentation?” on page 2

”Online Learning Center” on page 2

”Sample Site Used in this Document” on page 2

”Types of Users” on page 2

”Management of Content” on page 3

”Conventions of the Documentation” on page 4

About Ektron CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET

is a powerful, easy-to-use, and affordable

XML content management solution that empowers anyone to take an active role in managing Web content and optimizing online strategies. It streamlines site management, automates workflow processes, and supports collaboration.

Ektron CMS400.NET

reduces costs, saves time and makes Web sites, extranets, and intranets more effective – while generating rapid ROI.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 1

Business users, like marketing or PR pros, can author, manage and publish Web content, build and deploy Web forms, and collect and leverage visitor info. Our browser-based editor, eWebEditPro+XML, supports the industry’s best in-context editing environment – ensuring user adoption and project success.

Ektron CMS400.NET

also helps to move paper-based forms processes to the Web. Our editor lets users create Web forms such as expense reports, health records, and insurance forms, deploy them to internal users, collect data, apply validation and math functions, and run forms through workflow – all within a browser.

Who Should Read This Documentation?

This document introduces all the concepts, features, and instructions for using Ektron CMS400.NET as a Web administrator.

The Web administrator is the person who is responsible for adjusting the setup of the Web site, and alters the site as institutional changes require. New areas needing to be added to the Web site, the changing of personnel and processes over time may cause these adjustments.

Online Learning Center

Much of the information in this documentation is also presented in a tutorial, animated format on Ektron’s Web site. To access

Ektron’s CMS400.NET Web Training, go to http://www.ektron.com/ cms400-web-cms.aspx?id=922 .

Sample Site Used in this Document

This documentation uses the sample ASPX Web site installed with

Ektron CMS400.NET to explain and demonstrate functionality in a

Ektron CMS400.NET controlled Web site.

Types of Users

Ektron CMS400.NET lets you control the content of your Web site.

The tasks of creating and maintaining your Web site are allocated

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 2

among different types of users. The types of Ektron CMS400.NET users are:

User

Developer

Administrator

Content

Contributor

Job

Builds templates

Sets up the site, adds users and user groups, sets permissions, and maintains the library

Maintains Web site by adding, modifying, and publishing content.

You assign privileges to Ektron CMS400.NET users based on the actions for which they are responsible. Each user may be assigned any or all types of privileges. Users without administrative permissions are known as content contributors.

This document describes features and actions available to a user with administrative privileges. Information about Ektron

CMS400.NET’s editing and publishing features may be found in the Ektron CMS400.NET User Documentation.

Management of Content

The Ektron CMS400.NET content manager uses database technology to store, build, and retrieve Web page content. The placement of the content on a Web page is determined by templates, which you can build with external tools. Ektron extends

VisualStudio to support the template design process.

Templates can be thought of as mechanical layouts of your Web pages. They incorporate powerful custom functions that Ektron

CMS400.NET uses to manage your content. Each content item is

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 3

assigned a unique ID. Ektron CMS400.NET uses the ID to retrieve content from the database.

If during the evolution of your site the need for a new template arises, you simply create a new one, store it in a directory accessible to Ektron CMS400.NET, and create new content that uses the new template. You can even modify the layout of an existing template, reincorporate it, and the content automatically flows into and adjusts to the new layout.

Conventions of the Documentation

This document‘s typographic styles and conventions are explained below.

Convention

Bold

Explanation

Bold type indicates a menu selection, field or text that you must select.

Courier New font indicates code that you may enter.

Courier New

Note:

Notes indicate special conditions or issues that the reader should be aware of.

W

ARNING

!

A warning indicates very important information that should be followed. Inattention to a warning can produce undesirable results.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 4

Convention

Italic

Explanation

Italic text indicates either a title that is being cited or a special use of a word that might be confused with common world terms.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 5

G e t t i n g Sta r t e d

Now that you have installed Ektron CMS400.NET, what’s next?

This chapter explains several resources supplied by Ektron to help get your Ektron CMS400.NET Web site up and running.

Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site

See “Logging In and Out” in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

Note If needed, you can adjust the width of the login screen. This may be necessary if you use Active Directory and have long database names. Use the ek_LoginScreenWidth element of the web.config file to adjust the width.

Making Passwords Case Sensitive

By default, passwords are case insensitive. So for example, if the password is TOKEN and the user enters token, the signon is successful.

If you want to make passwords case sensitive, change the value of the ek_passwordCaseSensitive element of the web.config file from false

to true

. (The web.config file is located in your site’s root directory.)

If you do, and the password is TOKEN and the user enters token, the signon is unsuccessful. The user would have to enter TOKEN to successfully sign on.

Restricting Login Attempts

Ektron CMS400.NET

has a login security feature that, by default, locks out a user after five unsuccessful attempts to log in by a user

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 6

on one computer. This section explains the flexibility you have in controlling this feature.

You can control the following capabilities.

”Changing the Number of Unsuccessful Login Attempts” on page 7

”Disabling the Login Attempts Feature” on page 9

”Unlocking a Locked Account” on page 8

”Preventing CMS Users from Signing On” on page 9

”Preventing All Users from Signing On” on page 9

You control login security feature by changing the value of the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file. The following table summarizes your options.

-1

-2

Value Description

any number between 1 and 254

The number of times a user can try to log in before he is locked out.

0 Lock out all users

Disable feature; unlock all locked users

Lock out CMS users only; membership users can still log in

Changing the Number of Unsuccessful Login Attempts

By default, if a user unsuccessfully tries to log in five times, the following error message appears: The account is locked. Please

contact your administrator. Afterwards, even if the user enters the correct password, he is locked out, and the error message reappears.

You can change the text of the error message in the resource file. To learn about editing the resource file, see

”Procedure for Translating Workarea Strings” on page 154

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 7

To change the number of unsuccessful login attempts that occur prior to lockout, edit the value of the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file. (The web.config file is located in your site’s root directory.) For example, to allow only three unsuccessful logins, change the value

to 3. You cannot enter a value greater than 254.

Unlocking a Locked Account

Once an account is locked out, the Account Locked field is checked in the user settings.

To unlock the account, an administrator user (or a user assigned to the user-admin role) accesses the Edit User screen and unchecks the box. At this point, the user can attempt to sign in again.

N

OTE

If you want to unlock all locked users at once, set the value of the ek_loginAttempts

element in the web.config file to -1. For more information about the effects of this setting, see

”Disabling the Login Attempts Feature” on page 9

.

Manually Locking a User from Signon

You can use the Account Locked field (described above) to manually lock a user out of

Ektron CMS400.NET

. To do so, go to the

Edit User screen, identify the user, and check the Account

Locked field.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 8

That user cannot sign in until either you reverse the above procedure and uncheck the box, or you change the value of the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file to -1.

Disabling the Login Attempts Feature

To disable the Login Attempts feature, set the value of the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file to -1. If you do, any user can try to log in as many times as he wants. The error message never appears, and he is not prevented from entering a password.

N

OTE

Setting the value of the ek_loginAttempts

element in the web.config file to -1 automatically unlocks all locked accounts.

Preventing CMS Users from Signing On

If you want to lock out all CMS users, set the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file to -2. If you do, only membership users can sign in.

N

OTE

The builtin user cannot sign in if ek_loginAttempts

is set to -2.

Preventing All Users from Signing On

If you want to lock out all users (including membership users), set the ek_loginAttempts element in the web.config file to 0. If you do, no one can sign in to

Ektron CMS400.NET

until you change the value.

N

OTE

The builtin user cannot sign in if ek_loginAttempts

is set to 0.

Changing Images Used for Logging In and Out

You can change the images used for the login and logout buttons.

To do so, follow these steps.

1. Move the new images to the following folder: webroot\your

site’s root directory\Workarea\images\application.

2. Open the web.config file in your Web site’s root directory.

3. Change the images referenced in this section of the file:

<add key="ek_Image_1" value="btn_close.gif" />

<add key="ek_Image_2" value="btn_login.gif" />

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 9

<add key="ek_Image_3" value="btn_login_big.gif" />

N

OTE

You must update the images and web.config each time your system is updated.

Resolving Problem with Sign in Screen

You may find that in certain browsers, the login screen occupies the entire browser window instead of just a small box (see illustration below).

Browsers such as Netscape 8 and Firefox have a feature called tabs. When the login window pops up, it appears as a new tab as shown above.

You can fix this problem by turning off tabs within the browser.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 10

Accessing the Workarea

Once logged into Ektron CMS400.NET as an administrator, you can edit content by navigating to the page (like a business user) or access the Workarea. From there, you can perform all system activities, such as configuring and viewing every setting of Ektron

CMS400.NET. To access the Workarea, follow these steps.

1. Log in to your Web site, as described in ”Logging Into an

Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6 .

2. Click the Workarea button ( ) on a login page or a

Workarea toolbar button ( ).

The Workarea has a Windows Explorer-like interface.

When you first access your Workarea, your Smart Desktop is displayed. The smart desktop contains useful information that pertains to you.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 11

N

OTE

In the Application Setup screen, you can determine which screen appears when you access the Workarea.

See Also:

”Set smart desktop as the start location in the Workarea” on page 29

The following graphic illustrates the location of

Ektron

CMS400.NET

’s major components in relation to the Smart Desktop display.

Closing the Workarea

To close the Workarea, click the ( ) button in the upper right corner.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 12

When you close the Workarea, you return to the Ektron

CMS400.NET view of your Web site but do not exit Ektron

CMS400.NET.

Workarea Navigation

The

Ektron CMS400.NET

administrator Workarea is divided into two frames:

the left frame displays the system’s folders

the right frame displays common reports (For more information,

see ”Content Reports” on page 114

)

N

OTE

Each category in the right frame is followed by a number indicating how many content items are in that status. Content to Expire lists how many content items will expire within ten days. By going to the report (Smart Desktop > Reports >

Content To Expire) and changing the number of days, you can view a list of content to expire in that amount of time.

The number next to Tasks indicates how many open tasks are assigned to, or have been assigned by, you. Open tasks are those in one of the following states: not started, active, awaiting data, on hold, pending, reopened.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 13

To learn more about the Workarea, see the section of the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

User Manual titled “Understanding the Smart

Desktop.”

Recognizing Content

After you sign in, notice that as you move the cursor, colored borders appears around areas of the page, as illustrated below.

The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area.

See Also:

”Returning to the Classic CMS Interface” on page 17

N

OTE

The colored borders only appear when you are not in site preview mode. To learn about Site Preview mode, see “Logging In and Out” > “Site Preview” in the Ektron

CMS400.NET User Manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 14

Each surrounded area is a content item that can be edited independently.

Meaning of Border Color

The table below describes the meaning of each border color.

Color

Green

Red

Yellow

Grey

Meaning

Active

Checked Out

Description

Content is active and ready to be edited

Another user is editing the content

Approval Process Content has been submitted for publication, and is in the approval chain.

Pending Go Live Content was approved, but the go-live date hasn’t occurred yet.

The Floating Toolbar

When content’s border is visible, you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar (an example in the green box below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 15

Toolbar buttons let you act on the displayed content and display important information about it. For example, one toolbar button lets you edit the content, while another displays previous versions of it.

The toolbar buttons change depending on the content’s status or your permissions for the content.

Each button is described in

”Floating Toolbar Buttons” on page 18 .

Floating Toolbar Display Type

You can change the floating toolbar display type. The choices are vertical and horizontal. Vertical is the default. Below are examples of each.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 16

To change the display type, follow these steps.

1. Open web.config in your root folder.

2. Find the variable ek_MenuDisplayType

.

3. Change its value.

0 (zero) = Horizontal

1 = Vertical

Returning to the Classic CMS Interface

Prior to Release 4.7, the colored borders and the toolbar menu always appeared on the screen, not only when the user moved the mouse over the area. To return to this display style, follow these steps.

N

OTE

If you switch to the classic interface, the page layout is not depicted accurately because of the fixed toolbars.

1. Open web.config in your root folder.

2. Find the variable ek_UserMenuType

.

3. Change its value to 1.

After you make this change, the colored borders and toolbar menu appear on a screen when it appears, and remain there.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 17

Floating Toolbar Buttons

The following table describes buttons you might see on the floating toolbar. The buttons can vary depending on the status of the content, your permissions, etc.

Toolbar

Button

Name Description More Information

Add

Approve

Appears if you selected a language and the content is not available in that language. Use this button to copy existing content into new content and translate it to the new language.

”Translating Content” on page 125

Approve or decline request for content to be published or deleted.

”Approve ()” on page 22

Assign Task

Delete

Edit

Assign a task related to this content.

”Managing Tasks” on page 290

Opens content’s View Content screen.

From here, you can view important information about the content and perform all actions on it.

Checks out content to be edited by you.

”Edit ()” on page 20

Logout

Preview

Log out of Ektron CMS400.NET view of

Web site.

Preview content before it is published.

”Logout ()” on page 24

”Preview ()” on page 23

Properties

View Content

Difference

Opens content’s View Content screen.

From here, you can view information about content and perform all actions on it.

Displays differences between historical version and published versions of content.

”Content Status” on page 19

;

”Managing

HTML Content” on page 61

”View Content

Difference ()” on page 21

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 18

Toolbar

Button

Name

View History

Workarea

Description More Information

Displays historical versions of content.

You can also restore older version if needed.

Opens the Workarea. From here, you can perform all actions.

”View History ()” on page 22

”Workarea ()” on page 23

Content Status

After seeing content’s border, you can get a more detailed status by hovering your cursor over the properties button ( ). When you do, the content’s title and current status appear, as shown below.

Below are the content statuses and their abbreviations.

I

Letter Border

Color

A

green

O

S

red green yellow

Meaning

Approved

Checked Out

Checked In

Submitted for Approval

Content state

Through workflow and published on the Web site

Currently being edited. Has not been checked in.

Checked in for others to edit

Saved and submitted into approval chain

See Also:

”Setting Approval

Chains” on page 34

Requested for deletion

M

yellow

Marked For Deletion

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 19

Letter Border

Color

T

P

D

grey

Meaning Content state

Awaiting Completion of

Associated Tasks

Pending Go Live Date

Pending Deletion

Task(s) assigned to content are not complete

Approved but “Go Live” date hasn’t occurred yet

Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted.

This status only remains until the start date is reached. At that point, the content is deleted.

For more information about

content statuses, see Appendix A of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual

content activities, see

”Managing HTML Content” on page 61

Edit ( )

Ektron CMS400.NET content can be in any of several states.

Green border - you can check out the content for editing

Yellow border - you can edit the content if you submitted it for publishing; otherwise, you cannot

Red border - you cannot edit the content

N

OTE

Once you check out content, it cannot be checked out or edited by other users until you check it in.

To edit content, follow these steps.

1. Log in to Ektron CMS400.NET, as described in

”Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6 .

2. Browse to content you want to edit.

3. Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 20

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. The Edit Content screen is displayed.

6. From that screen, you can

-

Edit content

-

Save changes

-

Check-in content

-

Enter or edit a summary

-

Enter or edit metadata

-

Submit the content for approval

-

Publish content to the Web site

-

Access the library

For more information, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual

Section “Working with Folders and Content” > “Editing Content”.

View Content Difference ( )

The compare toolbar button appears when the content is in any state other than published.

Using Ektron CMS400.NET’s content comparison utility, eWebDiff, you can see the changes made to the selected content.

To compare the currently published version of a content with the currently staged version, follow these steps.

1. Log in to Ektron CMS400.NET.

2. Browse through your Web site until you find content that has a staged version to be compared with.

3. If the floating toolbar does not appear, right click the mouse to display it.

4. Click the View Differences button ( ). eWebDiff opens in a new window.

N

OTE

See ”Comparing Versions of Content” on page 101 for additional information about the CMS Compare utility.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 21

Approve ( )

When logged in as a user who is part of an approval chain, you may see content with a yellow border. The yellow border indicates that the content is in the approval chain. If you are the next approver of the content, an Approve button ( ) appears in the toolbar.

To approve submitted content, follow these steps.

1. Browse to a content that is submitted and awaiting your approval.

2.

See Also:

If the floating toolbar does not appear, right click the mouse to display it.

3. Click the Approve button ( ).

4. The Approve Content screen is displayed.

5. Perform one of the following actions:

-

Approve ( ) the content and submit it to the next approver. If you are the last approver, the content is published to the site.

-

Decline ( ) the content, which checks the content in and makes it available for editing by all users with permissions

N

OTE

If the content has any active tasks, a comments window pops up. You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task.

-

Click ( ) at the top corner of the window to close without doing anything

For more information, see

”Setting Approval Chains” on page 34 .

View History ( )

Each time content is checked in or published, a snapshot is made of it and stored in Ektron CMS400.NET.You can access and view historical versions of the content.

To view the history for a content item, follow these steps.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 22

1. Log in to Ektron CMS400.NET, as described in

”Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6.

2. Find the content whose history you want to view.

3. Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar.

4. Click the View History button ( ).

5. The Content History window appears.

N

OTE

See ”Content History” on page 80 for more information about viewing, comparing,

and restoring historical versions.

Preview ( )

If content’s state is other than Published or checked out, this button displays the entire template as though everything that is currently staged has been published. So, you can see what your changes will look like on the Web site before publishing. If necessary, you can fix any problems and perfect the page before submitting it into the approval chain.

To preview staged content, follow these steps.

1. Log in to Ektron CMS400.NET, as described in

”Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6 .

2. Browse through your Ektron CMS400.NET Web site until you find the content you want to preview.

N

OTE

Content items with staged content can either have a green or yellow border. Look for the preview toolbar button, which indicates that the content has a staged version.

3. Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar.

4. Click the Preview button ( ).

A new browser window opens with the staged version of the content viewable in the template.

Workarea ( )

The Workarea is the centralized location of all Ektron

CMS400.NET actions that you can perform. As an administrator,

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 23

you have access to many more actions than a standard user. To access your Workarea, follow these steps.

1. Log in to Ektron CMS400.NET, as described in

”Logging Into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6 .

2. Navigate to any page that has Ektron CMS400.NET content displayed on it.

3. Right click the mouse to display the floating toolbar.

4. Click the Workarea button ( ).

5. The Workarea opens in a new window.

6. To learn more about the Workarea, see

”Accessing the

Workarea” on page 11 .

Logout ( )

This button logs you out of Ektron CMS400.NET.

Site Preview

To learn about Site Preview mode, see “Logging In and Out” >

“Site Preview” in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 24

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

M o d i f y i n g t h e A p p l i c a t i o n S e t u p

S c r e e n

In the setup section of the configuration folder, you can enter or edit information for the Ektron CMS400.NET Web site including:

License keys

Default language

Maximum content and summary sizes

email notification

Physical library folders on file server

Builtin user information

Editor options

Work page size settings

You must complete this before any user can access your Ektron

CMS400.NET Web site.

”Enabling WebImageFX” on page 30

”Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders” on page 31

”BuiltIn User” on page 32

”Editor Options” on page 32

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group can view and edit the Application

Setup screen.

Viewing Application Setup Information

To view Ektron CMS400.NET setup information, follow these steps.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 25

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

1. Access the Workarea. See Also:

”Accessing the Workarea” on page 11

2. Click the Settings folder button in the left frame.

3. Expand the folder tree, and click Configurations > Setup.

4. The Application Setup screen is displayed.

Updating Setup Information

To update setup information, follow these steps.

1. Access the Application Setup screen, as described in

”Viewing

Application Setup Information” on page 25

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

.

3. The Application Setup screen appears. Update the fields as needed. The following table explains the fields.

Field

License Key(s)

Module Licenses

Default Application

Language

Description

Enter the license key sent to you from Ektron via email into this field.

Enter the license key for WebImageFX that was sent to you via email.

See

”Enabling WebImageFX” on page 30 for more information.

Select a default language for Ektron CMS400.NET.

How a User’s Application Language Affects His Use of

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

This user’s language determines the screens and messages that appear in

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

.

How the System Default Language Relates to a User’s Language

Setting

In the user profile, you can set each user’s language. You can set any user’s language to system default. Each user whose language is set to system default uses the language assigned here.

Note: Do not confuse this default application language with the ek_

DefaultContentLanguage variable in web.config. For more information

on that variable, see ”The Default Language” on page 123 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 26

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Field

Maximum Content Size

Description

In bytes, limit the size of each content item by specifying a maximum size. If a user’s changes to content results in exceeding this limit, the user is told to reduce the size of the content before he can save it.

It cannot exceed 1,000,000 characters.

Maximum Summary Size

System email Address

Enable Sending of System

Notification Email

Limit the size of each summary by specifying a maximum size. If a user’s changes to a summary result in exceeding this limit, the user is told to reduce the size of the content before he can save it.

It cannot exceed 65,000 characters.

Enter a valid email address. This address will appear in the From field in the notification emails.

Check the box to enable email notification for the entire CMS. Unchecking this box disables email notification, regardless of whether individual users have their email enabled.

Asynchronous Processor

Location

Library Folder Creation:

Enable CMS to create file system folders for library assets

Built - in User Information

If your site uses the Web Alerts feature, enter or update the location of the asynchronous processor Web Services file. The default location

appears below. See Also: ”Setting Up the Message Queue and

Asynchronous Processor” on page 244

This is a Staging Server

(Only used with Site

Replication)

Publish in Other Format:

Enable Office documents to be published in other format

Check this box if you use the Site Replication feature and the server on which this server resides is a staging server.

If you check this box, Web alerts are not generated when content is updated. Web alerts should only be created on a production server.

Check the box to allow

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

to render Office documents in either PDF or HTML format. When a checked, PDF or

HTML generation is available for individual folders.

See Also:

”Editing Folder Properties” on page 46

Check the box if you want to create physical folders on your file system server that match the Ektron CMS400.NET library folder tree.

See Also: ”Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders” on page 31

Edit the username and/or password for the built in user. By default, the username and password combination is builtin/builtin.

Important! Ektron strongly urges you to change the default password assigned to the builtin user. An opportunity to do this is presented during installation.

See Also:

”BuiltIn User” on page 32

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 27

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Field

Editor Options

Description

Toggle between displaying and not displaying font related buttons in the editor. Also choose to remove styles and preserve MS Word styles

and classes. See Also: ”Editor Options” on page 32

Work Page Size

The following fields change the

default editor screen size

whether button text appears in the title bar

default Web page after sign-in

default Workarea page

The default values are automatically applied to all new users, and to all existing users when you upgrade.

Normally, you can modify these values for any user via the Edit User screen. But, you can force these values on all users, removing the ability to personalize them.

Width

Height

If desired, change the width of the screen in which

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

appears. The width in pixels must be between 400 and

2400.

This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and/or prefer a higher resolution, such as 1280 x 1024.

The default value for this setting is 790.

If desired, you can change the height of the screen in which

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

appears. The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800.

This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and/or prefer a higher resolution, such as 1280 x 1024.

The default value for this setting is 580.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 28

Field

Display button text in the title bar

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Description

Check this box if you want any button’s caption text to appear in the screen title’s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button.

Note the word Update, describing the button, in the illustration below

If you do not check this box, the screen’s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button, as illustrated below.

Landing Page after login

Set smart desktop as the start location in the

Workarea

Force preferences to all users

Enable Verify email?

If you want one page in your Web site to appear after users sign in, enter the URL to that page. You can click Select Page to browse to the landing page. The last published version of the page appears. If the page has never been published, nothing appears.

By default, the page from which the user logged in reappears.

If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as users enter the

Workarea, click inside this check box.

See Also:

”Workarea Navigation” on page 13

By default, the user sees the Smart Desktop after sign in.

If you leave this check box blank, when you enter the Workarea, you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after

login field.

To force these settings on all

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

users, check this box. If you do, users can see the values in the user profile screen but not change them.

If you leave this box blank, users can personalize these values in their

User Profile.

Check this box if users should be notified whenever they subscribe to

an email notification list. See Also: ”What Happens if Verification email is Used” on page 266

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 29

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Field

Enable PreApproval Group

Description

Use this field to enable Automatic Task Creation. See Also:

”Automatic

Creation of Tasks Associated with Content” on page 301

4. Make the necessary changes.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

Enabling WebImageFX

When purchasing Ektron CMS400.NET, you had the option to purchase Ektron WebImageFX as well. WebImageFX is an imaging application that allows users to edit images online.

If you purchased WebImageFX when you purchased Ektron

CMS400.NET, you should have received an email with a license key for WebImageFX as well.

To enable WebImageFX within Ektron CMS400.NET, from the application setup page, insert the WebImageFX license key in the

Module License field.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 30

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Enabling CMS to Create File System Folders

If this option is enabled, each time a new content/library folder is created in Ektron CMS400.NET, a corresponding physical folder is created on the file system. This helps organize library assets on your file server.

The following illustration compares the library folder tree with the file system’s folder structure.

N

OTE

If upgrading, the installation does not create sample Web site’s folders on the file server. These folders must be added manually. However, all folders created by you are also created on the file server when enabled.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 31

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

BuiltIn User

The builtin user is a user that is defined in the Ektron CMS400.NET setup screen. Primarily, he’s an emergency user if you cannot log in to Ektron CMS400.NET as the administrator.

N

OTE

The builtin user can log in to Ektron CMS400.NET whether or not Active Directory or LDAP is enabled.

Only use the builtin user to correct a bad or expired license key. It is not designed for regular CMS operations. If you try to edit content while signed on as this user, you see errors.

I

MPORTANT

!

By default, the username and password combination for the builtin user is builtin/ builtin. For security reasons, Ektron recommends changing the username and password upon installation.

Editing the BuiltIn User

To edit the builtin user’s information, follow these steps.

1. Accessing the Edit Application Setup Information screen, as described in

”Updating Setup Information” on page 26 .

2. Locate the Built In User field.

3. Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password.

4. Click the Update button ( ).

Editor Options

Style sheets greatly reduce the source code (and thereby the size of) a content. For this reason, they are becoming more popular than font-related tags for marking up content. The editor options section lets you determine how the editor handles this issue.

The following table explains the editor options you may set.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 32

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

.

Editor Option

Enable Font Buttons

Description

This option displays the following font-related buttons on the editor toolbar:

Font Face

Font Size

Font Color

Font Background Color

See Also:

”Enable Font Buttons” on page 34

Note: If Remove Styles is checked (see below), all inline styles added to the content are removed when the HTML is cleaned.

Disable Font Buttons This option removes the buttons specified above. If you choose this option but want to let users apply font related attributes to text, set up a style sheet for the content folder to which the content belongs.

See Also:

”Disable Font Buttons” on page 34

Remove Styles/ Do not Remove

Styles

If Remove Styles is checked, all inline styles added to the content are removed when the HTML is cleaned.

Note: Ektron recommends removing inline styles. It gets rid of inline styles added to content pasted from Microsoft Word.

Preserve MS-Word Styles (only available if you choose Do not

Remove Styles)

When content from MS Word is cut and pasted into the editor, the editor, by default, removes some MS Word styles. Preserving MS

Word styles prevents the editor from removing them.

Ektron does not recommend enabling this feature.

Preserve MS-Word Classes Similar to styles, when content from MS-Word is cut and pasted into the editor, the editor, by default, removes some MS-Word classes. Checking this box prevents the editor from removing them.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 33

Modifying the Application Setup Screen

Enable Font Buttons

Here is the editor with font related buttons enabled.

Disable Font Buttons

Here is the editor with the font buttons disabled.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 34

M a n a g i n g C o n t e n t

Managing Content Folders

M a n a g i n g C o n t e n t F o l d e r s

An administrator can control every aspect of the content and the folders that hold them. The controls include setting permissions, approvals, and adding, editing, publishing, and deleting content.

Below is the content folder.

This chapter explains how to add, edit, publish, and delete content.

It includes the following information:

”Accessing the Content Folder” on page 36

”Folder Properties” on page 42

”Purge History” on page 48

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 35

”Smart Forms” on page 49

”Breadcrumbs” on page 50

”Adding Subfolders” on page 59

”Deleting Folders” on page 60

”Search Content Folder” on page 60

Managing Content Folders

Accessing the Content Folder

To access a content folder, follow these steps.

1. Access the Workarea.

2. Click the Content folder in left side of the Workarea.

3. All content in the root content folder appears in the right frame.

In the left frame, the content folder expands to display its subfolders.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 36

Managing Content Folders

N

OTE

To learn about modifying the folder display, see ”Modifying the Folder Display” on page 41 .

From this screen, you can perform administrative actions and maintain content. Each folder displays the following information about its content.

Field

Title

Language

ID

Status

Date

Modified

Last Editor

Description

The name given to the content by the creator.

The content’s language. See Also: ”Working with Multi-

Language Content” on page 116

The number Ektron CMS400.NET assigns to the content. It is used to retrieve the content from the database.

The content’s status. See Also:

”Content Status” on page 19

The most recent date that the content was added, edited, or published.

The last user who accessed the content.

Additionally, each folder has the following menus.

”New Menu” on page 38

”View Menu” on page 39

”Delete Menu” on page 40

”Action Menu” on page 40

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 37

Managing Content Folders

New Menu

Menu

Option

Folder

Blog

Creates the following new item within selected folder

folder

Blog

Discussion

Board

HTML

Content

HTML Form/

Survey

Smart Form

Office

Documents

Discussion Board

HTML content

HTML Form, Poll, or Survey

Smart Form

Office Document

Managed

Files

Multimedia Multimedia file, any supported type

Open Office Open Office file, any supported type

Collection

Menu

Managed file, any supported type

Collection

Menu

For more information, see

”Adding Subfolders” on page 59

“Blogs” in the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

USer Manual

”Discussion Boards” on page 324

”Adding Content” on page 72

”Managing HTML Forms” on page 226

”Smart Forms” on page 49

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual

Section “Using the Document

Management Functionality” > “Working with Microsoft Office Documents”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual

Section “Using the Document

Management Functionality” > “Working with Managed Files”

”Managing Multimedia Assets” on page 250

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual

Section “Using the Document

Management Functionality” > “Working with Open Office Files”

”Collections” on page 423

”Menu Feature” on page 427

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 38

Managing Content Folders

View Menu

The View Menu provides the following functions.

Menu Option

All types

HTML content

HTML Form/Survey

Office Documents

Managed Files

Multimedia

Open Office

Language

Menus

Collections

Function

Displays all content types of selected language.

For more information, see

Limits folder display to selected content

type. For example, choose View > Office

Documents, and see only Office

Documents in the folder -- other content types are suppressed.

This is especially helpful if the folder has a lot of items, and you are looking for only one type of content.

”Adding Content” on page 72

”Managing HTML Forms” on page 226

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual Section “Using the Document Management

Functionality” > “Working with

Microsoft Office Documents”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual Section “Using the Document Management

Functionality” > “Working with

Managed Files”

”Managing Multimedia Assets” on page 250

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual Section “Using the Document Management

Functionality” > “Working with

Open Office Files”

Limits display within a folder to one language.

The language setting also determines the language of any new items you create in the folder.

Lets user view and work with menus

Lets user view and work with Collection

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual section “Working with Menus” >

“Adding a New Menu” “Adding a

New Menu” > “Adding a Menu via

Content Folder

”Collections” on page 423

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 39

Menu Option

Archived Content

Folder Properties

Managing Content Folders

Function For more information, see

Lets user view and work with Archived content. That is, content that passed its scheduled End Date and whose archive option is either Archive and remove

from site or Archive and remain on

Site.

Ektron CMS400.NET User manual section “Scheduling Content to

Begin and End” > “Setting Archive

Options”

Lets user view and edit a folder’s properties. In the properties screens, you can set permissions, approvals, etc.

”Folder Properties” on page 42

Delete Menu

This menu lets you perform the following functions.

.

Menu option

Delete this folder

Delete content

Lets you More Information

Delete current folder and all of its content

”Deleting Folders” on page 60

Delete one, some, or all content items within folder

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Working with Folders and

Content” > “Deleting Content”

Action Menu

This menu lets you perform the following functions.

Menu option

Export for translation

Move/Copy

Content

Search

Lets you

Prepare content for translation by a translation agency

Move or copy content to another folder.

More Information

”Using the Language Export Feature” on page 131

”Moving or Copying Content” on page 76

Search through content in the Workarea.

”Search Content Folder” on page 60

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 40

Managing Content Folders

Modifying the Folder Display

Ektron CMS400.NET

provides two techniques for displaying the folder tree. (The folder tree appears in the left frame when the

Content tab is selected, as shown below.)

Classic - used in previous versions of

Ektron CMS400.NET

Ajax - available in version 5.1 or higher

The following table contrasts the two techniques.

Technique

Classic

Ajax

How it Works

Fetches all folders and subfolders while initially displaying the Workarea

Initially fetches only folders one level below Content (root) folder. Subsequent levels are fetched when user clicks the parent folder.

Advantage

While initial wait time may be longer, the wait time for opening child folders is shorter

Can reduce initial wait time when displaying the Workarea

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 41

Managing Content Folders

By default,

Ektron CMS400.NET

uses the Ajax technique. To change it to Classic, open the web.config file in your site root and change the value of the ek_treemodel

setting from one (1) to zero

(0).

To change the technique back to Ajax, change the value of the ek_treemodel

setting from zero (0) to one (1).

Folder Properties

The folder properties screen lets you set permissions and approvals for a folder. You can also assign or modify the folder’s metadata, Web Alerts, and Smart Forms.

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group and those defined in the Manage

Members for Role: Folder User Admin screen can view, add, or edit folder properties. (

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42 ) In addition, if a user is not a

member of the Administrators group, he must be given permission for individual folders on the Folder Properties > View Permissions for Folder screen. (

See Also:

”Setting Permissions” on page 25 )

Accessing the Folder Properties Screen

To access the folder properties screen, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to and click the content folder whose properties you want to edit.

2. Click View > Folder Properties.

3. The folder’s View Properties screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 42

Managing Content Folders

If you want to change any properties, click the Edit button ( ) to proceed to the edit screen.

The table below describes the fields on the Folder Properties screen.

Fields on the Folder Properties Screen

Tab

Properties

Field

Foldername

Description

Edit the name of the content folder.

Note: You cannot change the root folder name.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 43

Tab

Managing Content Folders

Field

Description

Style Sheet filename for this folder: (leave blank to inherit)

Description

Edit the description of the content folder.

Specify a style sheet that defines the styles of the content within the content folder. Or, leave this field blank to inherit the style sheet from the parent content folder.

This style sheet affects content while being edited but has no effect on how the content appears on your Web site. To set or edit the style sheet that determines how your Web pages display, open the page’s Web form and place a

<link rel=”stylesheet”...

tag within its <HEAD> tags.

Template filename for this folder: (leave blank to inherit)

Specify a template for the folder. Or, leave this field blank to inherit the template from the parent content folder.

Content in this folder appears on your Web site within the

template you choose. See Also: ”Creating/Updating

Templates” on page 62

Page Templates Lets you specify one or more templates for content in this folder. See Also:

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

Lets you set up and manage several Web sites under one

CMS. See Also:

”Support for Multiple Sites” on page 227

Multi-Site Domain

Configuration

Should Office documents added to this folder be published in other format?

Note: This field only appears if the Enable

Office documents to be published in other

format property is checked in the

Settings >

Configuration > Setup screen.

See Also:

”Updating Setup

Information” on page 26

(continued on next page)

Select Publish Office documents as PDF, Publish Office

documents as HTML, or No to elect neither choice.

Publish Office documents as PDF

(This field only appears if the Publish as PDF property is checked in Settings > Configuration > Setup.)

Select this option if Office documents in this folder are published as PDF files. See Also:

”PDF Generation” on page 258

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 44

Managing Content Folders

Tab

Metadata

Web Alerts

Smart Forms

Breadcrumb

Field Description

Should Office documents added to this folder be published in other format?

(continued)

Publish Office documents as HTML

Select this option if you want to publish Office documents in this folder in an HTML format.

If you select this option, Office documents are transformed to HTML format, which means they are formatted to display within a browser. As a result, anyone visiting your site can view the document, whether or not they have Microsoft

Office software installed on their computer.

If you do not elect this option, nor Publish Office

documents as PDF, a site visitor without Microsoft Office software cannot view a page that contains an Office document.

Note: Only Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files can be published as HTML.

Note: This property is not inherited from a parent folder, nor is it inherited by any subfolders below this folder.

For more information about working with Office documents, see the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual section “Using the Document Management Functionality“> “Working with

Office Documents.”

Quick Deploy:

Replicate Folder

Contents

Metadata/Custom-

Fields available for folder

Determines whether content in this folder is updated when

Quick Deploy is run.

See Also:

See

”Quick Deploy” on page 207

”Assigning Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

Web Alert fields for this folder

See

”Assigning Web Alert Information to Content” on page 262

See

”Smart Forms” on page 49

Inherit Parent

Configuration

Inherit Parent

Configuration

See

”Breadcrumbs” on page 50

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 45

Managing Content Folders

Folder Properties Toolbar

The Folder Properties screen contains these toolbar buttons.

Button Name

Edit Properties

Permissions

Modify

Preapproval

Group

Approvals

Description

Access the Edit Folder Properties screen

Access the folder’s Permissions

Table

Set or update preapproval group assigned to folder

Access the folder’s approvals table

More Information

”Editing Folder Properties” on page 46

”Setting Permissions” on page 25

”Automatic Creation of

Tasks Associated with

Content” on page 301

”Setting Approval Chains” on page 34

”Purge History” on page 48

Purge History Access the folder’s purge history table

Restore Web Alert

Inheritance

Assigns the folder’s Web Alert properties to all content in folder

”Inheriting Content-Level

Web Alert Information from

Its Folder” on page 264

Back Go to previous screen

Editing Folder Properties

A content folder’s properties consist of

name

description

style sheet

template

Metadata

Web Alerts

Smart Forms

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 46

Managing Content Folders

To edit any properties for a folder, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Properties screen for the folder you want to

edit, as described in ”Accessing the Folder Properties Screen” on page 42

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The folder’s Edit Properties screen appears.

4. Make the necessary changes to the content folder’s properties.

See

”Fields on the Folder Properties Screen” on page 43 .

5. Click the Update button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 47

Managing Content Folders

Purge History

Field

The Purge History option lets you delete historical versions of content in a folder. When purging, your options are

specify a date before which historical versions are purged

indicate whether the purge includes a folder’s subfolders

purge published as well as checked-in versions of content

N

OTE

Only Ektron CMS400.NET administrators and users identified on the Manage

Members for Role: Folder User Admin screen can purge history.

To purge the history for a content folder, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Folder Properties screen for the content folder you want to purge the history for, as described in

”Accessing the Folder Properties Screen” on page 42 .

2. Click the Purge History button ( ).

3. The Purge History screen appears.

4. Use the following table to customize the Purge History options.

Description Required?

Only purge historical versions before

Specify a date to limit the number of historical versions to purge. When specified, only historical versions with a date before this date are purged.

Yes

Recursive Purge Purges historical records for content in this folder’s subfolders.

No

Purge versions marked as Published

Purges published versions of content as well as checkedin versions.

No

5. Click the Purge History button ( ).

6. A confirmation message is displayed.

7. Click OK to continue.

8. Ektron CMS400.NET executes the purge and displays a confirmation when complete.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 48

Managing Content Folders

Smart Forms

Use the Smart Forms screen to assign one or more XML configurations to a folder. (To learn about how Smart Forms are

created, see ”Managing XML Content” on page 126

.)

When creating new content in a folder, the New menu provides a

Smart Form option. This option displays a secondary menu, which lists Smart Forms that you can use to create XML content. (See graphic below.)

This section explains how to determine the list of Smart Forms available when creating content.

Inheritance and Smart Forms

A folder’s Smart Forms can be inherited from the parent folder, or you can break inheritance and assign a unique group of Smart

Forms. Use the Inherit Parent Configuration checkbox to retain or break inheritance.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 49

Managing Content Folders

Assigning Smart Forms to a Folder

If you break inheritance, you then select the Smart Forms that can be assigned to content in the folder using the Smart Forms dropdown list (shown below).

You can preview any Smart Form by clicking the Preview button

( ). To add any Smart Form, select it from the dropdown list and click Add.

To remove a Smart Form, click Remove.

Breadcrumbs

W

ARNING

!

The information described in this section is for use with the FolderBreadcrumb server control, not the BreadCrumb server control. For additional information on each server control, see The Developer Manual sections “Introduction to Ektron

CMS400.NET Server Controls” > “BreadCrumb Server Control” and

Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET Server Controls” > “FolderBreadcrumb

Server Control”.

Use the Breadcrumb tab to define a site map for the folder or inherit one from the parent folder. Breadcrumbs improve the way site visitors can navigate your site. Below is an example.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 50

Managing Content Folders

The following topics explain Breadcrumbs in more detail.

”Inheritance and Breadcrumbs” on page 51

”Steps to Add a Breadcrumb” on page 51

”Reordering the Breadcrumb Items” on page 54

”Editing a Breadcrumb Item” on page 56

”Removing a Breadcrumb Item” on page 58

Inheritance and Breadcrumbs

A folder’s breadcrumbs can be inherited from the parent folder, or you can break inheritance and assign a path of breadcrumbs. Use the Inherit Parent Configuration checkbox to retain or break inheritance.

Working with Breadcrumbs in a Folder

If you break inheritance to the parent folder, you can assign a folder path for your breadcrumb.

Steps to Add a Breadcrumb

Navigate to the folder for which you want to add the breadcrumbs.

The example below adds three breadcrumbs to the trail.

1. On the View Contents of Folder screen, click View > Folder

Properties.

2. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 51

3. Click the Breadcrumb tab.

4. The Edit Breadcrumbs screen appears.

Managing Content Folders

5. In the Add New Item section of the screen, add the following information.

Title - the name of the breadcrumb as you want it to appear in the breadcrumb trail

URL Link - the URL path to the breadcrumbs destination. For example, default.aspx. If you are not sure where the file is located, click the Binoculars ( ), and the library for quicklinks appears.

You can also enter a URL, for example, www.ektron.com

.

Description - add a description for the breadcrumb

6. Click the Add button ( ).

7. The first item in the breadcrumb path appears

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 52

.

Managing Content Folders

8. Repeat Steps five and six two more times.

9. The items in the breadcrumb now appear like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 53

Managing Content Folders

10. Click the Save button ( ).

Reordering the Breadcrumb Items

1. On the View Contents of Folder screen, click View > Folder

Properties.

2. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

3. Click the Breadcrumb tab.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 54

4. The Edit Breadcrumbs screen appears.

Managing Content Folders

5. Click a breadcrumb item.

W

ARNING

!

Do not click on the red X. This deletes the breadcrumb item.

See Also:

”Removing a Breadcrumb Item” on page 58 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 55

Managing Content Folders

6. Click the green Up and Down buttons ( around in the list.

) to move the item

7. Once the items are in the correct position, click the Save button

( ).

Editing a Breadcrumb Item

1. On the View Contents of Folder screen, click View > Folder

Properties.

2. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

3. Click the Breadcrumb tab.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 56

4. The Edit Breadcrumbs screen appears.

Managing Content Folders

5. Click a breadcrumb item.

W

ARNING

!

Do not click the red X. This deletes the breadcrumb item.

See Also:

”Removing a

Breadcrumb Item” on page 58

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 57

Managing Content Folders

6. In the Add New Item section, edit the information.

).

7. Click the Save button (

8. Click the Save button ( ).

Removing a Breadcrumb Item

1. On the View Contents of Folder screen, click View > Folder

Properties.

2. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

3. Click the Breadcrumb tab.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 58

4. The Edit Breadcrumbs screen appears.

Managing Content Folders

5. Click the Red X ( ) next to the breadcrumb item you want to remove.

6. The breadcrumb item is deleted.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

Adding Subfolders

To further organize content on your Web site, create subfolders to store related content. To add a sub folder, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to and click the folder within which you want to create a subfolder.

2. Click New > Folder.

3. The Add a Subfolder screen appears.

4. Complete the fields. See

”Fields on the Folder Properties

Screen” on page 43 .

5. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 59

Managing Content Folders

You can modify the subfolder’s properties, permissions, approval chain, etc. For a list of options, see

”Folder Properties Toolbar” on page 46

.

Deleting Folders

You can delete obsolete folders from the Ektron CMS400.NET

Web site.

N

OTE

You cannot delete the top-level folder, Content.

C

AUTION

!

Deleting a content folder permanently deletes the content and Quicklinks that belong to the content folder, as well as its subfolders.

To delete a content folder, follow these steps.

1. In your Workarea, navigate to the content folder you want to delete.

2. Click the Delete Folder button ( ).

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.

Search Content Folder

You can search a folder to locate content within your Web site. Use this feature to find content when you know the text that needs to be updated but are unsure of its folder or where it is on the Web site.

The search only looks through the current folder and its subfolders.

So if you want to search the entire site, begin with the root content folder.

To learn more about searching through folders on

Ektron

CMS400.NET

, see the following section of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual “Working with Folders and Content” > “Searching the

Workarea.”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 60

M a n a g i n g H T M L C o n t e n t

Managing HTML Content

When you enter the Content folder in Ektron CMS400.NET as an administrator, you can control every aspect of the content and folders. Some controls include setting permissions, approvals, and adding, editing, publishing, and deleting content. Below is an example of the Content folder.

This chapter explains how to add, edit, publish, and delete content.

Permissions and Approvals are explained in later chapters.

See Also:

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

”Adding Content” on page 72

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 61

Managing HTML Content

”Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400.NET Documents” on page 74

”Viewing Content” on page 75

”Editing Content” on page 76

”Moving or Copying Content” on page 76

”Deleting Content” on page 80

”Content History” on page 80

”Content Permissions” on page 80

”Content Approvals” on page 80

”Link Checking” on page 81

”Assigning Tasks to Content” on page 81

”Content Properties” on page 81

”Content Rating” on page 82

Creating/Updating Templates

During the setup of your

Ektron CMS400.NET

Web site, templates are created for your Web pages. A template typically includes page headers and footers as well as placeholders for content, forms, summaries, calendars, collections, or other page elements.

A template included with Ektron’s sample site appears below.

Notice that the top of the screen contains headers that appear on several pages. Other areas contain links to

Ektron CMS400.NET

objects, such as menus and text. The developer can easily modify the content inside these areas.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 62

Managing HTML Content

N

OTE

To learn more about creating templates, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s Manual section “Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET Server

Controls” > “Setting Up a Template.”

Templates are more fully explained through the following topics.

”How Templates are Used” on page 64

”Declaring Templates” on page 64

”Inheritance of Folder Templates” on page 67

”Assigning Templates to Folders” on page 68

”Assigning Templates to Content” on page 70

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 63

Managing HTML Content

How Templates are Used

Except for your Web site’s home page, all pages on your site are made accessible by hyperlinks. Hyperlinks can appear within content. They are also used to link content items from list summaries, menus, and collections.

The template is a key component of the hyperlink definition -- it defines the template in which to display the content. As seen in the example below, when the user selects Email, that content item (ID

87) will display within the contactinformation.aspx template.

Declaring Templates

After creating your templates, declare them within

Ektron

CMS400.NET

. To do this, go to the Active System Templates screen, available from Settings > Configuration > Template

Configuration.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 64

Managing HTML Content

From this screen, you can add new templates, or delete or update existing ones.

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrators group and users defined in the Manage

Members for Role: Template Configuration screen have permission to add, delete or update templates.

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

See Also:

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

”Adding a New Template” on page 65

”Deleting a Template” on page 66

”Updating a Template” on page 66

Adding a New Template

To add a new template, click the Add button ( ). The Add a New

Template screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 65

Managing HTML Content

Enter the path to the new template and click the Save button ( ).

Deleting a Template

To delete a template, click Delete next to the template.

You can only delete a template if it is not assigned as any folder’s default template. If you choose a template that is assigned as a default, a screen tells you why you cannot delete it and lists the folders for which it is the default.

If you delete a template that is not used as a default but is applied to content, that content’s template is changed to its folder’s default template.

Updating a Template

Use the update command to change all references from an old to a new template. For example, your old template is named

MyTemplate.aspx. You can want replace all references to it to

Updatetemplate.aspx.

To do this, follow these steps.

1. Click Update next to the template.

2. A new screen appears.

3. Enter Updatetemplate.aspx.

4. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 66

Managing HTML Content

Inheritance of Folder Templates

By default, all folders below the root folder inherit from their parent.

However, you can override the default and assign a unique set of templates to any folder.

Before you can change a folder’s template assignment, you must break inheritance from the parent folder. To do this, go to the Edit

Folder Properties screen and uncheck the box next to Inherit

Parent Template Configuration (illustrated below). See Also:

”Editing Folder Properties” on page 46

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 67

Managing HTML Content

Each folder must have at least one template. Also, one template must be chosen as the default.

Assigning Templates to Folders

If you break template inheritance, all inherited templates are initially assigned to the folder. You can then remove unwanted templates or add new ones.

All available templates appear in the template dropdown list

(illustrated below). Select any that you want to be available from the folder and click Add.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 68

Managing HTML Content

The list of available templates is managed through the ActIve

System Templates screen. See Also: ”Declaring Templates” on page 64

Adding a Template to a Folder

To add a new template, click the Add button ( ). The Add a New

Template screen appears.

Enter the path to the new template and click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 69

Managing HTML Content

Assigning Templates to Content

A folder’s default template is automatically applied to all content in the folder. However, you can change a content item’s template to any of those assigned to the folder. This relationship is illustrated below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 70

Managing HTML Content

To change the template applied to a content item, edit that content, and go to the Templates tab as shown above. Then, select a template to apply to the content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 71

Managing HTML Content

As explained in

”How Templates are Used” on page 64

, the template assigned to the content will be used whenever a hyperlink is created to it.

See Also:

”Editing Content” on page 76

Adding Content

Ektron CMS400.NETallows for several types of content.

HTML - Content created using HTML code.

HTML Form/Survey - Users can create and maintain HTML forms to collect information and opinions from visitors to your

Web site.

Smart Forms- Content created using an XML configuration

Multimedia Files - Files that include audio, video, or both.

Microsoft Office Documents - Content created in Microsoft

Office and stored in CMS400.NET via the Document

Management functionality.

Open Office Documents - Content created Open Office and stored in CMS400.NET via the Document Management functionality.

Managed Files - Content created with software external to the

CMS and stored in CMS400.NET via the Document

Management functionality. These files are typically .pdf, .gif,

.jpeg, .zip, and .txt files.

Office documents and Managed files are added to the CMS in one of two ways:

By dragging and dropping files from Windows Explorer to the drag and drop box in the Workarea. See Also: The User

Manual section “Using the Document Management

Functionality” > “Importing Files via Drag and Drop” or

By choosing the type of content from the Content Type dropdown box. Then, clicking the Add Content button or Add

Several Files button. See Also: The User Manual section

“Using the Document Management Functionality”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 72

Managing HTML Content

See Also:

”Adding HTML Content” on page 73

”Adding XML Content” on page 73

”Creating New Content” on page 124

”Translating Content” on page 125

Adding HTML Content

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual Section “Working with

Folders and Content” > “Adding Content”.

Adding XML Content

If one or more Smart Forms are assigned to a content folder, users can create XML content within it. Any folder (other than the root content folder) can have a unique group of Smart Forms or inherit

them from the parent folder. See Also: ”Smart Forms” on page 49

To add XML content, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, browse to a folder to which at least one Smart

Form has been assigned.

2. Click New > Smart Form then select the Smart Form you will use for the content.

N

OTE

When selecting the folder to create the content in, keep in mind the permissions that are going to be set on it, and which users will have permissions for it.

N

OTE

Depending on the Smart Form assigned to the content, the default XML may appear differently.

3. The procedure for creating XML content is similar to that for creating HTML content. Follow the steps described in

”Adding

HTML Content” on page 73 .

The Smart Form formats the screen display. When that content is published and a site visitor completes the screen, the user’s input is saved as XML. For more information, see

”Managing XML

Content” on page 126

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 73

Managing HTML Content

Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400.NET

Documents

Whenever content is created,

Ektron CMS400.NET

generates a unique identifier of that content. See Also:

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual > “Library Folder” > “Quicklinks and Forms.”

The identifier for Ektron CMS400.NET content is made up of these elements:

Site address

”The Template” on page 74

”The Content Variable” on page 74

”The Language Identifier” on page 75

W

ARNING

!

Only use the language identifier if you are forcing or changing the language.

The Template

The template determines much of the page layout. By itself, the template URL retrieves the empty template or the template with its default document.

N

OTE

You can set a default document for a template in the content function by inserting an id number.

See Also:

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

The Content Variable

A question mark (?) separates the template URL from the content variable. The content variable indicates which document or content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 74

Managing HTML Content

the server places in the template before displaying the page.

Below is a description of the URL format.

Example Description Content variable

ID=n http:// www.yourEktronwebsite.com / index.aspx?

ID=1

ID selects a single document to display. Use this variable for a single document template type. The value corresponds to the content’s id value.

The above variable’s name is based on the templates included in the Ektron CMS400.NET’s sample site. If your Web master changed the variable names in your site’s template, use the name of the corresponding variable in each template rather than the one above.

The Language Identifier

This part of the URL identifies the language selected by a visitor to your site. It only appears if your site supports multiple languages.

W

ARNING

!

Only use the language identifier if you are forcing or changing the language.

To learn more, see ”Multi-Language Support” on page 116 .

Viewing Content

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual Section “Working with

Folders and Content” > “Viewing Content”.

N

OTE

You can use the ek_PageSize

setting in the web.config file to determine the maximum number of items that can appear on a page before it “breaks.” When a page breaks, additional entries appear on another screen, and the following text appears near the bottom of the items list:

Page 1 of 2

[First Page] [Previous Page] [Next Page] [Last Page]

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 75

Managing HTML Content

Editing Content

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual Section “Working with

Folders and Content” > “Editing Content”.

Moving or Copying Content

You can move content from any folder to any other folder. Or, you can copy content from one folder to another. At the end of both procedures, a copy of the content resides in the new folder. The new content gets the next available

Content Id

number.

When copying, you leave the content in its original folder, while moving deletes the content from the original folder. Other than that difference, the procedure for performing both actions is virtually identical.

Who Can Move or Copy Content?

Only members of the Administrators user group or those assigned in the Roles > Folder User Admins screen can move or copy content. See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

and ”Guidelines for

Using The Folder-User Admin Role” on page 44

Which Content Can Be Moved Or Copied?

You can only move or copy content with a status of Approved

(Published). This includes expired content. If the content’s status is not published, you must wait for it to reach that status before moving or copying it.

What is Moved Or Copied?

When content is moved or copied, the following changes are made.

The content inherits permissions and the approval chain from the new folder.

The content’s Quicklink is moved or copied in the library to the destination folder. However, the Quicklink remains the same (that is, the default template doesn’t change). You can update this by editing the Quicklink. This procedure in described in the

Ektron

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 76

Managing HTML Content

CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Updating Default Template for

Multiple Quicklinks.”

Note If the Link Management setting in the web.config file is set to true

, you do not need to update the quicklink. Link Management automatically finds the correct template based on the current content folder.

If the new folder already contains content with the same title,

Ektron CMS400.NET

appends a number to the title to make it unique. For example:

ASP.NET Unleashed(2)

.

The new folder’s default template is assigned to the content

If the content has a Smart Form, it remains assigned even if the

Smart Form is not assigned to the new folder

Moving Or Copying One Content Item

To move or copy content to another folder, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Content screen for the content you want to move or copy, as described in

”Viewing Content” on page 75 .

2. Click the Move/Copy Content button ( ).

3. The Move/Copy Content screen is displayed.

4. Select either Move or Copy.

5. If you choose Copy, and you want the content to be published as soon as the copying is complete, check Publish Copied

Content.

If you want the content status in the new folder to be checked in, uncheck the Publish Copied Content checkbox.

6. Enter the path to the destination folder. If you don’t know the path, click Select Folder. Then, navigate to the destination folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 77

Managing HTML Content

N

OTE

Only approved or expired content has a checkbox in the left column. Content in other statuses cannot be moved or copied.

7. Click the Move/Copy Content button ( ).

8. A confirmation message is displayed.

9. Click OK to continue.

10. The content is moved or copied to the specified content folder.

The destination folder appears with the new content.

Moving Or Copying Several Content Items

To move or copy several content items in the same folder at once, follow these steps.

Note Only published and expired content can be moved or copied.

1. Navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to move or copy.

2. Click Action > Move/Copy Content.

3. The Move/Copy Contents of Folder screen is displayed.

4. Select either Move or Copy.

5. Enter the path to the destination folder. If you don’t know the path, click Select Folder. Then, navigate to the destination folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 78

Managing HTML Content

6. Check the boxes next to the content that you want to move or copy.

N

OTE

Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all.

7. Choose the content folder to move or copy the selected content from the drop down list.

8. Click the Move/Copy Content button ( ) to move or copy the selected content.

9. A confirmation message is displayed.

10. Click OK.

11. The content moves to the destination folder.

Viewing and Restoring Historical Versions of

Content

Each time a new version of content is published or checked in, the previous version is stored. Old versions of content may be accessed, and if desired, restored to the Web site.

For more information, see “Viewing and Restoring Previous

Content” section of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

Purging Historical Versions of Content

See

”Purge History” on page 48

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 79

Managing HTML Content

Scheduling Content

Scheduling content allows you to specify a future date and time when content will be visible on the Web site. Similarly, you can remove content from the Web site on a specified date and time.

For more information, see “Scheduling Content to Begin and End” in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

Deleting Content

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual Section “Working with

Folders and Content” > “Deleting Content”.

N

OTE

An Ektron Knowledge Base article explains how to delete content programmatically. Go to http://dev.ektron.com/fileshare.aspx

and click

Programmatically Delete Content.

Content History

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

user manual section “Viewing and

Restoring Previous Content”.

Content Permissions

See

”Setting Permissions” on page 25 .

Content Approvals

See

”Setting Approval Chains” on page 34

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 80

Managing HTML Content

Content Workflow

To learn about the process content must pass through to get published to your Web site, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User

Manual section “Approving/Declining Content.”

Link Checking

The link checker button locates all content with a link to the displayed content. This feature is useful if you decide to delete content. You can use this to remove those links, which will not work after the deletion.

To display all content that links to the selected content, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Content screen for the content you want to execute the link checker for, as described in

”Viewing Content” on page 75

.

2. Click the Check Links button ( ).

3. A screen displays each content item with a link to the current content.

4. Click the content title to access the View Content screen for the selected content and perform the necessary actions on it.

Assigning Tasks to Content

See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User’s Manual > “Managing Tasks” >

“Creating Tasks via Content”.

Content Properties

The Content Properties screen shows whether a search will find the content. To view the Content Properties screen, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Content screen for the content whose properties you want to view, as described in

”Viewing Content” on page 75

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 81

Managing HTML Content

2. Click the Properties button ( ).

3. The View Properties for the Content screen appears.

4. Check the Content Searchable box if you want this content to be included in an external search of your CMS Web site. That is, a search that is initiated from a page that includes the

Search server control.

This box has no effect on your ability to find this content from the Workarea search.

If you uncheck this box,

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

excludes this content when a search is performed.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

N

OTE

If you click the Properties button for content that is displayed on a Web page, the

View Content screen opens in the Workarea window.

Content Rating

Ektron CMS400.NET

lets you place a rating scale on any content on your Web site. The scale lets you collect feedback by giving site visitors the opportunity to rate the content. A visitor can rank the content on a numerical scale of one through nine, as well as submit a text comment (see illustration below).

N

OTE

The user’s browser must have cookies enabled in order to submit a content rating.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 82

Managing HTML Content

The content rating feature is explained through the following topics.

”Inserting the Content Rating Server Control” on page 83

”Limiting Visitors to One Rating” on page 84

”Viewing the Content Rating Report” on page 84

Inserting the Content Rating Server Control

To have a content ratings graph appear on a Web page, your developer inserts a server control. This procedure is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual section “Content Rating

Server Control.”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 83

Managing HTML Content

Limiting Visitors to One Rating

Ektron CMS400.NET

assumes you want to limit a user to rating a content item once. If a regular or membership user logs in before rating a piece of content,

Ektron CMS400.NET

remembers the user

ID. If any other site visitor does not log in before rating content,

Ektron CMS400.NET

places a cookie on the site visitor’s computer.

So, whenever a page with a Content Rating server control is visited,

Ektron CMS400.NET

checks for the user ID or cookie. If

neither exists, it displays a rating scale as displayed in ”Content

Rating” on page 82 . If the page has already been rated by the user,

the following version of the control appears.

N

OTE

Your developer can customize many aspects of the control. So, it may not match the illustration.

Viewing the Content Rating Report

All Content Rating data for a content item is maintained and can be displayed in detail and summary format. To view this data, follow these steps.

1. Sign in to

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

2. Either

-

browse to the content item

-

right click the mouse

-

click View Advanced Report

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 84

Managing HTML Content

or

-

Go to Workarea > Content.

-

Navigate to the folder that contains the content.

-

Navigate to the content item.

-

Click the View Rating Reports toolbar button ( ).

The Content Rating Report shows a summary of all ratings submitted for the content.

If desired, you can select a range of dates and limit the display of ratings data to those dates. Select start and end dates (using calendar buttons at the top of the screen) and click Get Result.

Viewing Content Rating Details

Also, to view details of the ratings data, click Get Result (see illustration below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 85

Managing HTML Content

Exporting Details to Excel

If Microsoft Excel is installed on your computer, you can export the ratings detail to Excel for further manipulation of the data. To do so, the Click Export to Excel button.

Purging Rating Data

You can to remove content rating data to free up space in your database. To do so, select the date range of the data you want to purge using Start Date and End Date. Then click the Purge button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 86

M e ta d a ta

Metadata is information about a content item, such as its title and language.

Ektron CMS400.NET

provides extensive and flexible support for metadata, which it uses in both standard and innovative ways.

This section explains the types of metadata available, and procedures for working with metadata through the following subtopics.

”Types of Metadata” on page 87

”Working with Metadata Definitions” on page 98

Types of Metadata

Five kinds of metadata can be added to

Ektron CMS400.NET

content.

Metadata type

Meta tag

HTML tag

Searchable

Description For more information, see

Resides in the source code of a Web page. Helps search engines find a Web page.

”Meta Tags” on page 88

”Title Tag” on page 89

Information about the page to be used by a Web browser. For example,

<title> identifies the content in the screen title, the favorites list, and the browser’s history.

Appears on your Web site’s search page, below standard search fields. Helps site visitors find content on your Web site.

”Searchable Metadata” on page 91

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 87

Metadata

Metadata type

Related content

Simple Dublin

Core

Description For more information, see

A related content item, collection, List Summary, or library item that accompanies a content item on a Web page.

”Related Content

Metadata” on page 93

A set of fifteen standard fields that cover the most useful information about content.

”Simple Dublin Core

Metadata” on page 96

Meta Tags

The META element is an extensible container for use in identifying specialized document meta-information. Meta-information has two main functions:

to provide a means to discover that a data set exists and how it might be obtained or accessed

to document the content, quality, and features of a data set, indicating its fitness for use

(Above text copied from www.w3.org/MarkUp/html-spec/htmlspec_5.html.)

Example Meta Tags

Creating and Deploying Meta Tag Definitions

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 88

Metadata

1. While creating a metadata definition, enter the metadata name at the Name field. For example, Description and Keywords.

See Also:

”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

2. Reply to the standard fields. See ”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100 .

3. Respond to the additional fields for meta tags. See ”Meta Tag

Additional Fields” on page 101

4. Add the definition to all applicable folders. See ”Assigning

Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

5. Add the definition to applicable content within the folder. See

”Adding Metadata to Content” on page 111

6. Add a Metadata server control to every Web form (.aspx page) on which the content will appear.

To learn how to do this, see the Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual section “Custom Functions (for your server platform)” > “Metadata Function”, “MetaData Server Control” and “MetaDataList Server Control.”

Title Tag

The title should identify the contents of the document in a global context. A browser may display the title of a document in a history list or as a label for the window displaying the document.

(Above text copied from www.w3.org/MarkUp/html-spec/htmlspec_5.html.)

Example Title Tag

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 89

Metadata

Example Meta Tags

Creating and Deploying Title Tag Definitions

1. While creating a metadata definition, enter Title at the Name

field. See Also: ”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

2. Reply to the standard fields. See ”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100 .

3. Respond to the additional field for HTML tags. See ”HTML Tag

Additional Field” on page 101

4. Add the definition to a folder. See

”Assigning Metadata to a

Folder” on page 108

5. Add the definition to content within the folder. See ”Adding

Metadata to Content” on page 111

6. Add a metadata control to every Web form (.aspx page) on which this content will appear.

To learn how to do this, see the Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual section “Custom Functions (for your server platform)” > “Metadata Function”, “MetaData Server Control” and “MetaDataList Server Control.”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 90

Metadata

Searchable Metadata

Searchable metadata appears on your Web site’s search page, below the standard search fields. This type of metadata helps site visitors find content on your Web site (illustrated below).

These search criteria also appear on the Workarea search screen.

(To access that screen, click Action > search from the View

Contents of Folder screen.) See illustration below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 91

Metadata

Creating and Deploying Search Tag Definitions

1. While creating a metadata definition, in the Name field, enter a description of the kind of data to be searched. (See examples circled above.) This title describes the search data on the

Metadata tab of the Folder Properties screen

Metadata tab of the View Content Screen

search screens

See Also:

”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

2. Reply to the standard fields. See ”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100 .

3. Respond to additional fields for Searchable Property. definitions. See

”Searchable Additional Fields” on page 102

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 92

Metadata

4. Add the definition to a folder. See

”Assigning Metadata to a

Folder” on page 108

5. Add the definition to content within the folder. See ”Adding

Metadata to Content” on page 111

6. The next time you visit the Workarea search screen, you will see the new field.

7. If you want site visitors to use this field when searching your

Web site, ask your developer to set the

ShowExtendedSearch property of the Search Server Control to true. This value lets the searchable metadata appear on the site search.

See Also:

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual >

“Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET Server Controls” >

“Search Server Control” > “Search Server Control Properties” >

“ShowExtendedSearch”

Related Content Metadata

You can associate the following types of content with a content item.

a content item

a collection

a list summary

one of the following types of library items

-

image

-

hyperlink

-

file

Then, you can set up a Web page so that whenever the source content item appears, the related information appears next to it.

For example, your Web site sells motorcycle helmets. On a page that shows a particular helmet, the left column lists a collection of motorcycle drivers who wear that helmet.

Related Content vs. MetadataList Server Control

This capability is similar to the MetadataList Server control. The difference is that MetadataList shows a link to every content item

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 93

Metadata

with a selected term in the keywords or title. Also, a MetadataList is associated with a Web form (.aspx page), not a content item.

Related content lets you connect a content item with several types of related content (see list above), and is associated with a content item, not a web form. For example, you can display a library image of the company logo on a page whenever content in a certain folder appears. For content in a different folder, a different logo could appear.

Creating and Deploying Related Content Definitions

1. While creating a metadata definition, in the Name field, enter a title of this kind of data. This title describes the metadata on the

Metadata tab of the Folder Properties screen

Metadata tab of the VIew Content Screen

See Also:

”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

2. Reply to the standard fields. See ”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100 .

The Type must end with the word Selector. Choices are highlighted below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 94

Metadata

For example, if you choose ListSummary Selector, a specified List Summary will appear on the page along with its associated content item.

Your choices are

Collection Selector

ListSummary Selector

Content Selector

Image selector (associates a library image with content)

Hyperlink Selector (associates a library hyperlink with

content)

File Selector (associates a library file with content)

3. Add the definition to all appropriate folders. See

”Assigning

Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

4. For each content item to which you want to associate related content, access its Metadata tab and identify the related item(s).

W

ARNING

!

If you are using Collection Selector type, only users with permission to work with collections can select a collection. Also, if you are using Image, Hyperlink or File

Selector type, only users with permission at least read-only Library permissions can select a library item.

See Also:

”Setting Permissions” on page 25

For example, a collection of pages describes motorcycle helmets. You want this collection to appear whenever a helmet is being viewed.

To set this up, you would

-

edit the helmet content item

-

click its Metadata tab

-

find the metadata definition for the collection

-

click Change

-

select the Helmet Collection

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 95

Metadata

5. Have your Web developer add code to each page on which the related item appears. To learn how to do this, access the developer sample page ( http://localhost/cms400demo/ default.aspx

) and read the Meta Associations description.

Simple Dublin Core Metadata

Simple Dublin Core is a set of fifteen standard names for metadata fields designed to cover the most useful items of information on a document. From the Dublin Core site FAQ: “Dublin Core metadata provides card catalog-like definitions for defining the properties of objects for Web-based resource discovery systems.” For more information, refer to the Usage Guide: http://www.dublincore.org/ documents/usageguide/.

By using the Metadata Server Control, you automatically create seven of the fifteen Dublin Core metadata fields. These fields are automatically filled with the information from the equivalent Ektron

CMS400.NET property. Below is a list of the seven fields and their

Ektron CMS400.NET equivalent. For more information on the

Metadata Server Control, see the Developer’s Manual section

“Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET Server Controls” > “MetaData

Server Control”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 96

Metadata

Dublin Core Field Name Ektron CMS400.NET Property

DC.title

Content block title

DC.description

DC.contributor

DC.date

DC.format

DC.identifier

DC.language

Plain text version of a content block teaser (summary)

Content block last editor name

Content block last edit date

“text/html”

URL of current page (from ASP.NET

Server.Request object)

CMS language cookie / current site language, expressed as a .NET

System.Globalization Culture Name

Creating the Additional Eight Fields

To fully comply with the Simple Dublin Core metadata element set, the administrator must create the remaining eight Dublin Core fields as standard CMS400.NET Metadata definitions and apply them to all CMS400.NET folders. Next, CMS users complete the appropriate values for each content block.

W

ARNING

!

When creating the Dublin Core metadata fields in the Metadata section of the

Workarea, you do not need to create the first seven fields in the table above. In addition, the names of the fields you create must match the names below. For example, in the name field, enter “DC.subject”. The DC identifies the metadata as

Dublin Core metadata.

The remaining eight Simple Dublin Core fields are described below:

N

OTE

These descriptions are from the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative site. For a more detailed description, visit http://www.dublincore.org

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 97

Metadata

DC.subject - The topic of the content of the resource.

Typically, a Subject is expressed as keywords, key phrases, or classification codes that describe the topic of the resource.

DC.type - The nature or genre of the content of the resource.

Type includes terms describing general categories, functions, genres, or aggregation levels for content.

DC.source - A reference to a resource from which the present resource is derived. For example, DC.source=”Image from page 54 of the 1922 edition of Romeo and Juliet”

DC.relation - A reference to a related resource.

DC.coverage - The extent or scope of the content of the resource. Coverage typically includes spatial location (a place name or geographic co-ordinates), temporal period (a period label, date, or date range) or jurisdiction (such as a named administrative entity). Examples: DC.coverage=”1995-1996”,

DC.coverage=”Boston, MA”, DC.coverage=”17th century” or

DC.coverage=”Upstate New York”.

DC.creator - An entity primarily responsible for making the content of the resource.

DC.publisher - The entity responsible for making the resource available.

DC.rights - Information about rights held in and over the resource. Typically, a Rights element contains a rights management statement for the resource, or reference a service providing such information.

Working with Metadata Definitions

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group and those defined in the Manage

Members for Role: Metadata-Admin screen can view, add, or edit metadata definitions.

See Also:

”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42

Procedures for creating, updating and deleting metadata definitions are explained in the following sections.

”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

”Viewing Metadata Definitions” on page 107

”Editing a Metadata Definition” on page 107

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 98

Metadata

”Deleting a Metadata Definition” on page 108

”Assigning Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

”Adding Metadata to Content” on page 111

Adding a Metadata Definition

Use the Add Metadata Properties screen to define metadata (such as keywords and title). You can define as many instances of metadata as you wish.

If your site supports multiple languages, you create metadata definitions for each supported language.

To define one instance of metadata, follow these steps.

W

ARNING

!

After creating a definition, you must assign it to all folders whose content should use it. You assign a metadata definition to a folder in the folder’s properties. See

”Assigning Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

.

1. From the Workarea’s left frame, click the Settings folder.

2. Click the Configuration folder to expand the tree.

3. Click the Metadata Definition folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 99

Field

Name

Type

Metadata

4. The View Metadata Definitions screen appears.

5. Select the language for the metadata you are about to define.

This metadata will only be available to content in this language.

6. Click the Add Metadata Definition button ( ).

7. The Add Metadata Definition screen appears. Using the following table, add the needed information.

Metadata Definition Fields

Editable

Description

Enter a name to identify this metadata.

From the drop-down list, select whether this tag is

a searchable property when inserted on the Web page - See Also:

”Searchable Additional Fields” on page 102 and

”Searchable Metadata” on page 91

an HTML tag (for example,

<title>

) - See Also: ”HTML Tag Additional Field” on page 101 and

”Title Tag” on page 89

a Meta tag (

<meta>

) - See Also: ”Meta Tag Additional Fields” on page 101

and ”Meta Tags” on page 88

Collection Selector, ListSummary Selector, Content Selector, Image

selector, Hyperlink Selector, File Selector - See Also: ”Related Content Metadata” on page 93

Check this box if you want to allow users to edit the contents of the metadata when creating or editing the metadata’s content.

Uncheck this box if you want uniform metadata for each content item that uses this metadata.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 100

Field

Display in Ektron

Explorer

Metadata

Description

Check this box if you want this metadata to appear in Ektron Explorer. If you check the box, and this metadata is assigned to content, the metadata value appears within Ektron Explorer, below the last edited date. The additional information could help Explorer users find the right content.

Examples might be a description of the content or the author. See illustration below.

HTML Tag Additional Field

See Also:

”Title Tag” on page 89

Field

Default Text

Description

Enter default content for the HTML tag. For example: content="document management web content management content management cms"

Meta Tag Additional Fields

N

OTE

For background information about metadata, see http://www.w3.org/TR/REChtml40/struct/global.html#edef-META .

See Also:

”Meta Tags” on page 88

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 101

Metadata

Field

Style

Remove Duplicates

Case Sensitive

Separator

Selectable Metadata

Allow Multiple

Selections

Allowed Selectable

Text

Description

Select from the drop-down list to indicate whether you want the style to be name or http-equiv.

For more information, see http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-html40/struct/ global.html#h-7.4.4.2

Check this box to remove duplicate words or phrases from the metadata.

Check this box to remove duplicates only if the letters and case of each letter match.

Enter a character to separate the metadata values. The default is a semicolon (;).

Check this box to force users to select from the options specified in the

Allow Selectable Text and Default Text fields.

If you do not check this box, users can create their own metadata.

Check this box to let users select multiple metadata values instead of one. If multiple values are allowed, use the separator character to delimit them.

If this box is not checked, all values appears in a drop-down list, and the user selects the correct one.

This field is only active if the Selectable Metadata box is checked.

Enter standard metadata that can be selected by users. Separate each option by the separator specified for the metadata definition.

This field is only active if the Selectable Metadata box is checked.

Enter default content for the metadata tag.

Default Text

Searchable Additional Fields

See Also:

”Searchable Metadata” on page 91

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 102

Metadata

Field

Publicly Viewable

Style

Default

Select from a List

Description

If you check the box, this search field appears on your Web site’s search screen. Site visitors can use the field to find content on your Web site.

Note: Regardless of whether this is checked, this search field appears on the Workarea’s Search Content Folder screen to help

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

users find content. Only logged-in users can access the

Workarea.

Select the style of the response field from these choices (available in a dropdown list). You are specifying the kind of information that a user adding searchable properties to content will enter to describe the data.

Later, anyone using the search can search on that information.

See Also:

”Assigning Metadata to a Folder” on page 108

Text - The user enters free text to describe the content.

Number - The user enters a number to describe the content.

Date - The user enters a date to describe the content.

Yes or No - The user answers yes or no to describe the content. For example, if the content describes automobile parts, the user could answer yes to include new and used parts or no to search for new parts only.

Select from a list - The user picks a from a list to describe the content.

For an illustration of this style on the Edit Content screen/Searchable

Properties tab and the Site Search screen, see

”Select from a List” on page 103 .

Multiple selections - The user selects an item from a dropdown list.

For an illustration of this style on the Edit Content screen/Searchable

Properties tab and the Site Search screen, see

”Multiple Selections” on page 104 .

See Also:

”Converting the Style of a Metadata Definition” on page 105

If desired, enter the most common response to this definition.

The default value is automatically applied to all existing content within folders to which this definition is assigned.

While editing content that uses this definition, a user can accept the default value or change it.

See Also:

”Effect of a Default Value on Required Metadata” on page 110

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 103

Appearance on Edit Content Screen > Metadata Tab

Metadata

Appearance on Search Screen

Multiple Selections

Appearance on Edit Content Screen > Metadata Tab

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 104

Metadata

Appearance on Search Screen

Converting the Style of a Metadata Definition

This section explains how

Ektron CMS400.NET

handles changing the style of a searchable property type of metadata. For example, you create a definition to collect Part Number. Originally, the style is text, but you later decide its style should be number.

When you change the style of searchable property type metadata,

Ektron CMS400.NET

attempts to maintain any data stored in content blocks that use the definition. For example, if the data style was number and you change it to text, the number stored for that metadata definition is converted to text and maintained in all content that uses it.

However, sometimes

Ektron CMS400.NET

cannot maintain the data when you change the style. For example, if you change a metadata definition style from number to date,

Ektron CMS400.NET

cannot convert those styles. In this case, any data stored in metadata definitions is lost.

The following table illustrates all conversion scenarios and how

Ektron CMS400.NET

handles each one. It indicates whether data is maintained after you convert from a data style in the left column to a style to its right.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 105

Metadata

Text

Number

Date

Boolean

Single Select

Multiple Select

Text Number Date Boolean

NO

Single

Select

NO

Multiple

Select

NO

-

OK

OK OK

-

NO

NO NO NO NO

OK

-

NO

NO NO NO

OK NO

-

NO

NO NO

OK NO NO

-

NO

OK

OK NO NO NO

-

Table legend

OK - Data is maintained

NO

- Data is lost during conversion

When you change the style of a metadata definition, the screen often gives you these choices:

Use existing data if possible, else default

Use default value

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 106

Metadata

Following these choices is a field that lets you define a default value. If you want to simply replace any existing data, select Use

default value and enter the new value in the Default field.

If the data is convertible (according to the table above), and you want to maintain existing data if possible, select Use existing data

if possible, else default. Then, enter a default value below. If the existing data cannot be maintained, the default value replaces it.

Viewing Metadata Definitions

You may view any metadata definition. To do so, follow these steps.

1. From the Workarea’s left frame, click the Settings folder.

2. Click the Configuration folder to expand the tree.

3. Click the Metadata Definition folder.

4. The View Metadata Definitions screen appears.

5. Select a language from the drop-down list.

6. Click the Metadata definition you want to view.

7. The View Metadata Definition screen appears. From here, you can edit and delete this definition.

See Also:

”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100

Editing a Metadata Definition

To edit a metadata definition, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Metadata Definition screen whose definition you want to edit, as described in

”Viewing Metadata

Definitions” on page 107 .

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The Edit Metadata Definition screen is displayed.

4. Make the necessary changes to the definition.

See Also:

”Metadata Definition Fields” on page 100

5. Click the Update button ( ).

What Happens When a Metadata Definition is Edited?

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 107

Metadata

If you create a metadata definition, assign it to a folder, then users insert metadata information into their content, the collected information takes on the characteristics of the metadata definition.

For example, if the metadata is title and its type is HTML tag, this is how it appears in the Web page’s source code.

<title>CMS Developer</title>

If you later change its type to Meta, the following effects occur:

metadata to which the definition has already been assigned maintains the previous style definition. For example,

<title>CMS

Developer</title>.

when you create a new content item that uses the metadata definition, its metadata takes on the new style. For example,

<meta name="title" content="CMS developer">

.

Deleting a Metadata Definition

You can remove metadata definitions that are no longer used from the Ektron CMS400.NET site. When you delete a definition, it is removed from every content item that uses it.

To delete a definition, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Metadata Definition screen for the definition, as described in

”Viewing Metadata Definitions” on page 107

.

2. Click the Delete button ( ).

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.

5. Another confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Assigning Metadata to a Folder

After creating a searchable metadata definition (see ”Adding a

Metadata Definition” on page 99

), assign it to folders whose content will use it.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 108

Metadata

On each folder’s properties screen, you determine which metadata definitions can be used. It may be some, all, or none of the metadata definitions.

The section of the folder properties screen used to assign metadata appears below. Only metadata definitions whose

Assigned box is checked can be completed by users working with content in the folder.

See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

Then, while creating or updating content, the user can insert the metadata information via the Metadata tab (illustrated below). The user can only enter metadata values for the types of metadata assigned to the content’s folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 109

Metadata

Requiring Users to Enter Metadata

You can determine that any metadata definition must be completed for content before it can be saved (see the Required checkboxes in the illustration above). This occurs both when new content is added and existing content is edited.

If you set a kind of metadata to be required, its label is red and includes an asterisk (*) on the Metadata tab of the Edit Content screen, as shown below.

If the user does not complete a required metadata field, a message informs him that it must be completed before he can save the content.

Effect of a Default Value on Required Metadata

A default value can be defined when creating or editing a metadata

definition. See Also: ”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

If a default value is defined for a required metadata field, the default value is used when the user saves the content. In this case, the user is not prompted to enter a value because the default value is sufficient.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 110

Metadata

Inheritance of Metadata by Folder

Each folder can inherit metadata fields from its parent folder or have a unique set of them. The information includes not only which kinds of metadata are assigned but also which ones are required.

For example, you could assign the top folder (Content) all metadata definitions, while you assign the Contacts folder (directly below it) none.

On every folder’s properties screen, use the Break Inheritance check box (illustrated below) to determine if metadata definitions are the same as the parent folder or unique.

By default, Break Inheritance is not checked, which means that all folders inherit metadata definitions from the root folder (Content).

When you check the Break Inheritance check box, all inherited values appear by default (that is, Assigned and Required boxes are either checked or unchecked). You can then change which boxes are checked/unchecked as desired.

Adding Metadata to Content

When a user creates or updates content, he can define its metadata within the assignments specified for the folder.

Default metadata are applied without user intervention. Instructions for adding metadata are found in the Adding or Editing Data

Metadata section of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 111

A d d i n g C o n t e n t

P r o g r a m m a t i c a l l y

Content can be created using a special function which lets users add new content without logging in. To accomplish this, your Web site developer places a form on your Web site which lets users submit content without logging in. Here is a sample

Add Content form.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 112

Adding Content Programmatically

Your Web site developer can customize this form to better suit your needs. See the Ektron CMS400.NET Developer Manual for additional information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 113

Content Reports

C o n t e n t R e p o r ts

The Reports folder contains various content reports. For information about them, see the Content Workflow Reports section of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 114

M a n a g i n g L i b r a r y I t e m s

Managing Library Items

Before users can insert images and files into their content, they must be uploaded to the server that contains

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

Each user, depending on their permissions, can upload images and files through the library in their Workarea.

In the library, you determine the types of files that can be uploaded and each user’s library permissions.

What’s In This Chapter?

This chapter assumes you are familiar with the Library Folder chapter of the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual. As a result, the chapter only provides information that is unique to administrators.

The following topics are covered in this chapter:

”Library Folders and Permissions” on page 115

”Folder Properties” on page 116

”Performing Actions on Library Items” on page 119

”Load Balancing” on page 120

”If You Have an Ektron WebImageFX License Key...” on page 123

Library Folders and Permissions

Whenever a new content folder is created and permissions given to it, a corresponding new folder is created in the library. The new folder inherits permissions from the content folder.

Items added to library folders are only accessible by users with permission to the corresponding content folder. If items are added to a library folders directly under the main library folder, all users with at least library Read-Only permissions can use those library items in their content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 115

Managing Library Items

Conversely, if a library item is uploaded to a folder to which only one person has permissions, that is the only user who can use that library asset.

Folder Properties

The library folder properties contains library-related information, including load balance settings, image and file types that are allowed to be uploaded, as well as other settings.

The following buttons indicate actions you can perform on a library folder.

Button Description

Folder properties

Search

Back to previous screen

For more information, see

”Accessing the Library Properties Screen” on page 116

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual section

“Library Folder” > “Searching the Library”

Accessing the Library Properties Screen

As an administrator, you have permission to change the library properties. To view the properties of the library folder, follow these steps.

1. Access a library folder, as explained in

”Folder Properties” on page 116

.

2. Click the Properties button ( ).

3. The Library Management window appears, displaying the following settings.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 116

Managing Library Items

The Library Management Settings

Field

Image Extensions

Image Upload Directory

Physical Path

Verified

File Extensions

File Upload Directory

Physical Path

Verified

Description

The types of image files that a content contributor can upload to the library. You can add as many image file extensions as you want, or have none. If no extensions appear, no one can upload image files to the specified folder.

Specifies where the uploaded images are saved on the Web server. By default, the image upload directory is

Web root/ek_sitepath/ uploadedimages

. The ek_sitepath

value is set in the Web.config file.

Note: You must create the directory in your Web root manually, before adding it in CMS400.NET.

See Also:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Setup Manual section “Managing the web.config File.”

Path to file upload folder.

A green check notifies you that the physical location exists. A red X means that the location does not exist, and you need to set up that folder on the file server.

Specify the types of non-image files that a content contributor can upload to the library. You can add as many non-image file extensions as you want, or have none. If no extensions appear, no one can upload nonimage files to the specified folder.

Specifies where the uploaded files are saved on the Web server. By default, the file upload directory is

Web root/ek_sitepath/ uploadedfiles

. The ek_sitepath

value is set in the Web.config file.

Note: You must create the directory in your Web root manually, before adding it in CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Setup Manual section “Managing the web.config

File.”

Path to file upload folder.

A green check notifies you that the physical location exists. A red X means that the location does not exist, and you need to set up that folder on the file server.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 117

Managing Library Items

Editing Library Properties

To edit library properties, follow these steps.

1. Go to the Library Properties screen, as explained in ”Accessing the Library Properties Screen” on page 116

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

Library properties are described in the table below.

Field

Image Extensions

Image Upload Directory

Make Directory Relative to this Web site

Verified

File Extensions

Description

The types of image files that a content contributor can upload to the library. You can add as many image file extensions as you want, or have none. If no extensions appear, no one can upload image files to the specified folder.

Specifies where the uploaded images are saved on the Web server. By default, the image upload directory is

Web root/ek_sitepath/ uploadedimages

. The ek_sitepath

value is set in the Web.config file.

Note: You must create the directory in your Web root manually, before adding it in CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Setup Manual section “Managing the web.config

File.”

If you want to specify the image upload directory’s location as relative to your Web site root, check this box. (Your Web site root’s location appears to the right of Make Directory Relative to this Web site.)

A green check notifies you that the physical location exists. A red X means that the location does not exist, and you need to set up that folder on the file server.

Specify the types of non-image files that a content contributor can upload to the library. You can add as many non-image file extensions as you want, or have none. If no extensions appear, no one can upload nonimage files to the specified folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 118

Managing Library Items

Field

File Upload Directory

Make Directory Relative to this Web site

Verified

Description

Specifies where the uploaded files are saved on the Web server. By default, the file upload directory is

Web root/ek_sitepath/ uploadedfiles

. The ek_sitepath

value is set in the Web.config file.

Note: You must create the directory in your Web root manually, before adding it in CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Setup Manual section “Managing the web.config

File.”

If you want to specify the file upload directory’s location as relative to your

Web site root, check this box. (Your Web site root’s location appears to the right of Make Directory Relative to this Web site.)

A green check notifies you that the physical location exists. A red X means that the location does not exist, and you need to set up that folder on the file server.

Performing Actions on Library Items

The library is made up of images, files, form Quicklinks, hyperlinks, and regular Quicklinks that were added by Ektron CMS400.NET users. The following table displays the actions that can be performed for each library item type.

Action Files Images Hyperlinks Quicklinks Form

Quicklinks

Add

Edit

View

Overwrite

Delete

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 119

Action

Remove from server

Check links

Update URL

Managing Library Items

Files Images Hyperlinks Quicklinks Form

Quicklinks

Most actions can be performed by a user who is granted

permission to do so. See Also: ”Setting Permissions” on page 25

Load Balancing

This section explains how to create load balancing paths in Ektron

CMS400.NET. For further information about the steps needed to

set up load balancing outside of Ektron CMS400.NET, see ”Load

Balancing” on page 278

.

Load Balancing and Ektron CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET does not need to be aware that load balancing is taking place. However, the library items on all servers must be identical. Therefore, when a user uploads a new item to the Ektron CMS400.NET library, it must be replicated on all other servers in your load balancing model. To achieve this, Ektron

CMS400.NET uploads the items to default upload directory and any other folder defined in the library.

Ektron CMS400.NET provides to any administrator an interface for adding load balance folders to the application. These folders needs to be either a virtual or physical folder under the Ektron

CMS400.NET Web site. In most cases, this is a virtual folder that points to a mounted hard drive (another server).

N

OTE

See

”Configuring Load Balancing without Site Replication” on page 280 for more

information about this feature.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 120

Managing Library Items

Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen

To access the load balancing section in the library, follow these steps.

Column Title

1. Click the Library folder button.

2. Click the View Properties button ( ).

3. Click the View Load Balance Settings button ( ).

4. The View Library Load Balance Settings screen is displayed.

The screen’s columns are described in the following table.

Description

The path of the folder under your server’s Web site.

Web Path

Type

Images - load balance folder for uploaded images.

Files - load balance folder for uploaded files.

Relative

Verified

Physical Path

An x indicates if the folder is relative to your Ektron CMS400.NET Web site.

If the load balance folder exists in the proper location, a green check is used to verify that the folder exists. A red x is displayed when the folder does not exist in the specified location.

The physical location of the folder to which items will be uploaded.

Adding a New Load Balancing Folder

To add a new load balancing folder in the Ektron CMS400.NET library, follow these steps.

1. Access the view load balance settings screen, as described in

”Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen” on page 121 .

2. Click the Add button ( ) on View Library Load Balance

Settings screen.

3. The Add a Library Load Balancing Path screen is displayed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 121

Managing Library Items

Field

Images/Files

Load Balance Path

Make Relative

4. Use the following table to help you complete the form.

Description

Specify if the load balance path folder will be for images or files.

Enter the path of the folder.

If the folder (or virtual folder) resides under your Ektron CMS400.NET site root, check off the box to make the path relative to that. Otherwise, remove the check.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

Editing a Library Load Balance Path

If the Web path for a load balance folder has changed, you may edit it at any time.

To edit a load balance path, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Library Load Balance Settings screen, as described in

”Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen” on page 121 .

2. Click the Web Path of the load balance path you want to edit.

3. The Edit Library Load Balancing Path is displayed.

4. Make the necessary changes to the load balance path.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 122

Managing Library Items

5. Click the Update button ( ).

Deleting a Library Load Balance Path

Library load balance paths that are no longer needed may easily be deleted.

To delete a library load balance path, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Library Load Balance Settings screen, as described in

”Accessing Library Load Balancing Screen” on page 121 .

2. Click the Remove ( ) button.

3. The Remove Library Load Balance Path is displayed.

4. Check off the box(es) of the load balance paths you want to delete.

5. Click the Remove button ( ) to delete the load balance path.

A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

If You Have an Ektron WebImageFX License Key...

If you purchased and inserted an Ektron WebImageFX license key into Ektron CMS400.NET, the images folder is enhanced automatically.

Since Ektron WebImageFX has a built-in thumbnail creator for images, each uploaded image in the library also has a thumbnail created for it, allowing you to locate uploaded images faster and easier.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 123

Managing Library Items

Here is an example of the images folder for an Ektron

CMS400.NET Web site with an Ektron WebImageFX license key.

N

OTE

For information about acquiring an Ektron WebImageFX license key for Ektron

CMS400.NET, contact the Ektron Sales Department .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 124

Using eWebEditPro

U s i n g e We b E d i t P r o

This is the editor supplied with Ektron CMS400.NET, eWebEditPro+XML.

For more information about using the editor, please refer to the

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 125

M a n a g i n g X M L C o n t e n t

Managing XML Content

W

ARNING

!

The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple

Macintosh for editing content.

Ektron CMS400.NET allows you to access the full power of XML by separating Web content from presentation. In addition to hiding the XML tags from users, Ektron CMS400.NET can serve content to various presentation devices (e.g., PDAs, mobile phones,

WebTV), saving users from the tedium of creating duplicate content. Review and revision are drastically reduced because the accuracy and format of your Web content is managed using XML schema validation.

Using XML with Ektron CMS400.NET provides the following benefits:

Strictly enforce content and page layout with Ektron's editor

(Ektron eWebEditPro+XML), XSLT, and WYSIWYG templates for content contributors

Deliver content to multiple devices (e.g., PDAs, mobile phones,

WEB TV)

Easily share content across B2B transactions

Advanced XML authoring: Ektron's highly-acclaimed XML editor—Ektron eWebEditPro+XML—lets developers hide XML tags from content contributors and provides an easy-to-use

WYSIWYG editing interface

Smart Forms are used in Ektron CMS400.NET to define the necessary files to display, save, and validate the content properly.

This section explains how to take advantage of Ektron

CMS400.NET’s XML capabilities.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 126

Managing XML Content

Benefits of Using XML Data

This section explains why you should use XML as opposed to

HTML content for your Web site. Because of XML’s advantages,

Ektron recommends using XML content whenever possible. Below are several reasons why XML is the preferred format for managing content.

• Standardized format for capturing content

-

You can create an XML Smart Form then require anyone creating content in a folder to use the form. The result is more uniform and consistent information.

-

Within an XML Smart Form, you can require authors to complete fields in a specified format. So, for example, if you want the author to enter a date, XML can ensure that it’s captured in a standard format. Several standard formats are provided (email address, zip code), and you can create your own.

Superior control over content display

-

Authors contribute XML content but have virtually no control over its format. The Web administrator determines the format through an XSLT file. By customizing the XSLT, you can exert maximum control over your Web site’s appearance.

-

Since one file controls several (even hundreds of) pages, you can update just that file to efficiently change the look of all pages whose content is based on the Smart Form.

Improved search capabilities

-

Because XML data is captured in individual fields, you can focus a search on relevant fields. For example, if your XML content captures data about books, you can place an author search on your Web site. Since that search only looks through content in the Author field, it is much faster and returns more reliable results than a search of HTML content.

What’s in This Chapter?

Here is what’s covered in this section.

”Before You Manage Smart Forms” on page 128

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 127

Managing XML Content

”Adding a New Smart Form” on page 130

”Assigning Smart Forms” on page 135

”Viewing Smart Forms” on page 136

”Editing Smart Forms” on page 141

”Editing Data Design Packages” on page 141

”Creating Smart Forms Based on Existing Configurations” on page 144

”Viewing Data Designer XSLTs” on page 145

”Deleting Smart Forms” on page 146

”XML Indexing” on page 148

Before You Manage Smart Forms

You must define each Smart Form that will be used in your Web site. Each form is assigned to a content folder or content item and lets you specify how XML content appears in the editor, is validated, and is displayed in an output device.

There are two ways to create a Smart Form.

Using external XML files

Using the WYSIWYG Data Designer

This section explains how to create and manage Smart Forms using both methods.

The Smart Form Toolbar

During the process of creating and managing Smart Forms, several toolbar buttons are available. The following table describes the buttons and their actions.

Button Name

Add Smart

Form

Description

Create a new Smart Form from scratch or based on properties of an existing one.

More Information

”Adding a New Smart Form” on page 130

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 128

Managing XML Content

More Information Button Name

Back

Description

Return to previous screen

Configure Full

Text Search

Delete

Edit

Edit Data

Design

Save

Edit search screen labels

Delete a Smart Form

Edit a Smart Form created with external files

Edit a Smart Form created with the

Data Designer

Save changes

”Editing the Search Labels” on page 156

”Deleting Smart Forms” on page 146

”Editing Smart Forms” on page 141

”Editing Data Design Packages” on page 141

Update Save and update changes

View XSLT Display the XSLT for a Smart Form

”Viewing Data Designer XSLTs” on page 145

Accessing Smart Forms

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrators group or those defined in Manage Members for Role: Smart Forms Admin screen can create or edit Smart Forms.

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

To access the Smart Form section of the Workarea, follow these steps.

1. Access your Workarea, as described in

”Accessing the

Workarea” on page 11 .

2. In the folder tree on the left side of the Workarea, follow the path Settings > Configuration > Smart Form Configuration.

3. The View Smart Forms screen is displayed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 129

Managing XML Content

From here, you can view, add, edit, and delete Smart Forms.

See Also:

”Managing XML Content” on page 126

Adding a New Smart Form

When adding a new Smart Form, you have two options. The following sections explain both.

”Adding a Smart Form Using the Data Designer” on page 130

(recommended)

”Adding a Smart Form Using External XML Files” on page 132

(for example, XSLTs, schemas, etc.)

Note To create a new Smart Form by copying and editing an existing one, see

”Creating Smart Forms Based on Existing Configurations” on page 144

.

Adding a Smart Form Using the Data Designer

To add a Smart Form using the WYSIWYG Data Designer, follow these steps.

1. Access the Smart Form screen, as described in

”Accessing

Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Add Smart Form button ( ).

3. The Add Smart Form screen is displayed.

4. Enter a Title for the Smart Form.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 130

Managing XML Content

6. The Smart Form Data Designer screen appears.

7. You may get the following error dialog.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 131

Managing XML Content

To learn about why the dialog is appearing and help decide whether to click Yes or No, click the link More information about

Local Machine Lockdown. A Windows Help topic appears and explains your options.

8. If desired, you may specify a style sheet for the Smart Form.

Use the field on the right above the editor.

To do so, either type the path and file name of the CSS file, or select an Ektron CMS400.NET-registered style sheet from the drop down list.

9. Design your XSLT in the Data Designer.

See

”Using the Data Designer” on page 157 for information

about creating XSLTs using the Data Designer.

10. Click the Update button ( ).

You are ready to assign the Smart Form to a folder or content item.

See

”Assigning Smart Forms” on page 135 for more information.

Adding a Smart Form Using External XML Files

To add a Smart Form using external XML files, follow these steps.

1. Access the Smart Form screen, as described in

”Accessing

Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Add Smart Form button ( ).

3. The Add Smart Form screen is displayed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 132

Managing XML Content

4. Enter a Title for the Smart Form.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

6. The Smart Form Data Designer screen is displayed.

7. Click the Back arrow ( ) to exit.

8. The View Smart Form screen for the new Smart Form is displayed.

9. Click the Edit button ( ).

10. The Edit Smart Form screen is displayed.

11. Enter the necessary information using the following table as a reference.

Smart Form Fields

Section

Generic Information

Field

Title

ID (display only)

Description

Description

Name given to Smart Form.

ID number assigned when configuration is created.

Detailed description given to configuration by its creator or last editor.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 133

Managing XML Content

Section

Editor Information

Validation Information XML Schema

Target Namespace

DIsplay Information

Field

Edit XSLT

Save XSLT

Advanced Configuration

XSLT1

XSLT2

XSLT3

XSLT Packaged

Description

XSLT applied to content while being edited.

XSLT used to transform the XML when saved to the database.

XML file that contains display information, schema validation, and other advanced XML data.

The .xsd file used to validate the XML content

The default namespace used for outgoing

XML

XSLT 1 applied to XML data when viewed on a device

XSLT 2 applied to XML data when viewed on a device

XSLT 3 applied to XML data when viewed on a device

XSLT package applied to XML data when viewed on a device

N

OTE

When a Smart Form is created using the Data Designer, a default display XSLT is created which resembles the edit XSLT created in the editor. This default XSLT can be applied to the XML content.

12. Specify the default display XSLT for the configuration by clicking the corresponding radio button.

13. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 134

Managing XML Content

XML File Verification

A verification button ( ) appears to the right of some fields on the

Add Smart Form screen. After you identify an XSLT or schema, you can click this button to verify that the file:

exists in the location specified

contains well-formed XML

N

OTE

The XML Verification feature does not validate the contents of the XML file.

The following table explains possible results when clicking the verification button.

Display Result

Verified

Description

The file passes all verification parameters

Not Verified The file either:

Does not exist in the location specified

Does not contain well-formed XML

Review current settings. Ensure the file is in the proper location, and that it contains well-formed XML

Assigning Smart Forms

After you create a Smart Form, you can assign it to a folder’s

Properties screen. (See Also: ”Smart Forms” on page 49

)

All content in the folder then uses the configuration.

A Smart Form can be inherited from the parent folder, or you can assign a different one.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 135

Managing XML Content

Viewing Smart Forms

To view a Smart Form, follow these steps.

1. Access the Workarea, as described in

”Accessing the

Workarea” on page 11 .

2. In the folder tree on the left side of the Workarea, follow the path Settings > Configuration > Smart Form Configuration.

.

3. Click the form you want to view.

The View Smart Forms screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 136

Smart Form Created with...

Data Designer External Files

Managing XML Content

The View Smart Form screen has three tabs.

”Properties Tab” on page 138

”Display Information Tab” on page 141

”Preview Tab” on page 140

Each tab is explained below.

After viewing, you can perform the following actions on the Smart

Form.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 137

Managing XML Content

Button Name

Configure Full

Text Search

Edit

Edit Data

Design

Add Smart

Form

View XSLT

Delete

Back

Description

Edit search screen labels

Edit a Smart Form

Open the Data Designer

More Information

”Editing Smart Forms” on page 141

”Editing Smart Forms” on page 141

”Editing Data Design Packages” on page 141

”Adding a New Smart Form” on page 130

Create a new Smart Form from scratch or based on the properties of an existing one

Display the XSLT for a Smart Form

Delete a Smart Form

”Viewing Data Designer XSLTs” on page 145

”Deleting Smart Forms” on page 146

Return to previous screen

View online help View online help ”Accessing Online Help” on page 454

Properties Tab

Field

Title

ID

Description

Description

Name given to Smart Form.

ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400.NET upon creation of the configuration.

Detailed description of configuration given by creator or last editor.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 138

Managing XML Content

If the Smart Form was created using external XML files (instead of the Data Designer), the following information also appears:

”Editor Information” on page 139

”Validation Information” on page 139

Editor Information

N

OTE

This section only appears if you do not use the Data Designer to create your

Smart Form.

The editor information contains the file names of the XSLTs used when editing and adding content in the editor.

Field

Edit XSLT

Save XSLT

Advanced

Configuration

Description

XSLT applied to the content when being edited.

Note: If no edit XSLT is specified, the Edit Data

Design option is enabled in the toolbar.

XSLT used to transform the XML created in the editor when saved to the database.

XML file that contains display information, schema validation, and other advanced XML data.

Validation Information

N

OTE

This section only appears if you do not use the Data Designer to create your

Smart Form.

Content that is created and edited with Ektron CMS400.NET may be validated with a schema if desired. The validation information contains information about the schema.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 139

Managing XML Content

Field

XML

Schema

Target

Namespace

Description

Specify the .xsd file used to validate the XML content that the Smart Form will be assigned to.

Specify the default namespace used for outgoing XML.

Preview Tab

The Preview tab displays the XSLT applied to the editor when

XML content is created. This is the XSLT that was created for the

Smart Form.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 140

Managing XML Content

Display Information Tab

The display information tab lists the XSLTs that are used when displaying XML in the respective environment.

Field

XSLT1

XSLT2

XSLT3

XSLT

Package

Description

Display XSLT 1

Display XSLT 2

Display XSLT 3

Display XSLT Package (created using the Data Designer)

N

OTE

When a Smart Form is created using the Data Designer, a default display XSLT is also created which looks similar to the edit XSLT created in the editor. This default

XSLT can be applied to the XML content.

The asterisk (*) denotes the default XSLT for the Smart Form.

Editing Smart Forms

After creating a Smart Form, you can modify it when files defined in the configuration have changed.

Since there are two ways to create a Smart Form, there are two ways to edit one.

”Editing Data Design Packages” on page 141

”Editing a Smart Form Created with External Files” on page 143

Editing Data Design Packages

After you create a Smart Form, you can modify it.

Before You Edit the Data Package!

Before editing a Smart Form data package, it is important to realize the effects of the modifications. If an XML data package is edited, all content to which the configuration is applied is updated.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 141

Managing XML Content

Information that was originally created may be lost, depending on the changes you make to the package.

To ensure that information is not lost, use the Create New Smart

Form Based on Existing Smart Form option on the view Smart

Form screen. See

”Creating Smart Forms Based on Existing

Configurations” on page 144

for more information.

Editing a Data Design Package

To edit a data design package, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Smart Forms screen, as described in

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Smart Form you want to edit.

3. The View Smart Form screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration.

4. Click the Data Design Mode button ( ) at the top of the screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 142

Managing XML Content

5. The Edit Data Design Package screen displays the current package.

6. Make the necessary changes to the Data Design package in

the editor. See ”Using the Data Designer” on page 157 for

information about creating XSLTs using the Data Designer.

7. Click the Update button ( ).

Editing a Smart Form Created with External Files

1. Access the View Smart Forms screen, as described in

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Smart Form you want to edit.

3. The View Smart Form screen is displayed.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. The Edit Smart Form screen is displayed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 143

Managing XML Content

6. Edit the necessary fields to update the Smart Form. See

”Smart Form Fields” on page 133 .

7. Click the Update button ( ).

Now, all content and folders that use the Smart Form take their properties from the updated configuration.

See Also:

”XML File Verification” on page 135

Creating Smart Forms Based on Existing

Configurations

Whenever major changes must be made to a Smart Form, Ektron recommends creating a copy of it and modifying the copy. In this way, you do not affect the content controlled by the original configuration.

To create a new Smart Form based on an existing one, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Smart Forms screen, as described in

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Smart Form you want to view.

3. The View Smart Form screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration.

4. Click the Create New Smart Form button ( ).

5. The Add Smart Form screen is displayed.

6. Enter a Title for the new Smart Form.

7. Click the Add Smart Form button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 144

Managing XML Content

8. The View Smart Form screen for the new Smart Form is displayed. From here, you can perform the necessary actions on it.

Viewing Data Designer XSLTs

When a Smart Form is created using the Data Designer, an XSLT is produced to assist you with creating your display XSLT. This

XSLT includes the structure for your XML documents.

If a display XSLT is not applied to a Smart Form, content is displayed using the default XSLT displayed in the View XSLT screen.

To view the XSLT for a Smart Form, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Smart Forms screen, as described in

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Smart Form whose XSLT you want to view.

N

OTE

The XSLT only appears if the Smart Form was created using the Data Designer.

3. The View Smart Form screen appears with a more detailed description of the configuration.

4. Click the View XSLT button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 145

5. The View XSLT screen is displayed.

Managing XML Content

You can use this information to create your display XSLT.

Deleting Smart Forms

You can delete Smart Forms that are no longer needed. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Smart Forms screen, as described in

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

.

2. Click the Smart Form you want to delete.

3. The View Smart Form screen is displayed.

4. Click the Delete button ( ).

5. A confirmation message is displayed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 146

6. Click OK.

Managing XML Content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 147

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

X M L I n d e x i n g

XML Indexing makes it easy to search through the XML information collected by your Web site and display the results on a

Web page. The results appear as a list of topic titles, optionally followed by the content summary.

Collection of information has never been easier. The Data

Designer lets you choose which XML fields to index. You can also validate those fields to be numbers, dates, Boolean or string values. After you identify the information to be indexed, a search dialog is automatically created. Where appropriate, the dialog automatically populates drop down lists from the indexed data.

N

OTE

As the name implies, XML indexing is only available for information collected on

XML forms. It cannot find information in XHTML content.

”User vs. Developer Selected Search Criteria” on page 148

”Types of Search Criteria” on page 149

”Displaying Search Results” on page 149

”Setting up a User-Defined Search” on page 151

”Setting up a Developer-Defined Search” on page 152

”Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed” on page 152

”Search Dialog Setup” on page 153

”Editing the Search Labels” on page 156

User vs. Developer Selected Search Criteria

There are two ways to use XML Indexing feature to make your

Web site more robust.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 148

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Present a screen of search criteria. A visitor to your site uses the screen to select the kind of information he is looking for. For example, if your site sells outdoor clothing, the user might want to see all wool hats for men under $20.00. A custom function determines the format of the results page.

Determine the search and display criteria programmatically

using a custom function. Your Web developer inserts a function on a Web page that specifies search and display criteria. For example, if your site sells books, a visitor to your site sees a navigation link Find books under $5.00. When he clicks that link, the function searches your site and returns a Web page

(possibly a navigation sidebar) displaying all books in your database whose price is less than $5.00.

N

OTE

The Ektron Windows Service manages the background processing that creates

XML indexes.

See Also:

”Ektron Windows Service” on page 271

.

Types of Search Criteria

XML Indexing allows multi-dimensional searches on all types of

XML data. If the field type is string, a search can look for an exact phrase or the occurrence of any word in the phrase. Numerical and date information can be searched using expressions such as greater than, less than, or between two values.

List and choices type fields let the user select from several predetermined values. When searching on these fields, the screen can display all values and let the user select relevant ones.

For every search field, NoSelection is a possible value. If this is chosen, the search disregards that field when compiling results.

Displaying Search Results

The results page can show content that satisfies all search criteria

or one or more criteria. If you choose the latter option, the results page shows weighted results. That is, pages with the highest number of matches (the most relevant ones) appear first, followed by pages with fewer matches. The number of hits is indicated by an asterisk.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 149

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

So, if one page matches all of the selection criteria, it appears in the top group. If another page matches some of the selection criteria, it also appears but lower on the page.

In the example below, the first two Web pages had two matches with the selection criteria, while the third page (RC Cheetah) had one match.

By setting recursive and “filter by folder” properties, you can segregate the search to selected folders on your Web site.

The following are examples of industries that can benefit from XML

Indexing.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 150

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Industry

Health Care

Human Resources

Real Estate

Hospitality

Online Retail

Educational

Use XML indexing to find

A cardiologist whose practice is located in your city

Sick time policy

A house with a zip code of 03031 priced under $200,000

A hotel in Boston

Fleece gloves for men

A course in .NET programming

Setting up a User-Defined Search

To create a user-defined search, follow these steps.

Step For more information, see

1.

Select a Smart Form

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

2.

For each field to be searched, assign indexing capability

”Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed” on page 152

3.

Set up the search screen

”Search Dialog Setup” on page 153 and

”Editing the

Search Labels” on page 156

4.

Have your Web developer set up a page to display a search screen and a results screen

The Ektron CMS400 Developer’s manual section

“Standard ASP.NET Methods” > “IndexSearch” and

“IndexSearchDisplay”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 151

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Setting up a Developer-Defined Search

To set up a developer-defined search, which defines both the criteria and the results page, use the ecmIndexSearchCollectionDisplay

function. This is documented in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s manual section “Standard

ASP.NET Methods” > “IndexSearchCollectionDisplay.”

You can also setup a developer defined search using the

IndexSearch Server Control. For more Information, see the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

Developer’s manual section “Ektron CMS400.NET

Server Controls” > “List of Server Controls” > “IndexSearch Server

Control.”

Specifying Which XML Elements are Indexed

You can index the following types of fields:

Checkbox

Plain Text

Choices

List

Calculated

Calendar

To enable indexing for any field on an XML form, follow these steps.

1. Select a Smart Form that you want to index.See Also:

”Accessing Smart Forms” on page 129

1. Open its Data Design. See Also:

”Using the Data Designer” on page 157

2. Move the cursor to the field you want to index.

3. Right mouse click on the field and choose Field Properties.

4. On the dialog box that appears, check Indexed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 152

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Validation

Validation ensures that the user completing the XML form enters the right type of data. You can decide if the user’s input should be a number, boolean, date, string, zip code, etc. If you do not specify type attributes using validation data, the field is a string. See Also:

”Validation” on page 188

Validation is especially important when users search XML data because, if used properly, it can ensure that the search find the correct information.

For example, if a form field collects a zip code but you set its type to plain text, the user completing the form can insert anything into the field. If the user inserts the letter “o” instead of the number zero

(0), the field accepts that input and that record will not be found by the search. On the other hand, if you set validation to zip code, the user can only insert five or nine digits -- any other entry is rejected when the user submits the form.

Search Dialog Setup

When you save a Data Design form, a dialog appears that lets you set up the search form (illustrated below).

N

OTE

You can also edit the field labels using the Edit Index Search screen. However, on that screen, the Dropdown and Multiple checkboxes are not available.

See Also:

”Editing the Search Labels” on page 156

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 153

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

The information on this screen is explained below.

Screen section

Xpath

Description

The xpath to each indexed field. Only indexed fields appear.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 154

Screen section

Label

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Description

Enter the text that describes the field on the search screen. Below is an example of how the labels appear on the Search screen.

Dropdown

Multiple

If the field type is

checkbox, a check box appears on the Search screen

choices or list, all values appear on the Search screen

calendar, the user can choose a specific date, any range of dates or beginning and end dates on the Search screen

plain text with a whole number specified in the validation criteria, the user can choose a specific number, any range of numbers or beginning and ending numbers on the Search screen

plain text with no validation criteria, the display is determined by the Dropdown and Multiple checkboxes (below). If Dropdown and Multiple are not checked, the search screen contains these values:

-

No Selection

-

Exact phrase

-

Contains

If the field type is Choices or List, and you check this box, the user performing the search can choose from the choice or list values when selecting search criteria.

If the field type is a plain text, and you check this box, the user performing the search can choose among any value stored in this field of the Data Design when selecting search criteria.

Check this field if you want to allow the user performing the search to select more than one value. Only active with plain text, List, and Choices fields.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 155

XML IndexingManaging XML Content

Editing the Search Labels

This screen lets you change the labels that describes the search fields on the search screen.

You can create a set of labels for every supported language by using the language dropdown list in the upper right corner of the screen. See Also:

”Working with Multi-Language Content” on page 116

To change the search screen labels, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, go to Settings > Configuration > Smart

Form Configuration.

2. Click a Smart Form.

3. Click the Edit Full Text Search button ( ).

4. The Edit Screen appears.

5. From the language dropdown list in the top right corner, select the language whose labels you want to edit.

6. Change the labels as needed.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 156

U s i n g t h e D a ta D e s i g n e r

W

ARNING

!

The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple

Macintosh for editing content.

eWebEditPro+XML

’s Data Designer feature lets you design a screen that collects information from users and stores it as XML data. Creating the screen is simple and requires no knowledge of

XML.

N

OTE

When using the Data Designer feature, the following browsers are supported:

Netscape 6.2 or later; Internet Explorer 5.5 or later.

For example, you may create the following screen.

This screen can store information entered by a user as the following XML.

<address>

<street>123 Sesame St.</street>

<city>New York</city>

<state>NY</state>

</address>

Note that the street and city fields accept text, while the state field accepts a pre-defined value (a state).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 157

Using the Data Designer

This section explains how to use the Data Designer feature through the following topics.

“Differences in eWebEditPro+XML” on page 158

”Design Mode vs. Data Entry Mode” on page 159

”Designing a Screen” on page 160

”Sample Screen Design” on page 161

”Inserting a Field Type” on page 170

Differences in eWebEditPro+XML

When you use the Data Designer,

eWebEditPro+XML

changes in the following ways.

N

OTE

The design toolbar and the design mode and Data Entry mode buttons appear only if your site administrator has defined them in the configuration data.

two toolbars appear, illustrated below. The toolbar buttons let you design the data entry screen. Each button represents a different kind of field.

Both toolbars provide mostly the same buttons. The major difference between them is how you use the button to add a field to the screen. If you are using the horizontal toolbar, place the cursor where you want field, and click the toolbar button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 158

Using the Data Designer

When using the drag and drop toolbar, drag a button to desired screen location.

Note that a context-sensitive menu, available by right clicking the mouse, is also available to perform the commands. You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context-sensitive menu of all commands. To edit the properties of any field already on the screen, select the field, right click the mouse, and select Field Properties.

two buttons appear on the regular (Edit) toolbar: Design mode

and Data Entry mode. (For more information, see ”Design

Mode vs. Data Entry Mode” on page 159 .)

The Data Entry mode button lets you preview the screen being created.

several regular toolbar buttons are grayed out because they do not work with Data Designer

Design Mode vs. Data Entry Mode

The Data Designer feature supplies two “modes,” which make it easier for you to design screens:

Data Design mode - lets you insert and remove fields from the data entry screen

Data Entry mode - simulates the screen’s appearance during data entry

Two toolbar buttons let you switch between modes. The buttons are located on the Edit toolbar.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 159

Using the Data Designer

When you begin to create a data entry screen, you are in design mode. To test the screen as the user will see it, click the Data Entry button ( ). To switch back to Data Entry mode and modify the data entry screen, click the Data Designer button ( ).

Designing a Screen

To design a screen that captures XML data, you

1. Ask your system administrator to enable a version of

eWebEditPro+XML

that includes the Data Designer. (The administrator should refer to the Data Designer chapter of the

Developer’s Reference Guide.)

2. For each field on the screen, select a field type, and place it on

the screen. ”Inserting a Field Type” on page 170

explains the kind of field that each button represents.

You can also use

eWebEditPro+XML

’s rich formatting capabilities to design the screen. For example, you can format text, and use tables, images and hyperlinks to guide the user through the data entry process. Below is a sample screen created with the Data Designer.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 160

Using the Data Designer

Sample Screen Design

This section provides a brief overview of designing a screen, so that you can learn how the pieces fit together. Let’s assume you want the screen to look like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 161

Using the Data Designer

N

OTE

The following example helps you understand how to create a simple data entry screen. It does not explain how to save a screen so that a user can enter data into it. You can access a good sample by navigating to Start > Programs > Ektron >

eWebEditPro > Samples > ASP > Data Design > ASP Data Design Sample.

When you are ready to create an actual screen, ask your system administrator to help determine a method for saving the screen and making it available to users for data entry.

To create such a screen, follow these steps.

1. Sign on to

eWebEditPro+XML

in Data Designer mode. (Ask your system administrator how to do this. The Developer’s

Reference Guide (version 4.0 and higher) provides details.)

2. Since you want to surround the data entry fields with a box and a caption, drag the Group Box button ( ) from the drag and drop toolbar onto the screen. Then, complete the dialog as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 162

Using the Data Designer

N

OTE

Later in the section, documentation is supplied for each field on the dialog box.

Since this section is providing an overview, it does not delve into those details.

At this point, the screen looks like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 163

Using the Data Designer

3. Select Address then apply bold and the custom color shown above. Now the screen looks like this.

4. The next field, street, should let the user enter text. So, drag the plain text field icon ( ) into the space below Address.

Then, complete the dialog as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 164

Using the Data Designer

Now, the screen looks like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 165

Using the Data Designer

Note that the Street field is not wide enough. To widen it, click the field, move the cursor until you see a two-sided arrow, and drag the arrow to the right.

5. The next field, City, should also let the user enter text. Assume that you want City to appear in the line below Street. To make room for City, move the cursor to the end of the Street field and press <Enter> to create a new line. Next, drag the plain text field icon ( ) into the line below Street. Then, complete the dialog as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 166

Using the Data Designer

Now, the screen looks like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 167

Using the Data Designer

6. The next field, State, should let the user choose from several states. Assume that you want the state to appear to the right of

City. Move the cursor to the end of the City field and drag the

Select List Field field icon ( ) into that space. Then, complete the dialog as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 168

Using the Data Designer

Now, the screen looks like this.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 169

Using the Data Designer

The above example is very simple and does not use some of the

Data Designer’s more powerful and flexible features. To learn more about Data Designer, read the rest of this chapter.

Inserting a Field Type

eWebEditPro+XML

provides several options that let you insert or edit fields in the editor. Each field type is described below.

Field type

Group Box

Icon

Tabular

Checkbox

Plain Text

Description

Groups related fields, which can be surrounded by a box and have a caption

Inserts a table into which you can place other types of fields

User’s response is either checked or unchecked

Free text field; user cannot format text

For more information, see

”Group Box ()” on page 171

”Tabular Data ()” on page 175

”Checkbox ()” on page 183

”Plain Text ()” on page 184

Rich Area

Choices

List

Calculated

Calendar

Free text field; user can format text using the editor

”Rich Area ()” on page 189

Several choices appear on screen. User checks appropriate boxes. All user choices are inserted as values within single XML tag.

”Choices ()” on page 191

Same as Choices except options appear in a drop-down box

”Select List ()” on page 194

Performs calculations using other fields on the screen

”Calculated Field ()” on page 198

Lets user insert a date by clicking a calendar

”Calendar Field ()” on page 208

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 170

Using the Data Designer

Field type

Image Only

Icon

File Link

Field

Properties

Description

Lets user insert an image

For more information, see

”Image Only Field ()” on page 211

Lets user insert a link to a file, such as a

PDF document

”File Link Field ()” on page 214

Lets you change the properties of any field. Select the field then click this button.

Note: This option is also available on the right click menu, but not available on the drag and drop toolbar

Validate Ensure the screen contains valid XML.

This option is available within Data Entry and Data Design mode.

Group Box ( )

A Group Box field lets you group related fields together on a screen by surrounding them with a box and optionally placing a caption above them.

After you insert a Group Box field, to insert other kinds of fields within the box,

drag the fields into the box (if you are using the drag and drop toolbar) or

place the cursor inside the box then select a field type button (if you are using the horizontal toolbar)

Advantages of Grouping Fields

One advantage of grouping fields is that you can allow the user in

Data Entry mode to add another instance of a group.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 171

Using the Data Designer

For example, if a screen collects several fields of information about each telephone call, the user could simply click the Insert Below button to insert a new group of fields, ready to collect information about the next call.

Another advantage of grouping fields is that you can suppress a group of irrelevant fields. For example, if a screen includes two groups of fields that collect information about hardcover and paperback books, and you are adding information about a hardcover book, you can collapse the paperback book questions because they are not relevant to your current task.

Use the eyeglass icon to expand or collapse the display of fields within a group.

Expanded Group Field with glasses icon highlighted

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 172

Dialog Box

Collapsed Group Field

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Group Box Dialog

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 173

Using the Data Designer

Field

Name

Description

Enter the name of this field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters

([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

Display

Name

Use

Allow

Appearance

Caption

See ”The Use Field” on page 217

See ”The Allow Field” on page 218

Click Show border and caption if you want to surround the fields in this group with a box. You can also create a caption to appear in the top line of the box.

Click No border if you do not want to surround the fields in this group with a box.

If desired, enter text to describe this group of fields on the data entry screen.

For example

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the

Group Box field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog. However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 174

Using the Data Designer

Tabular Data ( )

The Tabular data button inserts a table into which you can place other types of fields. It’s similar to a group box.

Tabular data’s main advantage over a group box is that it lets you place fields in columns (see below).

N

OTE

”Group Box ()” on page 171 describes many features that also apply to tabular

data. Read that section to gain a full understanding of working with tabular data.

Creating a Table

First you insert the table. Then, you insert an appropriate type of field into each column. As examples, in the table above, the

Description field type would be plain text, while the In Stock? field type would be choices.

When you insert a field into a table, its caption initially appears to the left of the data entry region (see below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 175

Using the Data Designer

Ektron recommends moving the caption into the column headers

(see below).

Table commands (such as add row and add column) are available by placing the cursor inside a table cell and right clicking the mouse.

I

MPORTANT

!

Only table cells into which you place a field are available to visitors of your Web page.

Editing Tabular Data

To edit tabular data, hover the cursor carefully over any table border line until you see a four-headed arrow. Then, click the right mouse button and select Field Properties.

N

OTE

You cannot reduce the number of columns by editing the Tabular Data dialog’s

Columns field. To delete a column, place the cursor in the column and select

Delete Column from the table commands. The table commands are available in the table drop-down menu, the table toolbar (which is hidden by default), or the right-click context menu.

How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure

Tabular data creates three levels of XML tags:

inner level: each field in the table

middle level: each row in the table

outer level: the entire set of table data

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 176

Using the Data Designer

To explain how this works, we’ll use the following contact list as an example.

Name

John Doe

Mary Smith

Phone

555-1212

555-8765

Email

[email protected]

[email protected]

How XML Tags are Assigned to Field Names

When you insert a field into a table, a dialog helps you define the field type. For example, when inserting a plain text field, the Plain

Text Field dialog appears. On that dialog, the value of the Phone field defines the tags that enclose that field’s contents.

To continue our example, every contact is represented in XML as:

< Name >John Doe</Name>

< Phone >555-1212</Phone>

< Email >[email protected]</Email> and

< Name >Mary Smith</Name>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 177

Using the Data Designer

< Phone >555-8765</Phone>

< Email >[email protected]</Email>

How XML Tags are Assigned to Table Rows

Each row of the table collects information for one contact. On the

Tabular Data Box dialog, the Row Name field defines the XML tag that groups information for each contact. For example, the Row

Name field value is Contact.

<Contact>

<Name>John Doe</Name>

<Phone>555-1212</Phone>

<Email>[email protected]</Email>

</Contact>

<Contact>

<Name>Mary Smith</Name>

<Phone>555-8765</Phone>

<Email>[email protected]</Email>

</Contact>

How XML Tags are Assigned to the Entire Table

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 178

Using the Data Designer

When you create a table, the name you give it (in the Name field of the Tabular Data Box dialog) defines the XML tag that groups all

contacts on the table. In this example, the name is AddressBook.

Dialog Box

<AddressBook>

<Contact>

<Phone>555-1212</Phone>

<Email>[email protected]</Email>

</Contact>

<Contact>

<Name>Mary Smith</Name>

<Phone>555-8765</Phone>

<Email>[email protected]</Email>

</Contact>

</AddressBook>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 179

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Tabular Data Dialog

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 180

Using the Data Designer

Field

Name

Display name

Use

Allow

Description

Enter the name of this table.

See Also:

”How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure” on page 176

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over the table’s column headers.

See ”The Use Field” on page 217

See ”The Allow Field” on page 218

Note: If you check More than one here, you are allowing the user to insert an entirely new table, not an additional table row.

Rows

Row name Enter the name of the XML tag used to collect data for each entry in the table.

See Also:

”How Tabular Data Forms XML Structure” on page 176

Row display name

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over the table’s cells. Use this field to describe the kind of information to be inserted into the table’s cells.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 181

Using the Data Designer

Field

Minimum number

Maximum number

Description

If desired, enter the minimum number of rows for this table.

If you enter a number and the data entry user tries to save the screen without inserting at least the minimum number of rows, he is informed that Element content is

incomplete according to the DTD/Schema.

By default, the user is allowed to cancel or save the screen anyway. However, the system administrator determines whether or not a user can save an invalid document.

If desired, enter the maximum number of rows for this table. If you don’t want to assign a maximum number, check the Unlimited check box.

Result of Assigning a Maximum

When this table appears on a data entry screen, and a user adds the maximum number of rows, the Insert

Above and Insert Below options are grayed out on the menu (see example below).

Columns

Caption

Enter the number of columns to appear in the table.

See Also:

”Editing Tabular Data” on page 176

If desired, enter text to describe this table on the data entry screen. The caption appears centered above the table.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify the caption’s size, font, color, and other attributes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 182

Using the Data Designer

Checkbox ( )

A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values: checked or unchecked. For example

Dialog Box

Fields on the Checkbox Dialog

Field

Name

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;’"{}[]|‘~) into this field.

See Also:

”The Name Field’s Default Value” on page 174

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 183

Field

Indexed

Display name

Using the Data Designer

Description

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may not appear, depending on how your administrator set up your system.

Enter text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field (circled in red below).

Default value

Caption

If you want this field to be checked when the screen first appears, click True.

Otherwise, click False.

Enter text to guide the user’s response to this field. To continue the above example, the caption would be

Check if you are over 65.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Check Box field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog.

However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

Plain Text ( )

Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted, free text response.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 184

Using the Data Designer

N

OTE

If a plain text field tries to perform a numerical calculation with a value that is blank or contains letters,

NaN

appears in the field. (

NaN

stands for “not a number.”) If a plain text field tries to divide by zero,

Infinity

appears.

Plain Text Field vs. Rich Area Field

The following capabilities are available with a plain text field but not a rich area field.

You can adjust the field’s width by dragging it. See

”Resizing a

Plain Text Field” on page 189 .

The text can be read-only or hidden

The following capability is available with a rich area field but not a plain text field.

In Data Entry mode, the user can change the text’s format, size, style, etc. along with adding hyperlinks, using

eWebEditPro+XML

’s formatting capabilities.

You can enter custom tags.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 185

Dialog Box

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Plain Text Dialog

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 186

Using the Data Designer

Field Description

Descriptive

Name

Indexed

Enter the name of this field. The descriptive name is used internally to identify this field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters

([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

See Also:

”The Name Field’s Default Value” on page 174

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a

Data Design Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer

Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may not appear, depending on how your administrator set up your system.

Field name Enter the field’s id attributes used in the xml. It must be unique within the xml document.

Tool Tip Text Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

Default

Value

Use

Allow

Options

If you want to set a default value for this field, enter that value here. The default value appears in Data Entry mode, where the user can accept, change, or delete it.

For example, if this field collects a city, and most users enter New York, enter New York as the value.

See

”The Use Field” on page 217

See

”The Allow Field” on page 218

Invisible - Check here to make this field hidden in Data Entry mode. This option lets you store unseen information in each XML document. An example might be putting a version number for the data design so that XML documents can be upgraded to newer versions using an XSL transform.

Allow multiple lines - Check here to let this text box expand to accommodate the user’s input. If you do not check this box, a single line input box appears on the data entry screen to accept user input.

A field can be either invisible or cannot be changed -- it cannot be both.

Cannot be changed - Check here to make this field read-only. That is, the user cannot insert data into it in Data Entry mode.

You might use this option to provide user instructions for completing the screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 187

Field

Validation

Data Style

Using the Data Designer

Description

Select the kind of validation to apply to this field. Your choices are:

No validation - the user’s response is not checked

Cannot be blank - the user must enter a response

Non-negative whole number or blank - the user must enter a positive whole number or no response

Non-negative whole number (required) - the user must enter a positive whole number

Decimal number or blank - must be a decimal number (for example, 12.345 or

12) or blank . A leading minus sign “-” is allowed. The decimal point must be a period (.), even in locales that normally use a comma (,).

Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied. That is,

12 is 12.0000.

Decimal number required - must be a decimal number (it cannot be blank) of none, one, or two decimal places.

A leading minus sign “-” is allowed. The decimal point must be period (.), even in locales that normally use a comma (,).

Percent: (0-100) required - the user must enter a whole number from 0 to 100

Zip code (US only) - the user’s response must consist of 5 (nnnnn) or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth (nnnnn-nnnn)

Social Security number (US only) - the user’s response must consist of nine digits in this pattern: nnn-nn-nnnn

Custom - You can create custom validation.

For more information, see ”Custom Validation” on page 221

.

If you assign to this field any value other than No validation, the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode. If the user’s response does not meet the validation criterion, the field remains surrounded by red dashes. The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document.

See

”The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the Remove Styles field on the

Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 188

Using the Data Designer

Resizing a Plain Text Field

If you insert a plain text field and its width is too small or too large, you can easily resize it. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Place the cursor over the field and click. The cursor changes to a four-headed arrow, and small boxes surround the field.

2. Move the cursor to the far right of the field. (See illustration below). The cursor turns into a two-headed arrow.

3. Drag the arrow to adjust the field width as desired.

Rich Area ( )

Use a rich area field to let a user enter a free text response that can be formatted using the editor buttons.

See Also:

”Plain Text Field vs. Rich Area Field” on page 185

T

IP

!

Unlike many other fields, the Rich Area dialog box does not prompt for a field caption. You can still enter text describing the field on the editor screen before or after you insert a Rich Area field.

Adjusting the Width of a Rich Area Field

Note that, unlike a plain text field, the width of a rich area field cannot be adjusted. It occupies the entire screen width. If a user enters more text than fits on one line, the rich area field automatically adds more lines. To limit the width of a rich area field, place it in a table cell. In this case, the field is as wide as the cell.

If you want to insert default text into a rich area field, insert it after you place the field in the editor.

Dialog Box

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 189

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Rich Area Dialog

Field

Descriptive

Name

Indexed

Field name

Use

Allow

Cannot be blank

Description

Enter the name of the field. The descriptive name is used internally to identify this field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

See Also:

”The Name Field’s Default Value” on page 174

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

does not let you index a rich area field. Ignore this checkbox.

Enter the field’s id attributes used in the xml. It must be unique within the xml document.

See ”The Use Field” on page 217

See ”The Allow Field” on page 218

If you want to require the user completing this field to enter a response, click inside this check box.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 190

Using the Data Designer

Choices ( )

Use the Choices field when you want to give the data entry user several choices. For example, you could create a Choices field named Interests that lists these options.

music

art

sports

The data entry user could check the first two and leave the third blank.

Choices Field vs. Select List Field

The following capabilities are available with a Choices field but not a Select List field.

You can limit the user’s choice to one item or many.

All items appear on the screen, arranged horizontally or vertically

The following capabilities are available with a Select List field but not a Choices field.

The user can only select one item.

Only the default item appears on the screen. To the right of the field, a black down arrow appears (circled in red below). The user must click the arrow to display all items and select one.

Dialog Box

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 191

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Choices Dialog

Field

Name

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters

([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

See Also:

”The Name Field’s Default Value” on page 174

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 192

Using the Data Designer

Field Description

Indexed Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a

Data Design Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer

Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may or may not appear, depending on how your administrator set up your system.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this choice list.

Display name

Allow selection

Click More than one to allow the data entry user to select more than one item on the data entry screen. Otherwise, click Only one.

For example, if you click More than one, and the choices are: music, art, sports, the user could select all three choices.

If you click Only one, the user could only select one choice.

A selection is required - Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list.

Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically.

Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 193

Field

Item List

Using the Data Designer

Description

This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields.

Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them.

Value

Caption

No longer available

Data Style

Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen.

If you do, the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox. Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection (above), only one item can be selected.

Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item.

For example, if Interests appears in the Name field, and you want music

to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page, enter music here.

Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Use this field to indicate that an item can no longer be selected by a user in data entry mode. For example, you have a list of team members. If one member leaves, check No

longer available rather than removing the item.

If checked, the only appears in data entry mode if a document already contained the item's when the check is applied.

This field lets you render a value obsolete without invalidating an existing XML document.

Exception! -- If multiple selections are allowed in a Choices Field and the item is selected in design mode, it appears in data entry mode but is disabled (grayed-out).

This lets you force an item's value into the XML document.

See ”The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the Remove Styles field on the

Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

Select List ( )

A Select List field is similar to a Choices field. The biggest difference is that the responses appear in a drop-down box instead

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 194

Dialog Box

Using the Data Designer

of appearing separately. To see the choices, click the down arrow on the right side of the box (circled below).

See Also:

”Choices Field vs. Select List Field” on page 191

For example:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 195

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Select List Field Dialog

Field

Name

Indexed

List

Item List

Value

Text

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may not appear, depending on how your administrator has set up your system.

Click the drop-down arrow to see several pre-defined lists. If you choose one, its values appear in the Item

List field.

This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields.

Buttons let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them.

Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen. If you do, the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox.

Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item.

For example, if Interests appears in the Name field, and you want music

to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page, enter music here.

Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 196

Using the Data Designer

Field

No longer available

First item is not a valid selection.

For example,

“(Select)”

Caption

Description

Use this field to indicate that an item can no longer be selected by a user in data entry mode. For example, you have a list of team members. If one member leaves, check No longer available rather than removing the item.

If checked, the only appears in data entry mode if a document already contained the item's when the check is applied.

This field lets you render a value obsolete without invalidating an existing XML document.

Exception! -- If multiple selections are allowed in a

Choices Field and the item is selected in design mode, it appears in data entry mode but is disabled (grayed-out).

This lets you force an item's value into the XML document.

Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that prompts the user to respond to the field. An example of such text for a list of states would be Select a state.

If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list (most likely by default), an error message appears when he tries to save the screen.

Enter text to guide the user’s selection. For example, if the user needs to select an area of interest, the caption could be Choose your interests.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Select List field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog.

However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

Data Style

See ”The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the

Remove Styles field on the Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 197

Using the Data Designer

Calculated Field ( )

Use a calculated field to perform a calculation based on values in other fields. For example, if your screen collects mortgage information, you could create one field to collect the mortgage and interest payment and another to collect taxes and insurance. The calculated field could sum those two numbers and display the monthly payment.

You can validate a calculated field. For example, you can require a positive number between 100 and 1,000.

Calculated fields are display only -- users cannot edit them.

I

MPORTANT

!

If a field will be referenced in a calculation, use the validation feature to require a value for that field. This forces the user to enter a number to be used in the calculation.

Dialog Box

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 198

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the Calculated Field Dialog

Field

Name

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 199

Using the Data Designer

Field

Indexed

Display name

Calculation

Formula

Select Field

Examples

Description

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may or may not appear, depending on how your administrator has set up your system.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

Use this area of the screen to define the calculation that this field will perform.

Enter the calculation that this field will perform. See

Also:

”Using the Formula Field” on page 201

Click this button to select a field to reference in the calculation. For more information, see

”Using the

Formula Field” on page 201

.

Click the down arrow to the right of this field to see examples of calculations you can perform. When you select an example, it is copied into the Formula field.

Your system administrator can customize the examples.

Instructions are provided in “The <cmddsgcalc>

Command” in the Data Designer chapter of the

Developer Reference Guide.

See Also:

”Explanation of Examples” on page 204

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 200

Field

Validation

Caption

Using the Data Designer

Description

Select the kind of validation to apply to this field. Your choices are:

No validation - the user’s response is not checked

Non-negative number (required) - the result of the calculation must be a positive number

Custom - You can create custom validation. For more information, see

”Custom Validation” on page 221 .

If you assign to this field any value other than No

validation, the field is surrounded by red dashes in

Data Entry mode. If the user’s response does not meet the validation criteria, the field remains surrounded by red dashes. Your system administrator determines if a user can save a screen with invalid data.

Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Calculated field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog.

However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

Data Style

See ”The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the

Remove Styles field on the Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

Using the Formula Field

You can copy a sample calculation into the Formula field by clicking the Examples field and selecting an operation from the drop down list. For example, if you click on Examples Add two

numbers (X+Y), {X}+{Y} appears in this field.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 201

Using the Data Designer

Next, replace the variables with fields on the screen. Be sure to select the curly brackets ({}) as well as the letter between them.

Then, when the user enters data into those fields, the calculation is performed using the current field values.

If a calculated field tries to perform a numerical calculation with a value that is blank or contains letters,

NaN

appears in the field. (

NaN stands for “not a number.”)

If a calculated field tries to divide by zero,

Infinity

appears.

W

ARNING

!

If the user does not replace all variables with a field or a number, when the content is validated, validation will fail.

To do this, follow these steps.

1. Select the first variable to replace. To continue the example, select {X}.

2. Click the Select Field button. A screen appears listing appropriate fields on the Data Design screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 202

Using the Data Designer

3. Select a field to replace {X}. When you do, the field name replaces {X} in the Formula field.

W

ARNING

!

If a variable appears more than once in a formula (for example,

{X} * number(

{X} &lt;= {Y} ) + {Y} * number( {X} &gt; {Y})

, you only need to replace the first occurrence it -

eWebEditPro+XML

will replace the subsequent occurrences for you.

4. Continue replacing all variables in the formula.

Notes

If an XML document contains several occurrences of a field that is referenced in a formula, the value is derived as follows:

-

When using the XPath functions sum()

and count()

, all values with the field name are considered. For example, a document includes three books whose prices are $10, $20 and $30. In this case, sum

’s value is $60.

-

When using all other functions, the first value is used. For example, a document includes three books whose prices are $10, $20 and $30. If a calculation formula refers to

<price>

, its value is $10.

You can replace a variable with a number instead of a field. For example, replace

{X} * {Y}

with

../price * 1.15

.

The expression can be complex, such as

(round(Field1 * 0.80)

+ (1 div Field2)) - 2

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 203

Using the Data Designer

You can use a string expression that creates a text message.

For example, to calculate a full name from its parts: concat( title, ' ', givenname, ' ', familyname)

,

which could produce

“Dr. Jonathan Smythe”.

Referencing Other Calculated Fields

A calculated field can only reference other calculated fields that appear before it in a document. For example, a document collects a series of numbers.

One calculated field counts the number of numbers.

Another totals their values.

A third computes the average by dividing the total by the count.

In this example, you must place the third field below or to the right of the first two fields. Calculated fields that are defined later in a document do not appear in the Select Field or Group dialog.

Explanation of Examples

The following table explains the standard examples that appear in the Examples drop-down list of the Calculated Field dialog. Note that your system administrator can customize the list, so it may not match what is below.

Example Field Text

Add two numbers

Subtract two numbers

Multiply two numbers

Example Field Formula

{X} + {Y}

{X} - {Y}

{X} * {Y}

Description

Add the value in the first field (X) to the value in the second field (Y).

Subtract the value in the second field

(Y) from the value in the first field (X).

Multiply the value in the first field (X) by the value in the second field (Y).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 204

Example Field Text

Divide two numbers

Format as a percentage

Absolute value of a number

Minimum of two numbers

Maximum of two numbers

Zero if subtraction is negative

Multiply by another number if checkbox is checked

Round a decimal number

Round up a decimal number

Using the Data Designer

Example Field Formula

format-number( {X} div {Y}

,'0.###') format-number({X} div {Y}

,'#0%')

{X} * (number({X} &gt; 0)*2-1)

Description

Divide the value in the first field (X) by the value in the second field (Y).

Determine what percentage one number (X) is of another (Y).

For example, if {X}=10 and {Y}=100, the result of the calculation is 10%.

The number regardless of the sign

(negative or positive).

The smaller of two field values.

{X} * number( {X} &lt;= {Y} ) +

{Y} * number( {X} &gt; {Y})

{X} * number( {X} &gt;= {Y} ) +

{Y} * number( {X} &lt; {Y})

({X} - {Y}) * number(({X} - {Y})

&gt; 0)

The larger of two field values.

{X} * ( {Y} * number( {Z}

='true') + number( {Z}

!='true')) round({X}) ceiling({X})

Subtract one number (Y) from another (X). If the difference is less than zero, insert zero.

X is a numeric field.

Y is another numeric field to multiply by X if a checkbox is checked.

Z is the checkbox.

For example, {X}=2 and {Y}=3

if the checkbox is checked, the result is 2 * 3, which is 6

If the checkbox is not checked, the result is 2

Rounds the number to the nearest integer. For example, round(3.14).

The result is 3.

Returns the smallest integer that is greater than the number. For example, ceiling(3.14)

. The result is 4.

For negative numbers: ceiling(-3.14) = -3

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 205

Example Field Text

Round down a decimal number

Example Field Formula

floor({X})

Format decimal number 0.00

format-number( {X} ,'0.00')

Total numeric values from multiple fields sum( {X}[text()] | {Y}[text()] |

{Z}[text()] ))

Total a list of numeric values sum( {X}[text()] )

Using the Data Designer

Description

Returns the largest integer that is not greater than the number argument. .

For example, floor(3.14)

. The result is 3.

For negative numbers: floor(-3.14) = -4

Rounds a value either up or down to the hundredth place. As examples,

100 becomes 100.00, and

3.14159265 becomes 3.14.

Add the values in all referenced fields.

Only elements that contain a value are summed. Empty elements are excluded.

Total all values in a single repeating field. Here’s an example.

Plain Text Field properties

Name: Miles

Allow: more than one

Validation: non-negative whole number

XML Data

<root>

<Miles>89</Miles>

<Miles>12</Miles>

<Miles>23</Miles>

<Miles>19</Miles>

</root> sum(Miles) equals

89+12+23+19=143

Only elements that contain a value are summed. Empty elements are excluded.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 206

Using the Data Designer

Example Field Text Example Field Formula Description

Average a list of numeric values format-number(sum( {X}[text()] ) div count( {X} ),'0.###')

Calculate the average of all values in a single repeating field.

To continue the example from the

Total a list of numeric values field

(above):

Plain Text Field properties

Name: Miles

Allow: more than one

Validation: non-negative whole number

XML Data

<root>

<Miles>89</Miles>

<Miles>12</Miles>

<Miles>23</Miles>

<Miles>19</Miles>

</root>

Average=89+12+23+19=143 divided by the number of values (4)=

35.75

Only elements that contain a value are summed. Empty elements are excluded.

Count the number of values in a list count( {X} ) Calculate the number of values in a single repeating field.

To continue the example from the

Total a list of numeric values field

(above):

Plain Text Field properties

Name: Miles

Allow: more than one

Validation: non-negative whole number

XML Data

<root>

<Miles>89</Miles>

<Miles>12</Miles>

<Miles>23</Miles>

<Miles>19</Miles>

</root>

Count = 4

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 207

Example Field Text

Lowercase text

Uppercase text

Remove extra spaces

Concatenate text

Size of a text string

Using the Data Designer

Example Field Formula

translate( {X}

,'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

UVWXYZ','abcdefghijklmnopqrs tuvwxyz') translate( {X}

,'abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz','

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

VWXYZ') normalize-space( {X} )

Description

Replace all uppercase characters with the lowercase version of that character

Replace all lowercase characters with the uppercase version of that character concat( {X} , ', ' , {Y} ) string-length( {X} )

Remove extra space characters from content\

Link text strings together into a single string. For example, concat('The','

','XML') yields

The XML.

Count the number of characters in a selected field’s value. For example, if the referenced field’s value is Hello, string-length = 5.

Calendar Field ( )

Insert a calendar field when you want the end user to enter a date.

The user must click a date from an online, interactive calendar.

Because users cannot enter digits, a standard date format is ensured.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 208

Using the Data Designer

The date is stored as a standard XML date (in the format yyyy-mmdd), and localized to the computer of the user viewing it.

Moving a Calendar Field

Unlike other Data Designer fields, you cannot drag and drop a calendar field between table cells. Instead, you must select the field, cut it, then move the cursor to the new cell and paste it.

Dialog Box

Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 209

Using the Data Designer

Field

Name

Indexed

Display name

Default value

Use

Allow

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may or may not appear, depending on how your administrator has set up your system.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

If you want this screen to have a default date when the user first sees it, click the calendar icon to the right and select a date. The user can change the date in Data

Entry mode.

Note: If you enter a default date, you cannot later remove it. You can change it. If necessary, you can delete the field and enter a new one.

See ”The Use Field” on page 217

See ”The Allow Field” on page 218

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 210

Field

Validation

Using the Data Designer

Description

If you want to require the user using the calendar to enter a response, click the down arrow to the right of this response field and select Cannot be blank.

Caption Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the Calendar field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog. However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

Data Style

See ”The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the

Remove Styles field on the Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

Image Only Field ( )

Use an Image Only field to place an icon on the screen, which the user in Data Entry mode can click to insert an image into the Web content. You can insert a default image if desired.

To let the user insert any file, such as a Microsoft Word document, use a File Link field. See Also:

”File Link Field ()” on page 214

Using an Image Only Field in Data Entry Mode

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 211

Using the Data Designer

In Data Entry mode, the image’s caption appears, followed by a default image (if you specify one) and this icon: .

N

OTE

The user can only insert a file whose extension is defined within the

<validext> element of the configdataentry.xml file. Your system administrator can help you do this.

Dialog Box

Fields on the Image Only Dialog

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 212

Using the Data Designer

Display name

Use

Allow

Default

Image

Location

Field

Name

Indexed

Cannot be blank

Caption

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The Indexed field may or may not appear, depending on how your administrator has set up your system.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

See ”The Use Field” on page 217

See ”The Allow Field” on page 218

If desired, you can insert a default image, which might be the most common image or simply a reminder that an image needs to be inserted.

To help find the image, click the From File button and navigate to image file.

You can only insert an image file whose extension appears between the

<validext>

tags in the configdatadesign.xml file. For example:

<validext>gif,jpg,png,jpeg,jpe,doc,txt

</validext>

If you want to require the user completing this field to enter a response, click inside this check box.

Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 213

Using the Data Designer

File Link Field ( )

Use a File Link field to place an icon on the screen which the user in Data Entry mode can use to link to any file, such as a Microsoft

Word document or a .gif image file. (You can also use an Image

Only field to let the user insert an image. “Image Only Field ()” on page 211

)

Using a File Link Field in Data Entry Mode

In Data Entry mode, the file link field’s caption appears, followed by this icon: . When the user clicks the icon, this screen prompts the user to specify a file and a caption for it.

N

OTE

The user can only insert a file whose extension is defined within the

<validext> element of the configdataentry.xml file. Your system administrator can help you do this.

Dialog Box

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 214

Using the Data Designer

Fields on the File Link Field Dialog

Field

Name

Description

Enter the name of the field.

Note that you cannot enter spaces nor most special characters ([email protected]#$%^&*()+=<>,.:;'”{}[]\|`~) into this field.

The Name Field’s Default Value

By default, the Data Designer assigns a name made up of Field followed by the next available number. So, the first field’s default name is Field1, the second field’s default name is Field2, etc. You can change the default if you want.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 215

Using the Data Designer

Field

Indexed

Display name

Use

Allow

Default File

Location

Cannot be blank

Default File

Description

Caption

Description

Check if you want to index this field. For more information, see “Indexing the Fields of a Data Design

Document” in the Supporting the Data Designer chapter of the Developer Reference Guide.

The indexed field may or may not appear, depending on how your administrator has set up your system.

Enter the text that appears when a user hovers the cursor over this field.

See “The Use Field” on page 217

See “The Allow Field” on page 218

If desired, you can insert a default link, which can be the most common link or simply an example.

To help find the link, click the From File button and navigate to file. You can only insert a file whose extension appears between the

<validext>

element of the configdatadesign.xml file. For example:

<validext>gif,jpg,png,jpeg,jpe,pdf,doc

</validext>

If you want to require the user completing this field to enter a response, click inside this check box.

If desired, enter text that the user will be able to click on to access the linked file.

Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen.

After you insert this field onto the screen, you can use

e We b E d i t P r o + X M L

’s formatting capabilities to modify its size, font, color, and other attributes.

Note: The Caption field only appears on this dialog when you create the File Link field. If you later try to edit the field, the Caption field is not on the dialog. However, you can edit the Caption text within the editor.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 216

Field

Data Style

Using the Data Designer

Description

See “The Data Style Field” on page 219

Note: The Data Styles button only appears if the

Remove Styles field on the Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved.

Deleting a Field from the Screen

To remove a field from the screen, follow these steps.

1. Move the cursor to the field.

2. When the cursor changes to a four-headed arrow, click the mouse.

3. Small boxes surround the field.

4. Click the cut icon ( ) to remove the field.

Usually, the field label is not deleted when you delete a field. To delete the label, use standard

eWebEditPro+XML

editing buttons.

Fields that Appear on Several Dialogs

The Use Field

Click May not be removed if this field must be included on the screen. Otherwise, click May be removed.

If you check May be removed, when this field appears on a data entry screen, an icon ( ) appears to the left of the field.

If the user clicks the icon, a dropdown menu provides an option to remove the field, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 217

Using the Data Designer

If the user removes the field, add field display name replaces the field on the data entry screen to indicate that the field was removed and can be added if necessary.

For example, if the field’s display name is street address, and the user removes the field, field.

appears in place of the

N

OTE

The menu icon ( ) can also indicate that the user can add instances of a field

(see the Allow field, below). So, if a field is required, the icon could appear but omit a Remove option.

The Allow Field

Check more than one if you want to let the user entering data add instances of this field. Otherwise, check only one.

For example, if a screen is collecting names and addresses and you want to let the user enter several of them, check more than

one.

If you check more than one, when this field appears in Data Entry mode, appears to the left of the field, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 218

Using the Data Designer

If the user entering data clicks , a menu appears (shown above), which lets the user add instances of the field to the screen.

N

OTE

The menu icon ( ) can also indicate that the user can remove a field (see the

Use field, above). So, even if a field allows only one instance, the icon could appear but the menu would only display Remove.

The Data Style Field

N

OTE

The Data Styles button only appears on dialogs if the Remove Styles field on the

Application Setup screen is unchecked. If the Remove Styles field is checked, styles are removed when the content is saved, so it doesn’t make sense to enter styles in that case.

Click the Data Style button to apply formatting to the field that accepts user input. When you do, the following dialog appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 219

Using the Data Designer

Use the dialog to assign the following formatting attributes to a user response field.

Font style and size

Bold and italic

Text alignment (especially helpful for formatting dollar amounts in a plain text field)

Underline or strikethrough

Font color and/or background color

N

OTE

The configuration data controls a command's appearance on the toolbar and on the Data Style dialog. For example, if

<button command="cmdfontname" />

is removed from configdatadesign.xml, it disappears from the toolbar and the Data

Style dialog.

Below is an example of a response field whose font, size, alignment, background, and foreground colors were modified via this dialog.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 220

Using the Data Designer

Custom Validation

N

OTE

Your Web developer can customize validation options. For details, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s Guide section “Customizing Validation.”

The Plain Text and Calculation field dialogs feature a validation section (illustrated below).

You can use the validation feature to ensure the following about the user’s input.

The data type - the default types are

-

text

-

URL

-

whole number

-

decimal number

-

floating point number (Floating point includes scientific notation, so is appropriate for scientific numbers. Decimals usually suffice for business numbers.)

N

OTE

Your system administrator may customize the choices.

The field value has one of the following relationships with another field, a number, or an expression - the default expressions are

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 221

Using the Data Designer

-

between two values (either another field or a number that you specify)

-

less than

-

equal to

-

not equal to

-

maximum length (usually for text responses)

N

OTE

Your system administrator may customize the choices.

If the user’s response fails to meet the criteria, you can compose an error message that appears when the data does not satisfy the criterion. Your system administrator determines if a user can save the invalid data.

When the Custom Validation button is clicked, the Custom

Validation dialog appears.

The Data Type field is the value’s basic type, for example, text number or URL.

The Condition field displays the validation logic.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 222

Using the Data Designer

The Examples drop-down list shows validation expressions that the data design creator can apply to the field.

Any Error Message displays in Data Entry mode when the user inserts an invalid value.

When the Select Field button is clicked, the Select a Field or

Group dialog appears.

This dialog displays fields that can be inserted into the Condition field. Some field types, like the Rich Area field, are not listed. See

Also:

”Referencing Other Calculated Fields” on page 204

Example of Creating Custom Validation

As an example of custom validation, assume that a field collects telephone numbers, and you want to make sure the user enters 10 digits. To accomplish this, follow these steps.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 223

Using the Data Designer

1. Click the Plain Text Field dialog and complete the screen.

2. In the validation section, click Custom Validation. The Custom validation screen appears.

3. In the Data Type field, select Whole Number from the drop down list. This ensures that the user can only enter digits.

4. Click the down arrow to the right of the Examples field to see sample logic.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 224

Using the Data Designer

5. Click Maximum text length... . This option lets you specify the length of the user’s response.

6.

string-length(.) <= {X}

appears in the Condition field.

7. Since you want the user’s input to equal 10, remove the less than sign (<) from the calculation. Now it looks like this: stringlength(.) = {X}.

8. Replace the X with 10. Now, it looks like this: string-length(.)

= {10}.

9. Move the cursor to the Error Message field and compose a relevant error message. For example: must be 10 digits

.

10. Your screen should look like this.

11. Press OK and return to the Plain Text field dialog.

12. Press OK to save that dialog and test the validation on the phone number field. To do this, switch to Data Entry mode and enter more or fewer than 10 digits, as well as non-digit characters to verify that validation works as expected.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 225

M a n a g i n g H T M L F o r m s

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s HTML Forms feature lets users create and maintain HTML forms to collect information from visitors to your Web site.

This section only describes the following technical topics relating to forms. For more information about using HTML forms, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual.

”Form Permissions” on page 226

”Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control” on page 227

”Preparing the Server to Send email” on page 228

”Implementing a Form on a Web Page” on page 229

”Sending Data as XML” on page 230

”Redirecting Submitted Form Data” on page 238

Form Permissions

Folder Permissions

By default, form permissions are inherited from a form’s folder.

To customize permissions for any folder that contains forms, access the folder under Content and assign permission as described in

”Setting Permissions for a Content Folder” on page 29 .

Administrator Permissions

Similar to content, users in the administrator user group have full control over form features. You must be a member of the administrator group to:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 226

Managing HTML Forms

Add a form

Edit a form

Delete a form

Assign content to a form

You may also perform all actions on a form’s content.

User Permissions

Users who are not members of the administrator user group can add, edit, delete, and restore form content if granted these permissions for the content folder or item.

Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server

Control

HTML forms must reside in a folder whose template uses the

FormBlock server control or function. In the Intranet sample site supplied with

Ektron CMS400.NET

, the Contact Information folder uses such a template, contactinformation.aspx (illustrated below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 227

Managing HTML Forms

You can modify this template as needed or create your own form template and assign it to any folder on its Folder Properties screen.

Since, by default, folders inherit properties from their parent folder, any new folders created under a parent folder use the correct template. Of course, you can break inheritance and assign a custom template for any folder.

Preparing the Server to Send email

Since email generated by forms is created on and sent from the server that hosts Ektron CMS400.NET, the server must be enabled to handle those responsibilities. To configure your Web server to send email, refer to Configuring email Notifications in the Ektron

CMS400.NET Setup Manual.

W

ARNING

!

A form typically includes fields for source and destination email addresses, which are used to transmit the form via email. An unscrupulous attacker can post a form

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 228

Managing HTML Forms

to a Ektron CMS400.NET page and send email from any email address to any email address. The attacker's form can be on an HTML page on a server that is remote from the Ektron CMS400.NET installation. Any

Ektron CMS400.NET

on a public site that includes the Ektron CMS400.NET sample site with the form.aspx page and properly configured SMTP can be used to send spam.

Implementing a Form on a Web Page

After you create a form, the next step is to implement it on a Web

Page. To do that, follow these steps.

N

OTE

The use of server controls or functions to manage templates is documented in the

Ektron CMS400.NET Developer’s Manual.

1. Open the Web form template on which you want the Form content to appear. (This example uses support.aspx.)

2. Place the FormBlock server control or custom function for a

Form content within the body of the template. Below is an example of what the form might look like.

I

MPORTANT

!

Ektron recommends using the Poll server control when displaying a form that is being used as a form or a survey.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 229

Managing HTML Forms

3. Save and close the new Web form.

4. To test your form, navigate to your Web site then to the new page.

5. Complete the form.

6. Click the Submit Form button.

7. The screen is refreshed and displays the post back message that you created.

Sending Data as XML

While creating a form that generates email, you can specify that the email be sent as XML data or plain text.

XML has the following advantages over plain text.

Because XML data is structured, you can easily parse the content to store and retrieve important information.

If you download the form data to an Excel spreadsheet, the

XML tags become the spreadsheet’s column headers. See

Also:

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual Section “Working with

HTML Forms” >”Viewing Form Reports” > “Exporting Form

Reports”.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 230

Managing HTML Forms

This section contrasts XML and plain text email using the form displayed below as the example. Here is an example of a form before it is submitted.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 231

Managing HTML Forms

The following table displays the resulting email, depending on the method used.

Form sent as

Plain

Text

Generated email

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 232

Form sent as

XML

Generated email

Managing HTML Forms

XML email Structure

A form’s XML structure consists of two groups of XML tags:

Form and mail elements

Data elements

The following image illustrates the sections of XML email structure.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 233

Managing HTML Forms

The following explains the sections of the XML email.

Root Tag

The XML email is wrapped in

<cmsMail>

root tags.

Form and Mail Tags

The form and mail tags display information about the form that was generated from the form information.

This illustration compares the information defined for the form with the information in the XML email.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 234

Managing HTML Forms

The following table explains each XML tag in the form and mail sections of the email.

XML Tag

<FormTitle>

<FormDescription>

<date>

<MailTo>

<MailFrom>

<MailCc>

Description

Title given to the form that was submitted.

Description given to the form that was submitted.

Date and time the form was submitted.

To email address(es) defined in the form.

From email address(es) defined in the form.

CC address(es) defined in the form.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 235

XML Tag

<MailSubject>

<MailPreamble>

Managing HTML Forms

Description

Subject for the generated email defined in the form.

Preamble for the generated email defined in the form.

Data Tags

The XML email’s data tags wrap the information entered by the form’s submitter. Each form element in the content becomes an

XML tag.

The following image illustrates how a form is edited in the editor, displayed on a Web page, and then converted to XML for the email.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 236

Managing HTML Forms

As shown in the graphic, the content is comprised of four form elements that are converted to XML tags:

Name

Email

PhoneNumber

Problem

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 237

Managing HTML Forms

Redirecting Submitted Form Data

This section explains how to set up the ability to redirect submitted form data to an action page. Because the data is redirected via server transfer, you can easily customize the handling of a multipage form.

Users can select this option when creating or editing a form response, as illustrated below.

Instructions for how a user chooses a hyperlink to an action page are in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Working with

HTML Forms” > “Creating a New Form” > “Redirecting to an Action

Page and Forwarding Form Data”.

N

OTE

If a form’s specifications indicate that its data is saved to a database, the data is saved before being forwarded to an action page.

The following section explains how an administrator sets up a hyperlink to the action page in preparation for a user’s selection.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 238

Managing HTML Forms

Setting Up the Action Page

1. Create the action page. It must

-

load and use the form variables

-

have an .aspx extension

-

reside in the same web application as your Web site

2. Place the action page in your Web site’s root folder.

3. Set up a library hyperlink to the .aspx page. Here’s how to do that:

-

In

Ektron CMS400.NET

, go to the Library.

-

Select Hyperlinks from the file type dropdown.

-

Click the Add button ( ).

-

In the URL Link field, enter the path relative to the Web root to the .aspx file you created in Steps 1 and 2. For example: http://localhost/cms400demo/ServerVariables.aspx

-

Give the hyperlink a title and save it.

4. Inform your users of the hyperlink. They will select it when selecting the form response.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 239

Managing Assets

M a n a g i n g A s s e ts

This section explains the administration of the Document

Management functionality in

Ektron CMS400.NET

. It includes the following sections:

”Asset Management Configuration” on page 240

”Checking Document Management Permissions” on page 244

”Managing Multimedia Assets” on page 250

”PDF Generation” on page 258

”Troubleshooting” on page 269

Asset Management Configuration

This section explains configuring Asset Management. By changing these settings, you can:

update Asset Management server settings

change which file types are allowed on the Asset Management server

set the View Type

There are two ways you can configure an Asset Management server:

the Asset Server Setup screen in the Workarea See Also:

”Updating Asset Configuration Settings” on page 241

the AssetManagement.Config file See Also: ”The

AssetManagement.Config File” on page 242

In either case, you are editing the AssetManagement.Config file.

While the Workarea screen provides a simple way to update this information, some tags can only be updated in the

AssetManagement.Config file. The table in

”The

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 240

Managing Assets

AssetManagement.Config File” on page 242 indicates which tags

can be edited in the Workarea.

Updating Asset Configuration Settings

You can update some AssetManagement.Config tags from the

Ektron CMS400.NET Workarea. To do that, follow these steps.

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group can view, add, or edit the Asset

Server Setup.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > Asset

Server Setup.

2. The Asset Management Configuration screen appears.

3. Click the Edit button ( ) for the tag you want to edit.

4. The Value field for that tag changes to a text box.

5. Change the information in the text box.

6. Click the Save button ( ).

For more information on each tag, see ”The

AssetManagement.Config File” on page 242

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 241

Managing Assets

The AssetManagement.Config File

The following table describes the AssetManagement.Config file’s tags.

Element Description Editable within

Workarea?

WebShareDir=

CatalogName=

LoadBalanced=

CatalogLoc=

StorageLocation=

DomainName=

InstalledVersion=

The folder where temporary data files that are waiting to be checked in, saved, or published are stored. For example:

”dmdata”

.

The name of the Asset Catalog. This name is used when setting up the index service.

Enables Load Balancing for assets. Set to “1” to enable. See

Also:

”Load Balancing Assets” on page 293

The folder location of the Asset Catalog. This location is used when setting up the index service. For example:

C:\assetcatalog\

”.

The folder location where published assets are stored. For example: “

C:\assetslibrary

”.

Can be Domain Name, IP Address or Machine Name. An example is: localhost. This is the address a Web client system uses to open managed documents through HTTP.

The version number of the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

installed.

FileTypes=

UserName=

Files types that users are allowed to upload to Document

Management. For more information, see

”Allowing File Types” on page 243 . The default file types installed are

*.doc,*.xls,*.ppt,*.pdf,*.gif,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.txt,*.log,*.vsd,*.dot,*.zi

p,*.swf,*.wma,*.wav,*.avi, *.mp3, *.rm, *.wmv, *.ra, *.mov,

*.odt, *.odf, *.odp, *.odg, *.ods, *.odb

The user created during the install. If you let

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

install create the user, the default is

EKT_ASSET_USER.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 242

Element Description

Managing Assets

Editable within

Workarea?

Password=

UserDomain=

The password for the user created during the install. This password is encrypted during the install. If you are changing the user and need to encrypt a new password, use the dms400encryptpassword.exe

encryption tool located in

C:\Program Files\Ektron\CMS400v60\Utilities\DMS.

The domain for the user created during the install.

PdfGenerator=

The location of the PDF generation software. If you are using local PDF generation software, the path shows the location of your local PDF generation software. If you are using Ektron’s

PDF generator, the default location is http://aspnet20.ektron.com/PdfManager/

PdfGeneratorService.asmx

.

See Also: ”Modifying the PdfGenerator Information in

AssetManagement.config” on page 260

Allowing File Types

Administrators control which file types are allowed in the

Document Management functionality by editing the

AssetManagement.config file. Reasons for limiting the file types include:

Security - For example, you do not want users to load .exe files to your Asset Management server

Ease of Management - For example, you want your Asset

Management server to store .doc files only

The

<FileTypes>

tag in the AssetManagement.config file contain the file types users can upload. The default file types are:

*.doc,*.xls,*.ppt,*.pdf,*.gif,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.txt,*.log,*.vsd,*.dot,

*.zip,*.swf,*.wma,*.wav,*.avi, *.mp3, *.rm, *.wmv, *.ra, *.mov,

*.odt, *.odf, *.odp, *.odg, *.ods, *.odb

.

Steps to Add or Remove a File Type

To add or remove a file type from the list, follow these steps.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 243

Managing Assets

1. Edit in the Workarea > Settings > Configuration > Asset

Server Setup > Update Asset Configuration Settings screen.

Or

1. Open the

AssetManagement.config

file. The default location is

(webroot)/CMS400Demo

.

2. Find the

FileTypes=””

element. All file types must appear between the quotes. For example,

FileTypes=”*.doc,*.xls”

.

N

OTE

use a comma to separate the file types. Also, file types must be formatted as wildcard.extension. For example, adding an .mp3 file type to the list after *.zip looks like this:

*.zip,*.mp3

3. Add or remove any file type.

4. Save and close the

AssetManagement.config

file.

Checking Document Management Permissions

If you are having any problems with permissions, use this section to verify that your user and folder settings are assigned properly.

See Also:

”User Permissions” on page 244

”User Settings” on page 246

”Dmdata Folder Permissions” on page 246

User Permissions

When the Document Management functionality is installed, permissions are granted to several users for the following folders:

webroot\CMS400Demo\AssetManagement\dmdata

webroot\CMS400Demo\Assets

root\assetlibrary

The assigned permissions vary depending on your server’s operating system.

The following table lists users and their permissions. Scan down the column of your server’s operating system to determine which

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 244

Managing Assets

users and permissions should be enabled for the folders listed above.

You can use this information to help troubleshoot potential permission problems.

User Needs these permissions

IIS_WPG User

IUSR_

(You only need IUSR if impersonate

is set to true

in the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

web.config file)

See

”Advanced

Permissions” on page 245

IUSR_Group

See

”Advanced

Permissions” on page 245

EKT_ASSET_USER

ASP.NET User

See

”Advanced

Permissions” on page 245

webroot/dmdata

folder only: write only access

See

”Advanced

Permissions” on page 245

Windows

2000 Pro or XP Pro

Windows

2003

Server

Windows

2003

Enterprise

Edition

Advanced Permissions

The following are extended permissions for use with the Document

Management functionality.

Traverse Folder / Execute File

List Folder / Read Data

Read Attributes

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 245

Managing Assets

Read Extended Attributes

Create Files / Write Data

Create Folders / Append Data

Write Attributes

Write Extended Attributes

Delete Subfolder and Files

Read Permissions

User Settings

1. Right click My Computer, go to Manage, choose Local Users

and Groups, and select the Users folder.

2. Right click the user defined within the

<Username>

tags of the

AssetManagment.config. (By default, EKT_ASSET_USER.)

Make sure this user's account is not disabled or locked out.

Dmdata Folder Permissions

The

webroot\CMS400Demo\AssetManagement\dmdata

folder should have settings or both the File System and IIS.

Dmdata Settings with the File System

1. Access the webroot\CMS400Demo\AssetManagement\dmdata

folder.

Right click it and display its Properties.

2. On the Security tab, make sure the user defined in

AssetManagement.config (the default is

EKT_Asset_User

) has at least write permissions. DMS uses the

EKT_Asset_User

to upload files to the server.

3. On the same tab, make sure the

ASPNET

user has full control.

DMS uses this user to transfer files to the correct folder, and delete them from the dmdata

folder after the transfer.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 246

Managing Assets

4. On the Web Sharing tab, make sure this folder is being shared, and that the correct site is selected from the dropdown menu. Click Edit Properties. On this screen, make sure Read

and Write are checked, and that Application Permissions is set to None.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 247

Managing Assets

Dmdata Settings within IIS

1. Right click the dmdata

folder and display its Properties.

2. On the Virtual Directory tab, make sure checkboxes for read and write are checked. Also, the Execute Permissions dropdown must be set to None.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 248

Managing Assets

3. On the Directory Security tab, click the Edit button for

Anonymous Access and Authentication Control. Ensure that Anonymous Access for this folder is turned off, and that

Basic Authentication is turned on.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 249

Managing Assets

Managing Multimedia Assets

Multimedia files contain audio, video, or both. File types include

.wav, .mpeg.,avi and .wma.

Because of these unique characteristics, they warrant special treatment within

Ektron CMS400.NET

. This section explains how multimedia files are handled through the following subtopics.

”Supported Multimedia Players” on page 251

”Multimedia File Types” on page 251

”Working with Multimedia Files in Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 253

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 250

Managing Assets

Supported Multimedia Players

Ektron CMS400.NET

supports the following media players.

WindowsMedia

®

Quicktime

®

Realplayer

®

Flash

®

This means that

Ektron CMS400.NET

only supports multimedia files that can run on one of these players. If you import a multimedia file that cannot play on any supported player, it is treated like any other asset but cannot be played within

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

Downloading Media Players

If a

Ektron CMS400.NET

user within the Workarea, or a site visitor, tries to play a file and no supporting media player exists on the user’s computer, the user is prompted to download and install the player.

If the file uses the Quicktime or Flash media player, the web.config file contains information that prompts the user to immediately download and install the player.

If the file uses the Realplayer or WindowsMedia media player, the user must go to the host Web site and download them.

Multimedia File Types

Every multimedia file type has a corresponding MIME type. For example, an mp3 file's MIME Type is audio/mpeg.

All supported MIME types are defined within the mediasettings element of the web.config file. That section of the web.config file is reproduced below.

<add key="application/x-shockwave-flash" value="Flash" />

<add key="audio/x-wav" value="WindowsMedia, Quicktime, Realplayer" />

<add key="audio/x-wav-default" value="WindowsMedia" />

<add key="audio/x-pn-realaudio" value="WindowsMedia, Quicktime, Realplayer" />

<add key="video/x-avi" value="WindowsMedia, Quicktime, Realplayer" />

<add key="video/x-avi-default" value="Quicktime" />

<add key="video/x-msvideo" value="WindowsMedia, Quicktime"/>

<add key="video/x-msvideo-default" value="WindowsMedia"/>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 251

Managing Assets

<add key="audio/x-ms-wma" value="WindowsMedia"/>

<add key="audio/mpeg" value="WindowsMedia,Quicktime"/>

<add key="video/x-realvideo" value="Realplayer"/>

<add key="video/x-ms-wmv" value="WindowsMedia"/>

<add key="audio/x-realaudio" value="Realplayer"/>

<add key="video/quicktime" value="Quicktime"/>

N

OTE

A good reference of file and corresponding MIME types is http:// www.w3schools.com/media/media_mimeref.asp

.

To determine if a multimedia file type is supported, go to the Web site listed above to find its MIME type. Then, go to the web.config file section show above to see if the MIME type exists and, if so, the supported media players.

Adding Players for a MIME Type

You can add to the list of supported media players for any MIME

Type. To do so, open the web.config file, find the MIME type, and add the player name within the value element.

Consider this example:

<add key="audio/mpeg" value="WindowsMedia"/>

As shown,

WindowsMedia

is the only supported player for mp3 files. If you know that other players can run mp3 files, insert additional media players after

WindowsMedia

. To get the exact name of the player, review the value

elements in web.config file section shown above.

Adding MIME Types

If you want Ektron CMS400.NET to support additional MIME

Types, add them within the

<mediaSettings>

element using the following syntax:

<add key="MIME type/subtype" value="supported media player(s)"/>

For example

<add key=" video/x-ms-asf " value=" WindowsMedia "/>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 252

Managing Assets

You must also add the file type to the list of supported file types in

the assetmanagement.config file. See Also: ”Allowing File Types” on page 243

Adding a MIME Type’s Default Player

To identify a player as the default for a MIME type, use the following syntax within web.config.

<add key="MIME Type/subtype" value="default player"/>

For example

<add key=" video/x-msvideo-default " value=" WindowsMedia "/>

Working with Multimedia Files in Ektron CMS400.NET

Importing Multimedia Files into Ektron CMS400.NET

You import multimedia files into

Ektron CMS400.NET

the same way you import other assets. See the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual chapter “Using the Document Management Functionality” sections

“Working with Managed Files” and “Importing Files via Drag and

Drop.“

Once imported into Ektron CMS400.NET, a document proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content. See Also:

”Setting Approval Chains” on page 34

Changing Supported Media Players

After a multimedia file is imported into

Ektron CMS400.NET

, you can view supported media players properties on the Content tab of the Edit Content screen. All players defined for the file’s MIME type are checked. You can uncheck any media players that you do not want to operate a particular file.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 253

Managing Assets

If a default media player is defined for a MIME type in web.config, you cannot uncheck its checkbox. In the above graphic,

WindowsMedia is the default player.

Changing File Properties

After a multimedia file is imported into

Ektron CMS400.NET

, you can edit its properties on the Content tab of the Edit Content screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 254

Managing Assets

If the file is supported by several players, first check the player whose properties you want to modify, then edit its properties.

The Width and Height fields determine the size (in pixels) of the media player when it appears in the Workarea and on your Web site. The remaining properties are determined by the media player

(QuickTime in the example above).

Inserting a Multimedia File into Content

To insert a multimedia file into content, follow these steps.

1. Either create a new HTML content item or edit an existing one.

2. Within the content, type text or insert an image that you want site visitors to click to launch the multimedia file. For example:

Click here to begin playing.

3. Select the image or text you inserted in Step 2.

4. Apply a quicklink to the multimedia file to the selection. This procedure is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Library Folder” > “Quicklinks and Forms.”

Replacing Multimedia Files

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 255

Managing Assets

If you want to replace a multimedia file but maintain all CMS information about that file (for example, its properties, summary, metadata, etc.), follow these steps.

1. Browse to the multimedia content item and edit it.

2. Note that the bottom of the Edit screen has a gray rectangle with the text Drag files into this window and drop to add.

3. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the folder that contains the updated multimedia file.

4. Drag and drop the file into the lower section of the Edit Content screen.

5. Save, Check In, or Approve the content.

Note that after you complete the replacement, you can play and restore older versions of the file through the content’s history. For more information, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual chapter “Viewing and Restoring Previous Content.”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 256

Managing Assets

Viewing and Listening to Multimedia Files

Users in the Workarea and visitors to your Web site play interact with multimedia files in the same way.

When either type of user visits a page that hosts a multimedia file,

Ektron CMS400.NET

tries to match media players on the user’s computer with those defined in the web.config file for the file’s

MIME type.

Ektron CMS400.NET

then displays a list of choices for every supported media player for the file. The user selects the preferred one.

Modifying Style Properties of the Multimedia Player

You can change the multimedia player’s style properties by modifying the EKTTabs.css style sheet. This file is installed to site folder/Workarea/csslib

.

For example, you can change the color of the text that selects a player to red by changing the property highlighted below.

.EktTabActive

{ padding: 2px 2px 2px 2px; top:10px; text-decoration:none; position: relative; background-color:white; border: solid thin navy; color:Red ; font-weight:bolder;

}

Here is the result.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 257

Managing Assets

PDF Generation

PDF (Portable Document Format) is a type of file developed as a means of distributing compact, platform-independent documents.

Each document is self-contained, packing text, graphics, and fonts into a file.

Office documents stored in

Ektron CMS400.NET

can be automatically converted to PDF format. Then, when adding the

Office document to a Web page, a visitor sees the PDF version of the document.

Why use PDF?

Files easily cross multiple platforms, including Microsoft, Apple,

Linux, and Unix.

Documents keep their formatting and appear the same on a computer screen or when printing.

File size is typically smaller, which means less bandwidth usage.

Free viewing application that allows any Office documents, once converted, to be viewed by anyone with a PDF viewer.

Eliminates the need for a different viewer for each file type.

The following sections explain creating PDFs with the Document

Management feature:

”PDF Conversion Process” on page 259

”Local PDF Generation” on page 260

”Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation” on page 261

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 258

Managing Assets

”Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Automatically” on page 261

PDF Conversion Process

The PDF conversion of an Office document starts when it is published. At that point, a copy of the file is sent to an Ektron server for PDF generation. After the server generates the PDF, it returns the PDF to your Asset Management server.

When the PDF returns, it doesn’t appear in the CMS400.NET

Workarea -- only the originally-published Office document appears.

The Ektron CMS400.NET stores the PDF file in its secure location.

Subsequent editing is done in the original Office document. Each time it’s published, a new PDF is generated.

Once the Office document is added to a Web page, the Web page shows the PDF version of the it. This means visitors of the site only need a PDF viewer to view any Office document on your site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 259

Managing Assets

The Ektron Windows Service runs the background process that

converts Office documents to PDF. See Also: ”Ektron Windows

Service” on page 271

”Local PDF Generation” on page 260

”Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation” on page 261

”Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Automatically” on page 261

Local PDF Generation

If you purchase software from a PDF generation software vendor, you can create PDF documents on a local network. Reasons for generating a PDF locally include:

Speed: Office documents take less time to be converted to

PDF format

Security: Office documents never leave the local network

Quality: You can configure the output quality of the Office documents

The following sections explain setting up local PDF generation.

”Modifying the PdfGenerator Information in

AssetManagement.config” on page 260

Modifying the PdfGenerator Information in AssetManagement.config

When setting up local PDF generation, use the

PdfGenerator parameter in the AssetManagement.Config file to provide the location of the local PDF generator.

To modify the file, follow these steps.

1. Open the

AssetManagement.Config

file located in

C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\CMS400Demo

.

2. Change the location of the PDF generator.

For example:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 260

PdfGenerator=”http://aspnet20.ektron.com/PdfManager/PdfGeneratorService.asmx” might become

PdfGenerator=”http://localhost/PdfManager/PdfGeneratorService.asmx”

3. Save and Close the file.

Managing Assets

Enabling or Disabling PDF Generation

Administrators decide if this feature is enabled and to which folders it applies. After enabling this feature, administrators can change any folder’s properties to allow PDF generation.

Follow these steps to enable or disable this feature.

1. In the CMS Workarea, click Settings > Configuration >

Setup.

2. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

3. Click the Enable Office documents to be published as PDF checkbox.

4. Click the Save button ( ).

Designating a Folder to Generate PDFs Automatically

By setting a folder’s properties to allow PDF generation, all Office documents published in that folder have a PDF created for them.

For an introduction to PDF generation, see

”PDF Generation” on page 258 .

The steps below explain how to change the folder property for PDF generation.

N

OTE

Existing subfolders do not inherit PDF generation. Each subfolder needs to be set individually. However, when creating a new subfolder, it inherits the PDF generation setting from the parent folder. Administrators can change the setting while creating a new subfolder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 261

Managing Assets

1. In the Workarea, click the Content folder button.

2. Click the folder for which you want to enable PDF generation.

3. Click the View Properties button ( ).

4. Click the Edit Properties button ( ).

5. Click the Publish Office Documents as PDF checkbox.

6. Click the Save button ( ).

Adding Assets Automatically

The Auto Add Asset feature automatically transfers assets placed in a specified folder into

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

It’s a very helpful feature if, for example, several users work with assets, you want to manage the files with

Ektron CMS400.NET

, but the users creating or updating the files have neither

Ektron

CMS400.NET

licenses nor the client software installed. The users simply place the files in a folder, and the Auto Add Asset feature moves them into

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

The Auto Add Asset feature is very flexible. While setting it up, you can determine the following aspects of how it works.

whether it uploads a single file, multiple files, a folder, or a folder and its subfolders

the location of the uploaded files

if subfolders are included, do you want to mirror that structure within

Ektron CMS400.NET

?

the file types that can be uploaded

how frequently the specified files or folders are checked for new content

The rest of this section explains the details of using the Auto Add

Asset feature through the following topics.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 262

Managing Assets

”Installing the Auto Add Asset Feature” on page 263

”Updating the Configuration File” on page 264

”Start the Auto Add Asset Service” on page 268

”Testing the Auto Add Asset Feature” on page 268

Installing the Auto Add Asset Feature

Follow these steps to install the Auto Add Asset Feature.

1. Verify that

Ektron CMS400.NET

is running basic authentication in IIS. For information on how to do this, see http:// www.microsoft.com/technet/prodtechnol/WindowsServer2003/

Library/IIS/abbca505-6f63-4267-aac1-

1ea89d861eb4.mspx?mfr=true .

2. Create the following directories in the file system of the computer that will be used to transfer the files to CMS400.

Input - place files in this directory before uploading them to

Ektron CMS400.NET

Backup - files are moved to this directory after they are uploaded to

Ektron CMS400.NET

Error - files are moved to this directory if there was a problem moving them to the input

folder

3. To each computer that will run the Auto Add Asset Feature, copy the

C:\Program

Files\Ektron\CMS400v60\Utilities\AssetWorkerSetup.msi

file and run it.

This program creates a new folder,

C:\Program

Files\Ektron\AssetWorkerSetup

.

4. Test that the Web Services are working. To do that, browse to the following page: http://localhost/cms400demo/workarea/webservices/ assetservice.asmx

The page displays two Web services: AddAsset and

MakeFolderIfNoExists.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 263

Managing Assets

Updating the Configuration File

After installing the Auto Add Asset feature, you can modify the configuration file, which lets you customize the feature to fit your particular needs.

The file’s name and folder path is

C:\Program

Files\Ektron\AssetWorkerSetup\maindata.config

.

The following table describes its elements.

Element

DmsUserName

DmsPassword

DmsUserDomain

DmsServer

CmsUserName

CmsPassword

Description

The user created during the install. If you let

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

install create the user, the default is EKT_ASSET_USER.

The password for the user created during the install. This password is encrypted during the install. If you are changing the user and need to encrypt a new password, use the dms400encryptpassword.exe

encryption tool located in

C:\Program Files\Ektron\CMS400v60\Utilities\DMS.

The domain for the user created during the install.

Enter the name of the server on which DMS is running.

By default,

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

inserts the user name vs. This is a special user which lets you work in Visual Studio.net while signing into CMS as an administrator.

Note: "Securing Ektron CMS400.NET," on page i advises you to remove the

VS user. If you do, you must create a new user, assign him to the

Administrators groups, and enter his username and password at these fields.

By default,

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

inserts the password of the VS user. If you change the VS user’s password, or change the CMS UserName, enter the new password here.

Note: "Securing Ektron CMS400.NET," on page i advises you to remove the

VS user. If you do, you must create a new user, assign him to the

Administrators groups, and enter his username and password at these fields.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 264

Managing Assets

Element

CmsUserDomain

Protocol

CmsSite

DmsSite

ConfigType

Folder:

Input

Backup

Error

Description

Enter the Domain Name, IP Address or Machine Name. An example is localhost.

A Web client system uses this address to open managed documents through

HTTP.

Enter the protocol that will be used to transfer the assets: http

or hhtps

.

Enter the path to your Web site root.

For example, the sample site‘s root is http://localhost/CMS400demo

.

Enter the path to your Asset Management folder. For example, the sample site‘s Asset Management folder is http://localhost/CMS400demo/

AssetManagement

.

Enter the type of file upload you want. Choices are:

file

multifile

folder

autofile

autofolder

autofoldercreate

multifolder

automultifolder

automultifoldercreate

These choices are explained in ”File Upload Types” on page 266 .

Enter paths to the folders you created in Step 2. An example is below.

<Input>C:\Test\Input</Input>

<Backup>C:\Test\Backup</Backup>

<Error>C:\Test\Error</Error>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 265

Element

MultiFolder

Managing Assets

Description

if your choice at the

ConfigType

element is listed below, use this element to specify the folders.

multifolder

automultifolder

automultifoldercreate

Separate each folder with the pipe character (|). Here is an example.

C:\AutoAddAsset\InputPhotos | C:\AutoAddAsset\InputWorddocs | C:\Aut oAddAsset\InputPDFs

CreateFolder

FileTypes Enter all file types that can be added using the Auto Add Asset feature.

To identify a file type, enter an asterisk(*), a period (.) and the file’s extension.

Separate each file type with a comma. Here is the sample list that appears by default:

*.doc,*.xls,*.ppt,*.pdf,*.gif,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.txt,*.log,*.vsd,*.d

ot,*.zip

Note: The FileTypes field in the Assetmanagement.config file determines which files can be used within

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

. You should not enter file types here that are not listed in AssetManagement.config.

See Also:

”Allowing File Types” on page 243

File Upload Types

There are nine methods for uploading files from the input folder into

Ektron CMS400.NET

. The following table explains the options and how each works.

File Upload

Type

File

Multifile

What is uploaded

One file

Multiple individual files separated by a pipe na na

If folder, are subfolders also scanned for assets?

Are new files uploaded automatically?

CMS folder structure set up to match your file system?

no no no no

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 266

Managing Assets

File Upload

Type

Folder

Autofile

Multifolder

What is uploaded

One folder

One folder

All specified folders

Note: Specify the folders at the

Multifolder element. See

”MultiFolder” on page 266

If folder, are subfolders also scanned for assets?

Are new files uploaded automatically?

no no

CMS folder structure set up to match your file system?

no no yes yes yes no no yes no Autofolder

Autofoldercreate

Automultifolder

All files in specified folder

All files in specified folder

All files all specified folders

Note: Specify the folders at the

Multifolder element. See

”MultiFolder” on page 266 yes yes yes

Automultifoldercre ate

All files all specified folders

Note: Specify the folders at the

Multifolder element. See

”MultiFolder” on page 266 yes yes yes yes yes no

Yes

Note: Changes to files already uploaded are considered new assets

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 267

Managing Assets

Start the Auto Add Asset Service

The Auto Add Asset feature requires a Windows Service to transfer assets to

Ektron CMS400.NET

. You must begin the service manually every time you start Windows. Follow these steps to start the Auto Add Asset Service.

1. Go to Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools >

Computer Management.

2. Click Services and Applications > Services.

3. Click the start button (circled below) to start the Automatic

Asset Adder service.

Testing the Auto Add Asset Feature

After completing the above steps, you should verify that the Auto

Add Asset feature is working. To do this,

1. Place files of the appropriate type into the specified input folder

2. Open

C:\Program

Files\Ektron\AssetWorkerSetup\AssetWorker.exe.config

with a text editor such as Notepad.

3. Change the value of the

PollInterval

element to 10000. Save and close the file.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 268

Managing Assets

4. The input folders will be checked for files every 10 seconds.

They should appear within the

Ektron CMS400.NET

shortly.

Troubleshooting

This section explains how to fix problems that may occur with

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

Symptom See this section

Error message: Install Indexing Service

A search of PDF files on Ektron CMS returns no results

”Setting Up the Indexing Service” on page 270

”Installing the Acrobat PDF iFilter” on page 279

A search of asset files finds no assets on your Web site

”Turning on the Asset Indexing Service” on page 283

The server running

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

is running slowly; much of its resources are being used even though the computer is idle

”Disabling the System Indexing Service” on page 280

Error message: Windows Server 2003 no longer ships MSDAIPP.DLL, thus connecting to an FPSE server through

Webfolders, is no longer possible.

”Using Microsoft Windows Server 2003 as a Client (Web

Folders Setup)” on page 284

While trying to drag and drop an asset, an error message appears: The target

directory already exists.

Check the impersonate

element of the web.config file. If it is set to true

, make sure the anonymous access account has at least write access to the dmdata

and assets

directories.

When you try to publish DMS documents,

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

is some times not allowing them to update.

Make sure your production server is not running

Windows XP. You cannot use XP as a production server for DMS.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 269

Managing Assets

Symptom See this section

After recently moving the ASM database to a new SQL sever that has never hosted an ASM database, the following error appears while adding a DMS asset:

”ERRMSG: AssetManagement error: Failed to save asset” on page 287

AssetManagement error: Failed to save asset. Internal Message: RAISERROR could not locate entry for error

2000000002 in sysmessages. at

Ektron.ASM.Documents.Asset.Create(en

AssetStatus state) at ... ....

Setting Up the Indexing Service

If you see the following error during installation, you need to set up the indexing service manually.

The following steps explain how to do that.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 270

Managing Assets

Step

1.

Click Start > Control Panel

> Administrative Tools >

Computer Management.

The Computer

Management screen appears.

Screen

2.

Click the plus sign (+) next to Services and

Applications.

3.

Click Indexing Service.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 271

Managing Assets

Step

4.

Click the stop button to halt the indexing service if it is running.

Note: If the Index service is running, the start button is grayed out.

Screen

5.

Right click Indexing

Service, then click New >

Catalog.

6.

At the Add Catalog Screen:

In the Name field, add the catalog name.

In the Location field, identify the folder that will store the asset catalog.

Note: By default, during installation,

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

names the catalog Asset and associates it with the location c:\assetcatalog

. The installer can change the default location.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 272

Step

7.

Click OK.

The Computer

Management screen shows your new Indexing Service.

Screen

Managing Assets

8.

Right click the Asset catalog, then click New >

Directory.

This is the directory the service indexes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 273

Step

9.

In the Path text box, add the folder of the secure storage location. Make sure the Include in Index radio button is marked Yes.

Note: By default, during installation,

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

uses c:\(Domain Name, IP

Address or Machine

Name)\assetlibrary

.

Screen

10. Click OK. Then, click the plus sign (+) next to Asset to view the Directories folder.

In the Directories folder, the new directory is displayed.

Managing Assets

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 274

Step

11. Right click Assets, then click Properties.

Screen

12. On the Tracking tab, uncheck all boxes and choose None for WWW

Server.

Managing Assets

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 275

Step

13. On the Generation tab, uncheck Inherit above

settings from Service.

Then click OK.

The Index files with

unknown extensions and

Generate abstracts check boxes can be checked or empty. It is your choice.

Screen

Managing Assets

14. Right click Indexing

Service, then click All

Tasks > Tune

Performance.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 276

Step

15. Click the Customize radio button.

Screen

Managing Assets

16. Click the Customize

button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 277

Step

17. Change Indexing to

Instant.

Screen

Managing Assets

18. Click OK and OK again to close both dialog boxes.

19. Click the Start button to start the service again.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 278

Managing Assets

Installing the Acrobat PDF iFilter

This section describes how to install the Acrobat PDF iFilter. PDF iFilter is a free downloadable application which lets you index PDF documents with Microsoft® indexing clients, so that users can easily search for text within PDF documents.

Symptom

While trying to search Adobe Acrobat PDFs on Ektron CMS, your search returns no results.

Cause

The Acrobat PDF iFilter is either not installed, or is installed incorrectly on your server.

Resolution

Follow these steps to make sure that the Adobe PDF iFilter is installed correctly.

Step Screen

1.

Ensure your server meets one of the following requirements.

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Service Pack 2

Microsoft Windows XP Professional, Service Pack 1

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, Service Pack 3

Microsoft Windows 2003 Server

Each environment must contain Microsoft Indexing Services.

2.

Download the PDF iFilter from http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/detail.jsp?ftpID=2611 to the machine where you wish to install it.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 279

Managing Assets

Step Screen

3.

Stop all appropriate clients, using one or more of the following methods.

Windows XP and 2003 Server: Click Start > Control Panel >

Administrative Tools > Computer Management. In left-side Console Tree, highlight Indexing Service under Services and Applications. Under Action Menu, choose Stop. Close window.

Windows 2000 and 2000 Server: Click Start > Settings > Control

Panel > Administrative Tools > Computer Management. In leftside Console Tree, highlight Indexing Service under Services and

Applications. Under Action Menu, choose Stop. Close window.

4.

Uninstall any previous version of PDF iFilter.

5.

Double-click the downloaded PDF iFilter 6.0 EXE file and follow the on-screen instructions.

6.

Start all appropriate clients, using one or more of the following methods.

Windows XP and 2003 Server: Click Start > Control Panel >

Administrative Tools > Computer Management. In left-side Console Tree, highlight Indexing Service under Services and Applications. Under Action Menu, choose Start. Close window.

Windows 2000 and 2000 Server: Click Start > Settings > Control

Panel > Administrative Tools > Computer Management. In leftside Console Tree, highlight Indexing Service under Services and

Applications. Under Action Menu, choose Start. Close window.

7.

Re-index your system with the appropriate clients, using the following method.

Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/2003 Server: Open the Computer

Management Console (mentioned above). In the left-side Console

Tree, open Services and Applications > Indexing Service. Open the Asset Catalog listed under Indexing Service by clicking on the plus sign (+) next to the Catalog name. Click on Directories. For each directory listed in the right pane that contains PDF files, rightclick on it and select All Tasks > Rescan (Full).

For more information about troubleshooting and known issues with the Adobe Acrobat PDF iFilter, see the readme.htm file. The file’s default location is

C:\Program Files\Adobe\PDF IFilter

6.0\readme.htm

.

Disabling the System Indexing Service

Symptom

The server running

Ektron CMS400.NET

is running slowly; much of its resources are being used even when the computer is idle.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 280

Managing Assets

Cause

The Microsoft Windows Indexing service is turned on during installation. This service indexes every file on the server, and the resources required to carry out that task slow down other activities.

N

OTE

Ektron recommends turning off all indexing services other than the DMS Asset indexing service.

Resolution

To resolve the issue, follow these steps to disable the Windows indexing service. This change does not affect DMS’s ability to find files because it uses a different indexing service.

Step

1.

Click Start > Control Panel

> Administrative Tools >

Computer Management.

The Computer

Management screen appears.

Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 281

Step

2.

Click the plus sign (+) next to Services and

Applications.

Screen

3.

Click Indexing Service.

4.

Click the Stop button to stop the indexing service.

Managing Assets

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 282

Turning on the Asset Indexing Service

Step

1.

Click Start > Control Panel

> Administrative Tools >

Computer Management.

The Computer

Management screen appears.

Screen

Managing Assets

2.

Click the plus sign (+) next to Services and

Applications.

3.

Click Indexing Service.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 283

Step

4.

Click the Start button to start the indexing service.

Screen

Managing Assets

Using Microsoft Windows Server 2003 as a Client (Web

Folders Setup)

Symptom

You receive the following error message:

Windows Server 2003 no longer ships MSDAIPP.DLL, thus connecting to an FPSE server through Webfolders, is no longer possible.

Resolution

Per MS Licensing, you can obtain webfldrs.msi from any downlevel OS, or any Office product that shipped before Windows2003

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 284

Managing Assets

(not Office 2003) and install the WebFolders client. Doing so will keep you compliant with licensing.

Installing WebFolders from Office 2003 is only allowed if you have an Office 2003 license for each Windows2003 server you plan to install WebFolders on.

Web Folders Setup for Microsoft Windows Server 2003

N

OTE

You only need to run the Web Folders Setup if there is a problem during the install. The

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

install performs the setup when needed.

The MSDAIPP.DLL is no longer shipped with Microsoft Windows

Server 2003, making communication with Web folders impossible.

To correct this,

Ektron CMS400.NET

setup runs the Web folder setup when it detects Microsoft Windows Server 2003.

The following steps explains installing Web Folders. You will need to obtain a copy of the webfldrs.msi file.

Step Setup Screen

1.

Double click the webfldrs.msi file.

2.

The Web Folders install screen appears. Click Next to continue.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 285

Managing Assets

Step

3.

The Web Folders Identity dialog box appears.

Add your Name.

Add your Organization.

Click Next.

Setup Screen

4.

The Web Folders Product

ID dialog box appears.

This dialog box displays the your product ID number.

Click Next.

5.

The Web Folders Selection

Choice dialog box appears.

Complete - installs all components.

Custom - you choose the components to install.

Typical - installs the most frequently used components.

After making a selection, click Next.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 286

Managing Assets

Step

6.

The Verify Ready All dialog box appears. Click Install

Now.

Setup Screen

7.

The Action dialog box appears. The Setup is installing Web folders.

8.

The We Are Done dialog box appears. Click OK.

ERRMSG: AssetManagement error: Failed to save asset

Symptom

After recently moving the ASM database to a new SQL sever that has never hosted an ASM database, the following error appears while adding a DMS asset.

AssetManagement error: Failed to save asset. Internal Message: RAISERROR could not locate entry for error 2000000002 in sysmessages. at Ektron.ASM.Documents.Asset.Create(enAssetStatus state) at Ektron.ASM.Documents.AbstractAssetManagement.Create(AssetMetaData assetMetaData, enAssetStatus state) at Ektron.ASM.PluginManager.PluginHandler.Create(AssetMetaData assetMetaData, enAssetStatus state) at

AssetManagement.AssetManagementService.Create(AssetMetaData assetMetaData, enAssetStatus state) at Mojave.AssetManagementProxy.Create(AssetMetaData assetMetaData, enAssetStatus state) at Ektron.Cms.DataIO.EkContentRW.AddContentv2_0(Collection ContObj) at

Ektron.Cms.EkException.ThrowException(Exception ex) at

Ektron.Cms.DataIO.EkContentRW.AddContentv2_0(Collection ContObj) at

Ektron.Cms.Content.EkContent.AddNewContentv2_0(Collection ContObj)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 287

Managing Assets

Cause

During the creation of the ASM database, a total of 7 messages are written to the sysmessages table in SQL Server’s master database. Each installation of SQL Server has its own master database and, in a typical move from one location to another, changes to the master database are not brought over.

If the ASM database was moved, and these messages are not in the sysmessages table in the new location's master table, the above error appears instead of a standard error message.

Resolution

Run this set of SQL scripts against your database. They add appropriate messages to the sysmessages table in the master database.

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000001, 10, N'Error in %s: Error %d inserting into %s. %s', US_ENGLISH,

FALSE, REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000002, 10, N'Error in %s: Insert into %s returned %d rows. %s', US_ENGLISH,

FALSE, REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000003, 10, N'Error in %s: Failed creating record because primary key already exists. %s', US_ENGLISH, FALSE, REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000004, 10, N'Error in %s: Error %d updating into %s. %s', US_ENGLISH, FALSE,

REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 288

Managing Assets

sp_addmessage 2000000005, 10, N'Error in %s: Update into %s returned %d rows. %s', US_ENGLISH,

FALSE, REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000007, 10, N'Error in %s: Error %d deleting into %s. %s', US_ENGLISH, FALSE,

REPLACE go

/

*********************************************************************************************

***/ sp_addmessage 2000000008, 10, N'Error in %s: Delete into %s returned %d rows. %s', US_ENGLISH,

FALSE, REPLACE go

This snippet utilizes the sp_addmessage stored procedure from the master database, which adds the appropriate messages to the correct table.

N

OTE

Although it is possible to recode these as an INSERT statement that can run directly against the sysmessages table, that procedure is not recommended.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 289

Managing Tasks

M a n a g i n g Ta s k s

N

OTE

Much of the Task functionality is documented in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Users Manual section “Managing Tasks”. As an administrator, you should familiarize yourself with this information.

Tasks are typically assigned to content to help you monitor and manage changes to your Web site. Within Ektron CMS400.NET, users can assign tasks to themselves and other users. Tasks may include updating content, publishing content, updating an image and reordering a collection.

There are two kinds of tasks:

Tasks not assigned to content

Tasks assigned to content

A standard Ektron CMS400.NET user only sees tasks that are either assigned to or by himself. However, an administrator can view all tasks regardless of who they are assigned to or by.

This chapter explains how to access, manage, and assign tasks via the following topics:

”The Tasks Folder” on page 291

”Task Permissions” on page 291

”Task Categories and Types” on page 292

”Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with Content” on page 301

”Task States” on page 309

”Task View Options” on page 312

”Email Notification” on page 316

”Archiving a Task” on page 316

”Deleting a Task” on page 318

”Purging a Task” on page 318

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 290

Managing Tasks

The Tasks Folder

The tasks folder in the Smart Desktop contains all tasks in the Web site.

Task Permissions

Assign task-related permissions on the screens indicated below.

Permission

Create task

Where assigned

Manage Members for Role: Task-Create

Redirect task (that is, assign to another user)

Manage Members for Role: Task-Delete

Delete task Manage Members for Role: Task-Redirect

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 291

Managing Tasks

For more information about the screens listed above, see ”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42

.

Task Categories and Types

Tasks can be assigned a Task Category, then a Task Type. This gives users an additional way to filter their tasks.

Task Categories and Task Types have a hierarchical relationship: the Task Category is the parent, and the Task Type is the child. So, several types can be assigned to each category.

Some examples of Task Categories might be Engineering, Sales,

Documentation, or Web Design. Examples of Task Types might be

Edit Content, Update Documents, or Contact Customer.

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group or users assigned the following roles can view, add, or edit task categories and types: Task-Create, Task-delete,

Task-Redirect.

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

You can create Task Categories and Task Types from these locations.

When adding a task. See Also:

Ektron CMS400.NET

User

Manual section “Managing Tasks” > “Creating a Task via the

Task Folder” When editing a task.

When working in the View Categorization screen.

View Categorization Screen

The View Categorization screen allows administrators to work with

Task Categories and Task Types. From this screen you can create, edit, and delete them.

To access the View Categorization Screen, access the Workarea

> Settings > Configuration > Task Types.

The following screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 292

Managing Tasks

Viewing Task Categories

Note

The View Categorization screen has a system-defined category (Form

Submission Task) that can only be used with forms. You can change its name but cannot delete it. For more information, see the Forms chapter of the Ektron

CMS400.NET User Manual.

While in the View Categorization screen, you can collapse and expand Task Categories. To collapse a Task Category, click the

( ) button next to the Task Category name. To expand one, click the ( ) button next to the Task Category name.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 293

Managing Tasks

The following example shows the View Categorization screen with one Task Category minimized.

Creating Task Categories and Task Types

From the View Categorization screen, you can create Task

Categories and Task Types by clicking the Add Task Button ( ).

When you do, the following screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 294

Managing Tasks

From this screen, you can perform these tasks.

”Adding a New Task Category and Task Type” on page 295

”Adding a New Task Type to an Existing Task Category” on page 296

”Editing Task Category” on page 297

”Editing a Task Type” on page 298

”Task Type Availability” on page 299

Adding a New Task Category and Task Type

To add new Task Category and Task Type, follow these steps.

1. Click the Add Task Type button ( ).

2. The Add Task Type Screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 295

Managing Tasks

3. Click the Add Task Type to New Task Category radio button or in the text box.

4. Enter a name in the New Task Category field.

5. Add a Task Type name in the Task Type field.

6. Enter a Task Type Description.

7. Choose a Task Type Availability. See Also:

”Task Type

Availability” on page 299

8. Click Save ( ).

9. Your new Task Categories and Task Types appear on the View

Categorization screen.

Adding a New Task Type to an Existing Task Category

To add a new Task Type to an existing Task Category, follow these steps.

1. Click the Add Task Type button ( )

2. The Add Task Type Screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 296

Managing Tasks

3. Click the Add Task Type to New Task Category radio button or click the drop down box.

4. Choose a category from the drop down box.

5. Add a Task Type name in the Task Type field.

6. Enter a Task Type Description.

7. Choose a Task Type Availability. See Also:

”Task Type

Availability” on page 299

8. Click Save ( ).

9. Your new Task Categories and Task Types appear on the View

Categorization screen.

Editing Task Category

You can edit a Task Category names. To edit a Task Category, click the Task Category link.

A text box screen appears next to the category name. Use the text box to change the name.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 297

Managing Tasks

You can either save ( ) the changes, or cancel ( ) the edit.

Editing a Task Type

From the View Categorization screen, you can edit a Task Type.

This allows you to change the Task Type name, Task Type description, and Task Type availability.

To edit a Task Type, follow these steps.

1. On the View Categorization screen, click a Task Type.

2. The Edit Task Type screen appears.

From this screen you can edit the following:

Task Type

Task Type Description

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 298

Managing Tasks

Task Type Availability. See Also: ”Task Type Availability” on page 299

3. Edit the information.

4. Click Save ( ).

5. The Task Type information is changed.

Task Type Availability

Task Types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens. By making a Task Type not available, you can suppress without deleting it.

When you make a Task Type not available, you see the following warning.

After you make a Task Type not available, the assigned tasks’ Type and Category are changed to Not Specified.

Deleting Task Categories and Task Types

You can delete Task Types by Task Category or individually.

To delete a Task Type, click the check box next to the Task Type, then click the Delete ( ) button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 299

Managing Tasks

When you delete a Task Type, the following appears.

To delete all Task Types, check the Delete all check box.

The following example shows which check boxes on the screen are associated with All Task Types, Task Categories, and individual

Task Types.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 300

Managing Tasks

Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with

Content

In addition to the manual assignment of tasks, they can be automatically generated whenever content, an asset, or a form is created. You would enable and use the Automatic Task Creation feature if you want to set up a preapproval process, which requires one or more users to review and approve content before it enters the regular approval process. (The regular approval process is described in

”Setting Approval Chains” on page 34 .)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 301

The most common scenario illustrated below.

Managing Tasks

In this example, an automatically-generated task assigns the content to a preapproval group. When any member of that group reviews his tasks, he inspects the corresponding content and assigns it to an editor. After the editor reviews and possibly edits the content and submits it for approval, it enters the normal approval process.

This section explains the automatic task creation process through the following subtopics:

”Enabling Automatic Task Creation” on page 302

”Assigning a Preapproval Group to a Folder” on page 303

”How Automatic Task Creation Works” on page 305

Enabling Automatic Task Creation

The Settings > Configuration > Application Setup screen’s Enable

PreApproval Group field controls

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Automatic

Task feature. Check this box to turn Automatic Tasks on.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 302

Managing Tasks

Next, you create user groups and assign them to folders whose content must complete the preapproval process before it enters

the regular approval process. See ”Managing User Groups” on page 436 and

”Assigning a Preapproval Group to a Folder” on page 303 .

Assigning a Preapproval Group to a Folder

The ability to select or update a folder’s preapproval group is determined by the advanced permission Modify Preapproval.

Only users with this permission can see the Modify Preapproval button ( ) when viewing the Folder Properties screen. See Also:

”Standard & Advanced Permissions” on page 27

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 303

Managing Tasks

If you have permission to modify a folder’s preapproval group, go to the Folder Properties screen and click the Modify Preapproval button ( ) to access the PreApproval Group field. (The field only appears if you have enabled the Preapproval Feature. See

”Enabling Automatic Task Creation” on page 302 .)

If you assign a user group, an automatic task can be assigned to that group whenever content in that folder is created or updated.

If you select Inherit, this folder gets its preapproval group from the parent folder. If you select None, you disable the preapproval feature for the folder.

Preapproval Groups Report

The Preapproval Groups Report lists all preapproval groups assigned to folders within

Ektron CMS400.NET

. To access it, go to

Smart Desktop > Reports > Preapproval Groups. See Also:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 304

Managing Tasks

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual > “The Workarea and Smart

Desktop” > “Understanding the Smart Desktop.”

How Automatic Task Creation Works

When a user submits a content item for approval,

Ektron

CMS400.NET

checks to see if an open task exists for it. (An open task is one whose state is Not Started, Active, Awaiting Data, on

Hold, or Pending.) If none exists and a preapproval group is assigned to its folder, a task is created and associated with the content.

At this point, all members of the folder's preapproval group see the task on their Smart Desktop.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 305

Managing Tasks

The task has the following information.

Field

Title

Value

A string formulated by joining the

content title

content ID number

underscore

Task

For example,

Private Content2_Task

Assigned to

Assigned by

The preapproval group

The user who submitted the content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 306

Managing Tasks

Field

Content

Priority

State

Due date

Start date

Created by

Description

Value

The content being submitted for approval

Normal

Not Started none none

User who submitted content none

Next, the task can be reviewed by any member of the preapproval group. The member then has two choices.

review the content and submit it for publishing. This action completes the preapproval process and submits the content into the regular approval chain.

assign the task to another user, such as an editor. (The user to whom the task is being assigned must have permission to edit the content.) The editor reviews the content, updates it as needed, and submits it into the regular approval chain.

N

OTE

The user submitting the content does not need permission to create tasks. Also, the user assigned to the task should not change its state using the task system.

Instead, he should review and approve content using the regular content workflow mechanism. That mechanism automatically changes the task’s state.

The tables below explain the sequence of changes to content and its associated task. All changes are logged into the task’s history.

See Also:

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual > “Managing Tasks” >

“Viewing a Task’s History”

Also, email is automatically generated for automatic tasks as it is for manually-created tasks. See Also:

”Email Notification” on page 316

Sequence of Task/Content Statuses (Author Lacks Permission to

Approve Content)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 307

Managing Tasks

Event Content Status

Content is created and checked in

Checked In

Content is submitted for approval

Note: The above action creates the automatic task for the content.

Waiting for completion of associated tasks

Content is assigned by a member or preapproval group to an editor

Waiting for completion of associated tasks

Editor updates content then checks it in

Checked In

Content is submitted for approval; it enters any approval chain set for the folder

Note: Since the task requires an approval, it appears in the task list of the current approver.

When the content is approved, the task is moved to the next approver's task list.

Submitted for Approval

Approver denies request

Approver approves content

Checked In

Approved

Task Status

No auto task assigned

Not Started

Not Started

Active

Pending

Reopened

Complete

Sequence of Task/Content Statuses (Author Can Approve Content)

Event Content Status

Content is created then checked in

Checked In

Task Status

No auto task assigned

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 308

Event Content Status

Content is edited then checked in

Checked In

Content is submitted for approval

Note: Although an author can approve content, he must click publish twice: once to change content status to Awaiting

Completion of Associated Task, and a second time to change it to Approved.

Waiting for completion of associated tasks

Content is published Approved

Task Status

Active

Not Started

Managing Tasks

Complete

Task States

During the life of a task assigned to content, it normally progresses through a series of states. The state helps track a task’s progress from creation to completion and even removal from the database.

When reviewing the history of a task, the state can be used to review which actions changed the task’s state by whom and when.

User-Assigned versus System-Assigned States

Some states can only be assigned by users while others are only assigned when an event occurs to the associated content. For example, when content is first submitted for approval, the associated task’s state changes to Not Started.

I

MPORTANT

!

The administrator user can always change a task’s state to any other state.

The following graphic illustrates the sequence of user and system actions that change a task’s state.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 309

Managing Tasks

Progression of Task States

State

Not Started

Active

Awaiting

Data

On Hold

Description

Assigned when task is created.

The task’s content is checked out.

The task is started but the assigned-to user is awaiting data from an external source. You can use comments to indicate the data being waited for.

User

Task cannot be worked on at this time.

User

Assigned by

User

System

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 310

Managing Tasks

State

Pending

Reopened

Completed

Archived

Deleted

Description Assigned by

The content is submitted for approval.

A task remains pending while its content is in the approval process. When the last person in the approval chain approves the content, the task’s state changes to Completed.

If any approver declines the content, the task’s state changes to Reopened.

If an editor edits the content and then checks it back in, the task’s state changes to Reopened.

Content is declined by an approver in the approval process. Also, if someone edits content whose task state is pending, the tasks’s state changes to

Reopened.

The last user in the approval chain approves the content and it is being published.

System

System

System

After a task is completed, administrators can assign this state. It no longer appears on open task lists but is kept for reviews and reports.

Only the administrator can view Archived tasks.

See Also:

”Archiving a Task” on page 316

User

When an archived task is no longer needed for reporting or reviewing, administrators can assign this state. While in this state, the task remains in the database. See Also:

”Deleting a Task” on page 318

When you purge the task, it and all of its transactions

are removed from the database. See Also: ”Purging a

Task” on page 318

User (user with delete permission can delete; only admin and user with

Task-Delete role can purge)

Restrictions on the Task Flow Process

Only users with archive and delete permissions can set a task’s status to archived or deleted. This can be done at any stage of the task flow process.

Notes can be entered for the task at any time.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 311

Managing Tasks

An administrator can assign a task to any state at any time.

Task View Options

Beneath the main task module folder, 14 view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories. The categories appear in

”The Tasks Folder” on page 291 .

After viewing tasks in any category, most screens let you perform an action on the tasks (the actions are included in the table below).

For example, you can redirect your tasks to another user. To select all tasks on a screen, click the check box in the header row

(illustrated below).

Folder

Tasks

Displays these tasks

Open tasks assigned to yourself, and open tasks you have assigned to other users.

Action you can perform from view screen

Create a new task

Delete a task

View a task

Sort tasks by column

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 312

Folder

All Open Tasks

Assigned To Me

Assigned By Me

Created by Me

Assigned to User

Not Started

Managing Tasks

Displays these tasks

All open tasks (that is, tasks in one of these states) for all users

not started

active

awaiting data

on hold

reopened

pending

All open tasks assigned to you

Action you can perform from view screen

Edit a task

Sort tasks by column

Assign tasks to a different user

View a task

Sort tasks by column

All open tasks you assigned to yourself or others

Assign tasks to a different user

View a task

Sort tasks by column

All open tasks you created

View a task

Sort tasks by column

All open tasks assigned to a user you select

Select any user and view all tasks assigned to that user.

To do so, select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get

Tasks.

View a task

Sort tasks by column

All whose state is Not Started

See Also:

”Task States” on page 309

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 313

Folder

Active

Awaiting Data

On Hold

Pending

Reopened

Completed

Archived

Deleted

Displays these tasks

All whose state is Active

All whose state is Awaiting Data

All whose state is On Hold

All whose state is Pending

All whose state is Reopened

All whose state is Completed

All whose state is Archived

All whose state is Deleted

Managing Tasks

Action you can perform from view screen

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

View a task

Sort tasks by column

Change to any other state

Purge tasks

View a task

Sort tasks by column

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 314

Managing Tasks

Determining Which Tasks a User Can View

To provide security,

Ektron CMS400.NET

restricts which users can use the task views. These restrictions are listed on the following table.

View option

All Open *

Assigned by

Me

Administrator group member

User or group to whom task assigned

X

X

X

Assigned to

Me *

Created by

Me *

Assigned to

User

Not Started

X

all tasks in specified state

X

|

|

only tasks assigned to user in specified state

|

|

Active

Awaiting data

On hold

Pending

Reopened

Completed

|

|

|

|

|

V

|

|

User who assigned task

X

X

User who created task

All users

X

X X

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 315

View option

Archived

Deleted

Managing Tasks

Administrator group member

User or group to whom task assigned

|

V

User who assigned task

User who created task

All users

* - user can only view open tasks, that is, not started, active, awaiting data, on hold, pending, or reopened

Email Notification

email notification is sent on these occasions.

A task is assigned to a user.

A task is redirected to a user.

A task is submitted for content approval. Sent to the first user in the approval chain.

The approval process moves on to the next approver.

The content is declined at an approval stage. This is sent to the assigned user.

The content is published. This goes to the creator, assigned user, and the approvers.

“Configuring E-Mail Notifications” in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Setup

Manual

Archiving a Task

After a task is completed, you may want to change its state to

Archived. Archiving moves selected tasks from the Completed tasks list to the archived list. This change cleans up the completed tasks list and makes it and easier to use.

Archived tasks are typically kept for a predetermined time period, at which point an administrator deletes them (depending on your organization’s policies).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 316

Managing Tasks

To archive a task, follow these steps.

1. From the Smart Desktop, open the Tasks folder.

2. Click the view option corresponding to the state of tasks you want to archive. Typically, you would archive completed tasks.

3. A list of Completed tasks appears. Select tasks one at a time, or click the check box on the top left corner to select all.

4. Next to the Change to State field, click the down arrow to display the drop down list and select Archived.

5. Click the Set button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 317

Managing Tasks

Deleting a Task

You can easily delete tasks no longer needed on the Web site.

Although an administrator can change a task’s state to deleted at any time, you typically do so after it is completed or archived, depending on your organization’s policies.

Note that a deleted task remains in the system until you purge it. It is only visible on the View Deleted Tasks option. See Also:

”Deleted” on page 311 .

Tasks can be deleted either one at a time, or several at once.

To delete tasks, follow these steps.

1. From the Smart Desktop, click the Tasks folder.

2. Click the view option corresponding to the state of tasks you want to delete. Typically, you would delete archived tasks.

3. Select tasks one at a time, or click the check box on the top left corner to select all.

4. Next to the Change to State field, click the down arrow to display the drop down list and select Deleted.

5. Click the Set button.

Purging a Task

If you want to remove deleted tasks from the system, you purge them. Upon purging, a task and its history are removed from the database.

To purge one or more tasks, follow these steps.

1. From the Smart Desktop, click the Tasks folder.

2. Click the Deleted view option.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 318

Managing Tasks

3. Select tasks one at a time, or click the check box on the top left corner to select all.

4. Click the Purge button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 319

Searching Web Site Content

S e a r c h i n g We b S i t e C o n t e n t

N

OTE

This section explains how to use the search function on a browser page. For information about inserting the search function into an Ektron CMS400.NET Web template, refer to the Ektron CMS400.NET Developer Manual.

N

OTE

This section describes the search on your Web site. To learn about searching content within your Workarea, see

”Search Content Folder” on page 60 .

Ektron CMS400.NET has a search function that can be easily integrated into any Ektron CMS400.NET template. The search command looks through your Web site content, then displays links to the content found by the search.

I

MPORTANT

!

Each content item includes a Content Searchable field. The search only considers content for which the field is checked. See illustration below.

By default, this field is checked for content items.

When you insert the search function onto a template, it looks something like this on the Web site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 320

Searching Web Site Content

The above is only an example of the search screen. Your Web developer can customize it using the Search Server Control. For more information, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual section “Standard ASP.NET Methods” > “Standard Methods” >

“Search Server Control.”

When performing a search, the user enters one or more words into the text box, selects search preferences, then clicks the Search button.

Site visitors can use an asterisk as a wildcard character, in other words, to stand for any character. For example, the phrase

CMS*00 will return topics that include the following text: CMS400,

CMS300, CMS200 and CMS100.

Your system administrator can add custom search fields that only

appear if a user is logged in. For more information, see ”Metadata” on page 87

.

N

OTE

To help track words and phrases site visitors are entering on the search screen, the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all phrases searched within a date range. In

Ektron CMS400.NET

, this report is available from the Smart

Desktop > Reports. Documentation for this report is available in the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Content Workflow Reports” > “Search

Phrase Report”.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 321

Searching Web Site Content

Search Options

Before you select the search preferences, you should understand the difference among them. The explanations below assume you entered these words into the search text field.

partners

content

Monday

employee

green

All the Words

All the Words works like an “and” function. The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday

and employee and green.

Any of the Words

Any of the Words is almost the opposite of All of the Words. It works like an “or” function.

When you select this option, the search returns all content that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field. In other words, it returns content with the word partners or content or

Monday or employee or green.

Exact Phrase

Exact Phrase returns content that has all five words in the order specified in the search text field.

A better example would be to search for a phrase, such as Content

Management Solution. The search yields only content with that phrase.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 322

Searching Web Site Content

Match Partial Words

Although you cannot search for wild cards, the Match Partial

Words option does almost the same. For example, enter at into the search text field, then check off the Match Partial Words box. The search returns all content with the letters “at”. This search finds words such as At, Bat, Chatter, Atoll, ATM, etc.

Limitations of the Search

The search cannot find text within Open Office Documents

The search cannot find Discussion Forum posts; Discussion

Forums have their own search feature

The search cannot find calendar events

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 323

Discussion Boards

D i s c u s s i o n B o a r d s

Overview

The Discussion Board feature provides a forum where topics can be discussed on your Web site. An administrator creates a topic and posts a starter question. Any site visitor can then reply. An example of a Discussion Board is below.

As you can see, the first screen has general topics, the second screen’s topics are more specific, and a third screen displays posts to the forum.

As an administrator, you can determine the following Discussion

Board features.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 324

Discussion Boards

The subjects being discussed

A starter post, designed to initiate the discussion of a topic

If users must sign in before posting to the forum

If a post appears as soon as someone submits it, or must be approved first

-

If a post requires approval, you can edit or delete it before it appears

Whether or not posts must be approved, anyone with permission to the board can perform the following tasks on a post from the

Workarea

edit

delete

reply

This section explains Discussion Boards through the following topics.

”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325

”Implementing Discussion Boards” on page 329

”Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board” on page 347

”Inserting the Forum Server Control” on page 353

”Using Discussion Boards on Your Web Site” on page 353

Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements

A Discussion Board consists of a five-level hierarchy, illustrated below. Before creating a Discussion Board, it is important to understand the elements of the hierarchy.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 325

Discussion Boards

Ektron CMS400.NET

supports an unlimited number of Discussion

Boards. Each board must follow the hierarchy.

Below is the hierarchy with sample data, to explain how each element is used.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 326

Discussion Boards

Within the Workarea, Discussion Boards appear as top-level folders in the folder structure. Forums appears under them. Both folders use the people icon ( ) to distinguish them from content and blog folders.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 327

Discussion Boards

If you click a Discussion Board, you see its Categories and Forums on the right side of the Workarea, as shown below.

If you click a Discussion Forum, you see its topics. If you click a topic, you see its posts, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 328

Discussion Boards

Implementing Discussion Boards

To implement a Discussion Board into your Web site, place a

Forum server control on a Web page. While doing this, you select a

Discussion Board.

All Categories and Forums within that board appear on the Web page. You cannot selectively suppress Categories or Forums.

Keep this in mind when determining the contents of a Discussion

Board.

This is more fully explained through the following topics.

”Working with Discussion Boards and Categories” on page 330

”Working with Forums” on page 335

”Working with Topics” on page 338

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 329

Discussion Boards

”Working with Posts” on page 343

”Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board” on page 347

Working with Discussion Boards and Categories

Creating a Discussion Board

1. To create a Discussion Board, follow these steps. (From the

Workarea’s Content tab, go to the folder in which you want to place the Discussion Board.

2. Click New > Discussion Board.

3. The Add a Discussion Board to folder screen appears.

Field

Board Name

Board Title

Complete the screen using the following table.

Description

Enter the name of the Discussion Board. This text describes the board within the Workarea. It does not appear on your Web site.

Enter the title of the board.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 330

Discussion Boards

Field

Require Authentication

CSS Theme

Description

Effect of this Field on the Web Site

Check this box if someone must sign in before he can post to the

Discussion Board. If the user cannot access a login screen, he cannot post.

If this box is unchecked, site visitors are not required to sign in before posting.

Effect of this Field within the Workarea

If this field is checked, only users with Add Topic or Edit Topic permissions for the Discussion Board can create or reply to posts.

See Also:

”Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board” on page 347

Choose a style sheet to determine the appearance of the Discussion

Board on your Web site. Select any theme available in the CSS

Theme dropdown.

Note: Below the CSS Theme field is the path to the selected style sheet relative to your Web root. You can use this information to identify and update the style sheet’s elements if desired.

Quick Deploy:

Replicate Folder

Contents

Determines whether content in this folder is updated when Quick

Deploy is run.

See Also:

”Quick Deploy” on page 207

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 331

Discussion Boards

Field

Categories (separate tab)

Description

Enter as many Categories as you wish. Each Category contains one or more Discussion Forums.

You must create at least one Category for each Discussion Board.

For more information about how Categories fit into the Discussion

Board hierarchy, see ”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325

.

Note: You can also add a Category by selecting a Discussion Board then selecting New > Categories.

Category Sort Order

Categories are the highest level of the hierarchy that appears on your Web site. In the sample Forum below, Latest Discoveries and

Patient Care are Categories.

Categories appear in alphabetical order unless you use the Sort

Order field. The Sort Order field accepts a number and uses it to arrange the Categories of a Discussion Board on the Web site. The lowest numbers appear near the top of the page.

To access the Sort Order field, follow these steps.

1.

Save the Discussion Board.

2.

Click the Discussion Board in the Workarea.

3.

Click View > Properties.

4.

Click the Categories tab.

5.

Modify the number in the Sort Order field as needed.

6. Click Save ( ).

Viewing a Discussion Board

To view a Discussion Board, select it from the Folders display.

When viewing the Board, you see all of its forums. You can click any forum to see details about it.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 332

Discussion Boards

See Also:

”Implementing Discussion Boards” on page 329 ;

”Discussion Boards” on page 324

Editing a Discussion Board

When editing a Discussion Board, you can change all information entered when it was created plus its style sheet.

To edit a Discussion Board, follow these steps.

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. Form the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board.

3. Click View > Properties.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. Update the screen as needed. Most fields are described in

”Complete the screen using the following table.” on page 330 .

6. Click Save ( ).

Deleting a Discussion Board

You can delete any Discussion Board. When you do, its

Categories, Forums, and posts are also deleted. Once deleted, they cannot be retrieved.

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. From the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board.

3. Click Delete > This folder.

4. A message appears asking you to confirm.

5. Press OK If you are sure.

Editing Category Name and Sort Order

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 333

Discussion Boards

You can change any Category’s name or sort order. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. From the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board that contains the Categories.

3. Click View > Properties.

4. Click the Categories tab.

5. Click the Category that you want to edit.

6. The current Category name and sort order appear on a new screen. Edit as needed. See Also: ”Category Sort Order” on page 332 .

7. Click Save ( ).

Creating a New Category

Use this procedure when you want to add a new Category to a

Discussion Board.

N

OTE

For more information about how Categories fit into the Discussion Board hierarchy, see

”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325 .

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. From the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board to which you want to add a Category.

3. Click New > Category.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 334

Discussion Boards

4. Enter a Category name and sort order. See Also: ”Category

Sort Order” on page 332

5. Click Save ( ).

Working with Forums

A Forum is a particular thread within a Discussion Board. To learn about how Forums fit into the Discussion Board hierarchy, see

”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325

.

For each Forum, you define the following:

name and Description

whether posts to it must be approved before appearing on your

Web site

if it’s accepting new postings

its sort order, which determines its sequence on the Web page within its Category

its Category

Creating a Forum

You can only create a Forum after a Discussion Board and at least one Category have been created.

1. In the Workarea, click Content then select a Discussion Board.

2. Click New > Discussion Forum.

3. The Add a Discussion Forum to Board screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 335

Discussion Boards

Field

Name

Complete the screen using the following table.

Description

Enter the name of the discussion Forum.

The name identifies this Forum next to a purple folder in the left frame of the Workarea. It also appears on the Web site (see example below).

Description

Moderate Comments

Enter a more detailed description of the Forum.

The description appears on the Web site, as illustrated above.

Check this box if you want comments to be approved before being posted to the Web site.

Only users who are granted Moderate permission can approve comments, thereby allowing them to be published on the site. See

Also:

”Discussion Board Permissions” on page 349

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 336

Field

Lock Forum

Sort Order

Category

Discussion Boards

Description

Check this box if you want to prevent all posting to this Forum. You can do this temporarily or permanently.

If a Forum is locked, only members of the Administrators user group can post to it, or edit or delete posts. Those users can post from the

Web site or the Workarea.

Enter a number if you want to arrange the sequence of Forums within the Category.

If you do not, Forums appear in alphabetical order within a Category.

Enter the Category within which this Forum will appear on the Web site. To learn more about the relationship of Categories to Forums,

see ”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325 .

4. Click Save ( ).

Editing a Forum

Follow these steps if you want to change any information about a

Forum.

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. From the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board that contains the Forum

3. Click the Forum.

4. Click View > Properties.

5. Click the Edit button ( ).

6. Update the screen as needed. The fields are described in

”Complete the screen using the following table.” on page 336 .

7. Click Save ( ).

Deleting a Forum

You can delete any Forum. When you do, its topics and posts are also deleted. Once deleted, they cannot be retrieved.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 337

Discussion Boards

To delete a Forum, follow these steps.

1. Click the Workarea’s Content tab.

2. From the folder structure in the left frame, click the Discussion

Board that contains the Forum

3. Click the Forum.

4. Click the Delete Forum button ( ).

5. A message appears asking you to confirm.

6. Press OK if you are sure.

Working with Topics

Topics are specific issues to be discussed in a Forum. For example, in a medical research Forum, a topic might be New

Cancer Treatments. Topics can only be started within the

Workarea.

Before creating a topic, you must create a Forum into which to place it. To learn more about how Topics fit into the Discussion

Board hierarchy, see

”Hierarchy of Discussion Board Elements” on page 325 .

Adding a Topic to a Forum

To create a Topic, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. Click the New Topic button ( ).

3. The Post New Topic screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 338

Discussion Boards

Field

Subject

Complete the screen using the following table.

Description

Enter a short description of the topic. The Topic Subject appear on the Forum page, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 339

Field

Message

Discussion Boards

Description

Enter the entire text of the topic.

The Topic Message appears on a new Web page after a Web site visitor clicks a Topic’s Subject line.

4. Click Save ( ).

Viewing a Topic

N

OTE

To learn about viewing a topic from your Web site, see

”Using Discussion Boards on Your Web Site” on page 353 .

To view a topic from the Workarea, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that you want to view.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 340

Discussion Boards

The main body of the Topic screen displays each post within the topic. If the post is surrounded by a yellow border (as illustrated below), it must be approved before it appears on the Web site.

Only users with Moderate permission can approve a post. See

Also:

”Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board” on page 347

The following options may appear across the top of the screen, depending on your permissions.

For more information, see Button Description

Post a new reply to the topic

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 341

Button Description

Delete topic and all of its posts

View and edit the topic’s title

Return to previous screen

Discussion Boards

For more information, see

”Deleting a Topic” on page 343

”Editing a Topic’s Title” on page 342

Under each post is a set of options that you may be able to perform on any post, depending on your permissions and the status of the post. If the option is underlined, you have authority to perform it. if not, you cannot.

For example, if a post’s status is approved, the approve option is not underlined, because it is already approved.

See Also:

”Approving a Post” on page 344

”Adding a Reply to a Post” on page 343

”Editing a Post” on page 345

”Deleting a Post” on page 345

Editing a Topic’s Title

The only part of topic you can edit is its title.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that you want to edit.

3. Click the View Properties button ( ).

4. The Edit Topic screen appears. Modify the title as needed.

5. Click Save ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 342

Discussion Boards

Deleting a Topic

You can delete any Topic. When you do, its posts are also deleted.

Once deleted, they cannot be retrieved.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab, select a Discussion

Board, then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that you want to delete.

3. The View Topic screen appears.

4. Click the Delete Topic button ( ).

5. A confirmation message appears.

6. Click OK if you are sure you want to delete it.

Working with Posts

Adding a Reply to a Post

N

OTE

You can also reply to a post from the Web site. See ”Posting a Reply” on page 353

.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that has the post that you want to reply to.

3. The next screen, View Topic, displays all posts to the selected topic.

4. Find the post that you want to reply to by reading its text

(illustrated below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 343

Discussion Boards

5. Click reply.

6. Enter a Title for the post.

7. In the Description field, enter the text of your post.

Approving a Post

When defining a Forum, you can check the Moderate Comments field. If you do, posts to the Forum must be approved before they appear on the Web site. Only users who are assigned the

Moderate permission are allowed to approve a post. See Also:

”Discussion Board Permissions” on page 349

To approve a post, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that has the post that you want to reply to. (Unapproved posts have a red flag in the left column, as illustrated below.)

3. The next screen, View Topic, displays all posts to the selected topic.

4. Find the post you want to reply to. Unapproved posts have a yellow border (Illustrated below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 344

Discussion Boards

5. Click approve under the post icon.

Editing a Post

You can edit the text of a post but you cannot edit its title.

N

OTE

You can also edit a post from the Web site. See

”Using Discussion Boards on

Your Web Site” on page 353 .

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that has the post that you want to edit.

3. The next screen, View Topic, displays all posts to the selected topic.

4. Find the post that you want to edit.

5. Click edit under the post icon.

6. The Edit Reply screen appears. Within the editor, update the text as needed.

7. Click Save ( ).

Deleting a Post

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 345

Discussion Boards

1. In the Workarea, click the Content tab then select a Forum from the folder structure.

2. The Forum’s topics appear in the right frame. Click the one that has the post you want to delete.

3. The next screen, View Topic, displays all posts to the selected topic.

4. Find the post that you want to delete.

5. Click delete under the post icon.

Searching a Forum’s Posts

The Forum server control includes a search feature that lets site visitors searches through all posts on your site. Any user can access the search from the Forum screen (see below).

When a site visitor clicks Search, he can search the current forum

(the default value), select a different forum, or search all forums.

N

OTE

Forums posts cannot be found by the Workarea or Web site search.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 346

Discussion Boards

Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board

Like regular content folders, Discussion Boards have a permission table that lets you determine which users can perform which functions. (To learn more about folder permissions, see

”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

.) Because Discussion Boards have different functions than folders, their permission table is slightly different.

To access a Discussion Board’s permission table, navigate to and click on the board so it appears in the Workarea. Then, click View

> Permissions.

N

OTE

Only Administrators group members can access the Discussion Board

Permission Table.

Below is an example of a Discussion Board permission table for regular users. Membership users have fewer permissions. See

Also:

”Discussion Board Permissions” on page 349

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 347

Discussion Boards

Discussion Board permissions are more fully explained through the following topics.

”Initialization of Permission Values” on page 348

”Discussion Board Permissions” on page 349

”Discussion Forum Permissions for Membership Users” on page 350

”Granting Discussion Board Permissions to Users and User

Groups” on page 351

”Removing Discussion Board Permissions from Users and

User Groups” on page 352

”Editing Discussion Board Permissions for Users and User

Groups” on page 352

Initialization of Permission Values

When you create a Discussion Board,

Ektron CMS400.NET

seeds its permission table with values from the parent folder, as described in the following table.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 348

Discussion Boards

Parent Folder Permission

Read only

Edit

Add

Delete

Add Folders

Edit Folders

Delete Folders

Discussion Board Permission

Read only

Edit Topic

Add Topic

Delete Topic

Add Forum

Edit Forum

Delete Forum

N

OTE

Because there are no corresponding permissions for the Discussion Board’s

Moderate and Post/reply permissions, their initial value is blank.

So for example, if the user JSmith has permission to perform all functions for a folder, and a Discussion Board is created in that folder, JSmith initially receives all permissions listed above for the

Discussion Board. However, you can edit the permissions as needed.

As soon as you create a Discussion Board, it is disconnected from the parent folder’s permission table. Subsequent changes to the parent’s permissions have no effect on Discussion Board permissions.

Discussion Board Permissions

The following table lists all permissions that may be granted to regular users. Note that only some can be granted to membership users (that is, site visitors who register to participate in the forum).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 349

Discussion Boards

Permission

Read only

Edit Topic

Add Topic

Delete Topic

Post/Reply

Moderate

Add Forum

Edit Forum

Delete Forum

Give the user ability to

View forums and posts; cannot submit a post

Edit a topic’s title No

Can be assigned to membership users

For more information, see

Yes

Add new topics

Delete a topic

Post a new topic or reply to an existing one, either from the

Workarea or the site

Yes

No

Yes

”Editing a Topic’s Title” on page 342

”Adding a Topic to a

Forum” on page 338

”Deleting a Topic” on page 343

”Adding a Topic to a

Forum” on page 338 ;

”Adding a Reply to a

Post” on page 343

”Moderate Comments” on page 336

Approve posts; only applicable if the Forum’s Properties field

Moderate Comments is checked

No

Create a new forum No

Edit a forum

Delete a forum

No

No

”Creating a Forum” on page 335

”Editing a Forum” on page 337

”Deleting a Forum” on page 337

Discussion Forum Permissions for Membership Users

By default, membership users are assigned the following permissions:

Read only

Add Topic

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 350

Discussion Boards

Post Reply

They cannot be granted Edit, Delete or Moderate topic nor advanced permissions (Add, Edit or Delete forum).

To change the default permissions, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to and click on the Discussion Board so it appears in the Workarea.

2. Click View > Permissions.

3. Click View Membership Users.

4. The View Permissions for Board screen appears. From here, you can add new member users and groups, remove them, or change their permissions.

Granting Discussion Board Permissions to Users and User

Groups

To give a user or user group permissions to work with a Discussion

Board, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to and click on the Discussion Board so it appears in the Workarea.

2. Click View > Permissions.

3. Click the Add button ( ).

4. All users and groups who are not currently assigned permissions appear. Click any user or group.

5. The Add Permission for Folder screen appears with the selected user or group.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 351

Discussion Boards

6. Assign appropriate standard and advanced permissions then click the Save button (

). See Also: ”Assigning Permissions to a Discussion Board” on page 347

Removing Discussion Board Permissions from Users and

User Groups

To remove a user or user group from the Discussion Board permission table, follow these steps. After you remove the user,

Discussion Boards do not appear within his Workarea.

1. Navigate to and click the Discussion Board so it appears in the

Workarea.

2. Click View > Permissions.

3. Click the Delete icon ( ).

4. Select the user or group that you want to remove from the

Permission table.

5. A confirmation message. Click OK.

6. The user is removed.

Editing Discussion Board Permissions for Users and User

Groups

To edit a user or user group’s Discussion Board permissions, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to and click the Discussion Board so it appears in the

Workarea.

2. Click View > Permissions.

3. Click the user or group whose permissions you want to edit.

4. The Edit Permissions screen appears.

5. Change the settings as appropriate. See Also: ”Discussion

Board Permissions” on page 349

6. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 352

Discussion Boards

Inserting the Forum Server Control

After creating at least one hierarchy of Discussion Board elements, place a Forum server control on a Web page. That procedure is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s Manual section

“Introduction to Ektron CMS400.NET Server Controls” > “Forum

Server Control.”

If you want require authentication by site visitors, the template that hosts the Forum should also contain

a Membership server control (or a link to page that has one).

This lets site visitors/membership users register for Discussion

Boards.

a Login server control that lets the site visitor/membership user log in

N

OTE

Ektron recommends adding text below the Login server control to remind the site visitor to enter his email address at the User field. For example, “At the User field, enter your email address.”

Using Discussion Boards on Your Web Site

Posting a Reply

1. Go to the Web page that hosts the Discussion Board.

2. Click the Forum of interest.

3. Click Post Reply.

There are two editors that site visitors can use when replying:

eWebEditPro (scaled-down version)

eWebWP

For users who sign in before posting, this decision is made for the user at the Forum Editor field on the Edit User screen.

If users does not sign in, ewebWP is the editor.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 353

Discussion Boards

Editing a Post

1. Go to the Web page that hosts the Discussion Board.

2. Click the Forum of interest.

3. Find the topic you want to edit.

4. Click Edit.

Deleting a Post

1. Go to the Web page that hosts the Discussion Board.

2. Click the Forum of interest.

3. Find the topic you want to delete.

4. Click Delete.

Suppressing User Information from the Forum Profile Display

When a Discussion Forum appears on your Web site, anyone browsing to the forum can view information about contributors to the forum. To do this, they click on the user name, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 354

Discussion Boards

How Users Suppress Profile Information

Users can adjust this setting for themselves by modifying the

Private Profile checkbox on the Forum Registration screen

(shown below). If the box is checked, profile information is suppressed.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 355

Discussion Boards

N

OTE

The Forum Registration screen appears wherever your developer inserts the

Membership Server Control. For more information, see the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

Developers Manual.

How Administrators Suppress Profile Information

If you want to suppress the display of user names as an administrator, follow these steps.

1. If the user is a regular user, go to Settings > Users and select the user whose information you want to suppress.

If the user is a membership user, go to Modules >

Memberships > Users and select the user whose information you want to suppress.

2. In the User Properties area of the screen, check the Private

Profile checkbox.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 356

E k t r o n E x p l o r e r

The

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Using Ektron

Explorer” provides the following information:

general description

installation instructions

how to view it

Since that information is not repeated here, you should read that before reading this section.

This section has the following topics:

”Access to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 357

”Configuring Ektron Explorer” on page 357

”Viewing Administrative Information” on page 365

Access to Ektron CMS400.NET

By default, when someone signs on to Ektron Explorer, the sign-in uses a special membership user, EkExplorerUser. This user has read-only access to every folder, so he can view all published content, both public and private, but not edit content.

To allow a user to work with content as allowed in the

Permission table, change his configuration so that the sign-on

uses his username and password. See Also: ”Configuring

Ektron Explorer” on page 357

Configuring Ektron Explorer

When the Ektron Explorer is installed to a client PC, it assumes the following information:

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 357

Ektron Explorer

location of

Ektron CMS400.NET

- specified during installation

username and password - a default user is created in

Ektron

CMS400.NET

for the purpose of viewing CMS content. That user cannot edit the content.

You can change these values using the Explorer’s Configuration

Manager (illustrated below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 358

Ektron Explorer

If you change the CMS Username and CMS password in an existing or new configuration, users who sign on under that

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 359

Ektron Explorer

configuration are granted the editing privileges assigned in the

Permission table. See Also: ”Setting Permissions” on page 25

For example, a user whose user name and password you enter has permission to edit all content in

Ektron CMS400.NET

. To edit the content, the user browses to it, right clicks the mouse and selects Edit from the popup menu. The content is surrounded by a colored border that indicates if it is eligible for editing. For more

information, see ”Recognizing Content” on page 14

.

N

OTE

To learn how to access

Ektron CMS400.NET

content from the Ektron Explorer, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Using Ektron Explorer.”

Accessing the Configuration Manager

Click the Windows Start button then follow this path:

Programs > Ektron > Ektron Explorer > Configuration

Manager

When Explorer is open, you can access Configuration Manager by placing the cursor in the left frame and right clicking the mouse.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 360

Ektron Explorer

Configuration Manager Options

The Explorer Configuration Manager provides four buttons, described below.

Button

Use

Edit

Description

Lets you determine, via the Existing Configurations dropdown list, which CMS to explore. See Also:

”Switching Between Configurations” on page 364

For any configuration, change the name, location or

authentication information. See Also: ”Editing a

Configuration” on page 362

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 361

Ektron Explorer

Button

Delete

Create New

Description

Remove a configuration. See Also:

”Deleting a

Configuration” on page 365

Create a new configuration. See Also:

”Creating a New

Configuration” on page 363

Editing a Configuration

To edit an existing configuration, follow these steps.

1. Access the Configuration Manager as described in

”Accessing the Configuration Manager” on page 360

.

2. Click the Edit button.

3. The Edit Existing Configuration screen appears. Use the following table to guide you through each field.

Fields on the Edit Existing Configuration Screen

Field

Configuration name

CMS Location

Description

Update the configuration name. You use this name to identify which configuration to log into.

Enter the full path to the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

version that you will access via this configuration. For example, http://bills_computer/cms400demo

The default location is the local PC: http://localhost/cms400demo

You can also use a static IP address followed by your

Web site root folder. For example: http://192.168.25.874/cms400demo

Authentication

CMS Active

Directory Enabled

If your site is using Active Directory for sign in, check this box. If you do, the Domain field (below) becomes active, so that you can enter the Domain as part of the login information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 362

Ektron Explorer

Field

default (Read

Only Access)

CMS Login

CMS Password

Domain

Test Connection

Description

Check this checkbox if, when accessing Ektron Explorer via this configuration, you want to submit the default user name and password. In this case, the user can view all CMS content but not edit.

If you want to edit CMS content, change the CMS login name and password to a user with editing privileges.

(Only available if default is not checked.)

Enter your CMS username, as entered in the CMS Add/

Edit User screen. See Also: ”Creating a New User” on page 432

Within Ektron Explorer, you will have the same privileges for working with content that you have in

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

. See Also: ”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

(Only available if default is not checked.)

Enter your CMS password, as entered in the CMS Add/

Edit User screen. See Also: ”Creating a New User” on page 432

Within Ektron Explorer, you will have the same privileges for working with content that you have in

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

. See Also: ”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

(Only available if CMS Active Directory Enabled is checked.) Enter the user’s Active Directory domain.

Use this button to run a quick test of the configuration information. The test results indicate if the connection is successful.

If it is not, an error message appears to help you diagnose the problem.

4. Click Update Configuration.

Creating a New Configuration

You might want to create a new configuration to

sign in to a different instance of

Ektron CMS400.NET

(for example, one on a different computer)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 363

Ektron Explorer

sign in as a different user

To create a new configuration, follow these steps.

1. Access the Configuration Manager, as described in ”Accessing the Configuration Manager” on page 360

.

2. Click Create New.

3. Complete the fields on the screen. See ”Fields on the Edit

Existing Configuration Screen” on page 362

.

4. Press the Test Connection button. When you do, the CMS location, username, and password are tested for validity.

5. Click the Add New button.

Switching Between Configurations

If you have two or more configurations and want to sign off one and sign on to the other, follow these steps.

1. Click the small X on the top right corner of the Ektron Explorer frame (illustrated below).

2. The Ektron Explorer closes.

3. Access the Configuration Manager, as described in ”Accessing the Configuration Manager” on page 360

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 364

Ektron Explorer

4. Pull down the Existing Configurations drop down list and select the configuration that you want to use.

5. Click the Use button.

6. Sign back on to Ektron Explorer.

Deleting a Configuration

1. Access the Configuration Manager, as described in ”Accessing the Configuration Manager” on page 360

.

2. Pull down the Existing Configurations drop down list and select the configuration that you want to delete.

3. Click the Delete button.

Viewing Administrative Information

The Explorer Properties screens provide information to help system administrators evaluate and troubleshoot problems related to Ektron Explorer. To access it, place the cursor in the left panel but do not select a folder. Then, right click the mouse and select

Properties.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 365

Ektron Explorer

The following table explains the information provided on both tabs of the Ektron Explorer Properties screen.

Tab

General

Field

Version

Config

Location

Diagnostic

username

Server name

Description

The version of Ektron Explorer installed on the client.

The name of the configuration being used. See

Also:

”Configuring Ektron Explorer” on page 357

The path to the server that contains the CMS linked to Ektron Explorer.

The name of the user signed in to Ektron Explorer.

The server that contains the CMS linked to Ektron

Explorer.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 366

Tab Field

Local Address

Application Path

Client version

Server version

Configuration name

Configuration username

Configuration location

Web Services: HTTP Status

Dependencies: Ektbartb.dll,

EktAsset2.ocx

Ektron Explorer

Description

The client that contains Ektron Explorer.

The folder that contains the Web services and

Explorer folders.

The version of Ektron Explorer installed on the client.

The version of

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

installed on the server.

The name of the configuration being used. See

Also:

”Configuring Ektron Explorer” on page 357

The user signed in to Ektron Explorer using the configuration listed above.

The path to the server that contains the CMS linked to Ektron Explorer, as defined in the configuration listed above.

Ektron Explorer requires Web Services to be working. This field indicates the status of Ektron

Explorer’s Web Service.

Green - Web Service is working

Red - Web Service is not working

Ektron Explorer requires these two files on the client.

Green - the file resides on the client

Red - the file is missing

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 367

C a l e n d a r s

The Calendars feature allows you to create event calendars for your Web site. Once created, users may add calendar events that are posted to the calendar for visitors to see.

N

OTE

The User Manual section “Working with Calendars“ explains calendar concepts and procedures that end users need to know. This section does not repeat that information. So, you should be familiar with that information before reading this.

Also, the Ektron CMS400.NET Developer’s Manual provides instructions on using the Calendar server control/custom function.

This chapter explains

Ektron CMS400.NET

calendars through the following topics.

”Calendar Toolbar Buttons” on page 369

”Accessing the Workarea Using Calendars” on page 370

”Calendar Permissions” on page 370

”Adding a New Calendar” on page 371

”Editing a Calendar” on page 376

”Deleting a Calendar” on page 376

”Calendar Event Types” on page 376

”Displaying Calendars on Web Pages” on page 379

”Creating a Foreign Language Calendar” on page 380

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 368

Calendars

Calendar Toolbar Buttons

Within the Calendars feature, several buttons (described below) help you perform actions.

Button Name

Add

Calendar

Save

Lets you

Access Add Calendar screen

Save calendar or calendar event

More Information

”Adding a New Calendar” on page 371

Show

Calendar

Display calendar in Workarea

“Viewing a Calendar” in the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User

Manual chapter “Working with Calendars

Add, edit, and delete Event Types to and from a calendar

”Calendar Event Types” on page 376

Manage

Event

Types

Add

Calendar

Event

Access Add Calendar Event screen in the Workarea

“Adding a Calendar

Event” in the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User

Manual chapter “Working with Calendars”

Edit Edit calendar or event name

Delete Delete calendar or calendar event

Delete all recurring events

Delete all events in a recurring series

”Editing a Calendar” on page 376 ;

”Editing the

Event Type Name” on page 378

”Deleting a Calendar” on page 376

“Deleting All Events in a

Recurring Series” in the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User Manual chapter

“Working with Calendars”

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 369

Calendars

Button Name

Add

Calendar

Event

View Date

Lets you

Access the Add Calendar Event screen from calendar on Web page

View calendar events for selected day

Add Library Select a library Quicklink for an event.

More Information

“Adding a Calendar

Event” in the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User

Manual chapter “Working with Calendars”

“Viewing a Calendar

Event” in the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User

Manual chapter “Working with Calendars”

Hyperlink field description in the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

User

Manual chapter “Working with Calendars”

Accessing the Workarea Using Calendars

To access the Workarea after viewing a calendar, you cannot right click the mouse then choose Workarea from the context-sensitive menu as you can with content. Instead, after logging in, click either the Add Events or View Events icon (circled below) to access the

Workarea.

Calendar Permissions

Calendar permissions are derived from the content folder assigned to the calendar. This section explains the permissions you can set for a calendar.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 370

Calendars

Administrator Permissions

Members of the following groups have full control over all calendar features (as they do for content). Only these users can add, edit, or delete a calendar.

administrator user group

users and user groups defined on the Manage Members for

Role: Calendar-Admin screen. (For more information, see

”Defining Roles” on page 42

.)

Administrators may also add, edit, and delete calendar events.

User Permissions

Users who are not in one of the groups listed in

”Administrator

Permissions” on page 371 cannot add, edit, or delete calendars.

Non-administrator users can add, edit, or delete calendar events if they have add, edit, and delete permissions for the calendar’s content folder. See Also:

”Setting Permissions for a Content

Folder” on page 29

Adding a New Calendar

To add a new calendar, follow these steps.

See Also:

”Calendar Permissions” on page 370

1. Click Modules > Calendar.

2. Click the Add Calendar button ( ).

3. The Add or Edit Calendars screen appears. The following table explains each field on the screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 371

Section

Title

Description

Location Label

Calendars

Description

Enter a calendar title, which identifies the calendar in the

Workarea.

Enter a calendar description, which appears on the

Calendar Modules screen to help identify the calendar.

Specify the label text for the location field. The location appears with the detail of a calendar event.

Start Time Label

End Time Label

Display Weekends

Forward Only

Specify a label for the start time. A calendar event can display the start time.

Specify a label for the end time. A calendar event can display the end time.

Place a check in this box if you want the calendar to display

Saturdays and Sundays along with weekdays.

To display weekdays only, remove the check. See Also:

”Display Weekends” on page 375

To have the calendar display only events from the date when someone views the calendar forward (but no past events), place a check in the box next to

Show only events that fall after the viewing day

However, a logged-in user can view past calendar events.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 372

Section

Event Type Label

Calendars

Description

One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event.

Event Types Available

Event Types Required

Instructions

By default, this text is Event Type:. To change the default text, edit this field.

If you want to allow users to assign event types to events on this calendar, check this box.

If you want to require users to assign event types when adding events, check this box.

This checkbox can only be checked if Event Types

Available is checked.

If you allow users to filter a calendar view by event type, text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the selection box. By default, this text is Select

Event Type To View.

Show All label

If you want to change this text, edit this field.

If you allow users to filter a calendar view by event type, the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen. On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar. By default, this text is Show All.

If you want to change this text, edit this field.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 373

Section

Long Description

Calendars

Description

This field can allow the user to enter additional information about a calendar event.

Content Folder

Your choices are:

No Long Description - no additional description is allowed

Text Only - while adding an event, a user can enter text into a Long Description box. No formatting is allowed within this text.

This text appears in the Event View screen and in the

XML Packet. Because the text is not formatted, the

XSL creator is responsible for its display.

Rich Text Description - works the same as the Text

Only option (see above) except the user can format text using Ektron’s eWebEditPro editor.

Specify the calendar’s content folder. To understand how

folder assignment affects calendar use, see ”Calendar

Permissions” on page 370 .

4. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 374

Calendars

Display Weekends

To display seven day weeks (for example, Sunday to Saturday), as opposed to five day weeks (Monday to Friday), check this box.

Do Not Display Weekends

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 375

Calendars

Editing a Calendar

All calendar information, with the exception of the ID, can be edited at any time. To edit a calendar, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to edit.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The Add or Edit Calendar screen is displayed.

4. Make the necessary changes to the calendar, using the table in

”Adding a New Calendar” on page 371 as a reference.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

Deleting a Calendar

You can delete calendars that are no longer needed.

N

OTE

Deleting a calendar deletes all events assigned to it.

To delete a calendar, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Calendar Screen for the calendar you want to delete.

2. Click the Delete button ( ).

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.

Calendar Event Types

Any calendar event can have one or more Event Types assigned to it. An event type might be a meeting, product demonstration, or deadline. When a user views a calendar, he can change the display to view only events that are relevant to him.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 376

Calendars

This section explains how to manage calendar Event Types through the following subtopics.

”Enabling Event Types” on page 377

”Viewing Event Types” on page 377

”Adding Event Types” on page 378

”Editing the Event Type Name” on page 378

”Deleting Event Types” on page 379

”Assigning an Event Type to an Event” on page 379

Enabling Event Types

To enable event types, edit the calendar and check off the Event

Types Available box. If desired, you can also check the Event

Types Required box. This forces the user to specify an event type

when adding a calendar event. See Also: ”Adding a New Calendar” on page 371

Once event types are enabled, the Manage Event Types button

( ) appears on the toolbar.

Viewing Event Types

To view available Event Types, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar whose event types you want to view.

2. Click Event Types button ( ).

N

OTE

If the Event Types button does not appear in the toolbar, you must make Event

Types available. See ”Enabling Event Types” on page 377 for more information.

3. The View Event Types for [Calendar Name] screen is displayed with a list of Event Types.

From this screen, you can add, edit, and delete Event Types.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 377

Calendars

Adding Event Types

1. Access the Event Types screen, as described in ”Viewing

Event Types” on page 377 .

2. Click the Add button ( ).

3. The Add or Edit an Event Type screen is displayed.

4. Type an Event Type name in the displayed field.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

After you add an Event Type to a calendar, it can be assigned to a calendar event by users. See

”Assigning an Event Type to an

Event” on page 379 for more information.

Editing the Event Type Name

To edit the name of an event type, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Event Types for [Calendar Name] for the calendar with the Event Type you want to edit, as described in

”Viewing Event Types” on page 377

.

2. Click the Event Types button ( ).

3. The View Event Types for [Calendar Name] window opens, listing all Event Types.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. The Edit an Event Type screen appears.

6. Click the radio button next to the Event Type you want to edit.

7. Click the Edit button ( ).

8. The Add or Edit an Event Type screen is displayed. Update the

Event Type name.

9. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 378

Calendars

Deleting Event Types

To delete an event type from a calendar, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Event Types for [Calendar Name] for the calendar with the Event Type you want to delete, as described

in ”Viewing Event Types” on page 377 .

2. Click the Event Types button ( ).

3. The View Event Types for [Calendar Name] window opens, listing all Event Types.

4. Click the Remove button ( ).

5. The Delete Event Types screen displays available Event

Types.

6. Check the box next to each Event Type you want to delete.

N

OTE

Click either Select All or Clear All to check off all or none of the Event Types.

7. Click the Delete button ( ) to delete the Event Type.

8. A confirmation message is displayed.

9. Click OK.

Assigning an Event Type to an Event

After Event Types are available, users can assign them to calendar events. This is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual chapter “Working with Calendars.”

After users assign Event Types to a calendar event, visitors can filter the calendar view by them.

Displaying Calendars on Web Pages

After a calendar is created, it can easily be inserted onto a Web page. For information about inserting calendars into your Web site, refer to the Ektron CMS400.NET Developers Reference Manual.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 379

Calendars

Creating a Foreign Language Calendar

As part of the comprehensive multi-language features of

Ektron

CMS400.NET

, calendars can be created in any supported language.

Exception Microsoft’s .NET platform supports most languages. If a language is not supported by .NET (for example, Welsh), an English calendar appears instead.

Once you enter the calendar and event information in the foreign language, the calendar display (that is, day and month names) automatically appears in that language. Also, regional conventions for first-last days of the week, and date and time formats are maintained. As an example, see the French calendar below.

Notice that the days and months are translated, and that the week begins on Monday instead of Sunday (as in American English).

And in the daily detail (below), note that date and time format follows French conventions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 380

Calendars

W

ARNING

!

In order to see foreign characters and accents, the client PC must have support enabled for that language in Windows. For more information, see http:// www.microsoft.com/globaldev/handson/user/2kintlsupp.mspx.

See Also:

”Using an Existing Calendar ID or Creating a New One” on page 381

Using an Existing Calendar ID or Creating a New One

When you create a calendar in a foreign language, you can either use an existing calendar ID or create a new one.

Type

Foreign language version of existing calendar ID

New calendar ID

Use when...

You want one Web page that displays a calendar in the language selected by the site visitor

The foreign calendar will be placed on its own Web page; there is no equivalent calendar in the default language

For more information, see

”Creating a Multi-lingual Calendar

Using the Same ID” on page 383

”Creating a Multilingual Calendar

Using a New ID” on page 384

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 381

Calendars

For example, the following is the English-language version of the sample calendar provided with the intranet. The URL of the following calendar is http://localhost/CMS400EXAMPLE/intranet/ calendar.aspx?menu_id=15& calendar_id=3 &TitleLabel=Company%20Calendar& LangType=1033

If you create a French version of that calendar, and a user navigates to the same page but views it in French, he sees the

French version of the calendar (below). Note that they are separate calendars with separate event listings -- they only share the ID number.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 382

The URL of the following calendar is http://localhost/CMS400EXAMPLE/intranet/ calendar.aspx?menu_id=15& calendar_id=3 &TitleLabel=Company%20Calendar& LangType=1036

Calendars

Creating a Multi-lingual Calendar Using the Same ID

To create a multi-lingual calendar using the same ID number but a different language, follow these steps.

1. Within the Workarea, select Modules > Calendars.

2. Select the calendar for which you want to create a version in another language.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 383

Calendars

3. When the View Calendar Screen appears, pull down the Add

In box and select the new language.

4. Complete the calendar information, as explained in ”Adding a

New Calendar” on page 371

.

Creating a Multilingual Calendar Using a New ID

To create a multi-lingual calendar using a unique ID number, follow these steps.

1. Within the Workarea, select Modules > Calendars.

2. From the Calendar Modules screen, click to open the View In dropdown box.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 384

Calendars

3. Select the language for the calendar.

4. The Calendar Modules screen reappears, showing only calendars in the selected language (if any exist).

Complete the calendar information, as explained in

”Adding a New

Calendar” on page 371 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 385

URL Aliasing

U R L A l i a s i n g

Aliasing is an

Ektron CMS400.NET

feature that lets you change the name of your Web site’s pages. By default,

Ektron CMS400.NET

Web pages have the following format:

See Also:

”Forming URLs For Ektron CMS400.NET Documents” on page 74

Sometimes, you want to change a page’s name. The Aliasing feature offers two ways to do this:

• Ektron CMS400.NET

can automatically change each page’s name to a format that search engines more easily recognize.

This is called Automatic Aliasing.

You can manually change the name of any page to whatever you wish. For example, you can change the name of your technical support page to http://www.YourEktronwebsite.com/ help.htm

from http://www.YourEktronwebsite.com/help.aspx?id=27

.

This is called Manual Aliasing.

N

OTE

When using Manual Aliasing, you cannot alias the root of your Web site (for example, www.yourEktronWebsite.com). You can, however, alias everything after that.

This chapter explains how to alias pages on your Web site through the following topics.

”Automatic vs. Manual URL Aliasing” on page 387

”Automatic URL Aliasing” on page 387

”Manual Aliasing” on page 390

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 386

URL Aliasing

Automatic vs. Manual URL Aliasing

Automatic URL Aliasing allows you to create a URL that does not have a URL parameter. This URL aliases the URL that contains parameters found in a regular Ektron CMS400.NET URL, such as

?id=43. With Automatic URL Aliasing, you can alias all content at once. For more information on Automatic URL Aliasing, see

”Automatic URL Aliasing” on page 387 .

Manual URL Aliasing lets you choose the URL and extension that you would like to use. With Manual URL Aliasing, you must assign an alias to each content item individually. You can also assign several aliases to any content item then pick one to be the primary alias. For more information on Manual URL Aliasing, see

”Manual

Aliasing” on page 390

.

Automatic URL Aliasing

People looking for information on your Web site typically use search engines (such as Google.com) to find pages with the desired content. On rare occasions, some older search engines work better without the URL parameters that make up an

Ektron

CMS400.NET

Web page name.

If this becomes a problem, use the Automatic URL Aliasing feature, which creates a page name that search engines easily recognize. The new name includes the template and the page's ID values.

When you use the Automatic URL Aliasing feature,

Ektron

CMS400.NET

makes the following changes.

A delimiter of ekt

indicates the start of each parameter

URL parameters follow each delimiter

Here is an example of aliasing content.

Original URL

/400Intranet/mycalendars.aspx?id=2

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 387

URL Aliasing

Aliased version

/400Intranet/mycalendars_ektid2.aspx

Enabling Automatic URL Aliasing

If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Settings >

Configuration, follow these steps to enable it.

N

OTE

Before editing your web.config file, you should close all open browsers. In some instances, you may need to do an IIS reset.

1. Open the web.config file, located in your Web site’s root folder.

2. Change the value of ek_RedirectorInstalled

to True.

3. Enable the httpHandlers element. To do so, uncomment the following tags by removing all dashes and the exclamation point (!):

< !-httpHandlers> </httpHandlers ->

The tags are separated by several lines that look like this:

<add verb="*" path="*.gif" type="URLRewrite.StaticFileHandler,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" />

4. Save web.config.

Activating/Deactivating the Aliasing Feature

To activate the automatic aliasing feature, follow this path to the

URL Aliasing Configuration screen: Settings > Configuration >

URL Aliasing.

N

OTE

If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Configuration, see ”Enabling

Automatic URL Aliasing” on page 388

.

The screen indicates if automatic aliasing is currently on or off. To change its state, click the Edit button ( ), check or uncheck the box, and click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 388

URL Aliasing

If Automatic Aliasing is turned on and you uncheck it, your page

URLs return to their original format (see

”Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned Off” on page 389 ).

Effect of Activating Automatic URL Aliasing

When you enable automatic URL aliasing, the feature updates every Quicklink in your

Ektron CMS400.NET

library to the new format. This may take a few moments.

Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned Off

Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL Aliasing Turned On

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 389

URL Aliasing

The aliasing feature does not review Quicklinks embedded in your content -- these maintain their original format. When a user or site visitor is navigating through

Ektron CMS400.NET

, either format works.

Manual Aliasing

When using manual aliasing, you choose content then assign a different URL to it. From then on, the content can be identified either by its original URL (assigned automatically by

Ektron

CMS400.NET

) or its alias.

When assigning an alias, choose the name you want users to see as your URL. In the example below, the page name changed from

/cms400demo/index.aspx

to

/cms400demo/Launch.htm.

Launch.htm is the alias.

Before Manual URL Aliasing

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 390

URL Aliasing

After Manual URL Aliasing

This section explains manual aliasing through the following subtopics.

”Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing” on page 392

”Enabling Manual Aliasing” on page 392

”Activating/Deactivating Manual Aliasing” on page 399

”Permissions for Manual Aliasing” on page 400

”Adding a Base Reference to a Template” on page 401

”Assigning a Manual URL Alias” on page 401

”Editing a Manual URL Alias” on page 405

”Removing a Manual URL Alias” on page 406

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 391

URL Aliasing

Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing

Manual URL Aliasing lets you completely alias a static or dynamic site. Benefits include:

You can make your site more user-friendly by creating “human readable” URLs (for example,

/ourcompany.html

is readable, while company.aspx?id=1

is not).

If you have a PHP site, you can alias all php pages and use the same Query String names to pass the needed info to the new

ASPX pages.

N

OTE

Any query strings appended to an aliased page pass to the ASPX page and may be used if necessary.

If you have a static Web site (for example, all HTML pages) that is indexed in a search engine, you can alias your whole site and gain complete content management without affecting your search engine ranking.

You can increase your search engine rankings by naming pages according to the context of a specific search term.

Enabling Manual Aliasing

If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Settings >

Configuration, follow these steps to enable it. First, update the web.config file. Next, update IIS Application Mappings.

Updating the Web.config File

1. Close all open browsers. In some instances, you may need to do an IIS reset.

2. Open the web.config file, located in your Web site’s root folder.

3. Change the value of ek_RedirectorInstalled

to True.

N

OTE

You only need to perform step 4 if you want add content with an extension other than those already registered, such as .aspx. The App Mappings tab on the

Application Configuration screen (illustrated below) indicates which extensions are registered on your server.

4. After ek_RedirectorManualExt

, enter a comma-delimited list of

Web page extensions for which you will want to create aliased pages. For example,

.aspx,.htm,.html,

. By default, .aspx is in the list.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 392

URL Aliasing

You can enter one or more extensions. Each extension must begin with a period, and separated from other extensions by a comma.

5. Enable the httpHandlers

section of Web.config. To do so, uncomment the following tags by removing dashes and the exclamation point (!):

To uncomment the opening tag, remove the characters in red below:

< !-add verb="*" path="*.asmx" type="System.Web.Services.Protocols.WebServiceHandlerFactory,System.Web.Services,

Version=1.0.5000.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" validate="false"/>

To uncomment the closing tag, remove the characters in red below:

<add verb="*" path="*" type="URLRewrite.URLRewriter,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" / ->

</httpHandlers>

6. If you want to use .htm as a file extension with your Web site, comment out the following line by adding the red characters below.

< !-add verb="*" path="*/*.

htm " type="URLRewrite.StaticFileHandler,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter"/ ->

7. Add the following line below the one shown above.

<add verb="*" path="* .htm

" type="URLRewrite.URLRewriter,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" /-->

8. Add a similar line for each file type you want to enable. For example:

<add verb="*" path="* .html

" type="URLRewrite.URLRewriter,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" /-->

<add verb="*" path="* .aspx

" type="URLRewrite.URLRewriter,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" /-->

9. For each folder path containing non-HTML content, add the pathway to it relative to the site root:

<add verb="*" path="*/ FOLDERPATH /

.*" type="URLRewrite.StaticFileHandler,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter"/>

For example, for the CMS400demo site, add this:

<add verb="*" path="*/ assets /

.*" type="URLRewrite.StaticFileHandler,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" />

10. Save web.config.

N

OTE

If you are using .aspx pages, you do not need to install the ISAPI filter. The following steps do not need to be performed.

Updating IIS Application Mappings for Windows 2000 and XP

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 393

URL Aliasing

See Also:

”Updating IIS Application Mappings for Windows 2003

Server” on page 397

1. Open IIS, go to the Web site, and right-click Properties.

2. Click the Directory tab.

3. Click the Configuration button.

4. On the Mappings tab, click Add.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 394

URL Aliasing

5. The Add/Edit Application Extension Mapping dialog appears.

N

OTE

The dialog should look like the sample above when you finish.

6. In the Executable field, browse to the .NET Framework aspnet_isapi.dll file (illustrated below).

N

OTE

Use the latest version of the asp.net_isapi.dll. The default location is c:\windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\latestversion\aspnet_isapi.dll

.

In the path,

latestversion

refers to the folder containing the latest version of the

.NET framework.

W

ARNING

!

IIS sometimes abbreviates the path in the Executable field, causing the OK button to be grayed out. If the text box does not contain the full path, IIS cannot validate it. To remedy this, click in the Executable field. The full path appears, and the OK button is active.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 395

.

URL Aliasing

N

OTE

When browsing to the aspnet_isapi.dll folder, you may need to change the Files

of Type dropdown to .dll or all files. It is set to .exe by default.

7. In the Extension field, enter characters to allow all extensions.

Server Platform

Windows 2000

Windows XP

Your entry in the Extension field

*.*

.*

8. Under Verbs, check Limit to. Then, enter GET, HEAD, POST,

DEBUG.

9. Uncheck Check (or Verify) that file exists.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 396

URL Aliasing

Important!

Don’t skip step 9!

10. Click OK.

Updating IIS Application Mappings for Windows 2003 Server

See Also:

”Updating IIS Application Mappings for Windows 2000 and XP” on page 393

1. Open IIS, go to the Web site, and right click Properties.

2. Click the Directory tab.

3. Click the Configuration button.

4. On the Mappings tab, click Insert.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 397

URL Aliasing

5. The Application Extension Mapping dialog appears (see above).

6. In the Executable field, click Browse to navigate to the .NET

Framework aspnet_isapi.dll file (illustrated below).

N

OTE

Use the latest version of the asp.net_isapi.dll. The default location is c:\windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework\latestversion\aspnet_isapi.dll

.

In the path, latestversion refers to the v2.0.50727 folder or the folder that contains the latest version.

W

ARNING

!

IIS sometimes abbreviates the path in the Executable field, causing the OK button to be grayed out. If the text box does not contain the full path, IIS cannot validate it. To remedy this, click in the Executable field. The full path appears, and the OK button is active.

.

N

OTE

When browsing to the aspnet_isapi.dll folder, you may need to change the Files

of Type dropdown to .dll or all files.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 398

7. Make sure Verify that file exists is not checked.

URL Aliasing

8. Click OK.

9. In IIS, underneath your Web site, click Asset Management >

dmdata.

10. Right click dmdata and choose Properties.

11. Click the Directory tab.

12. Click the Configuration button.

13. In the Wildcard application mapping area, remove the aspnet_isapi.dll if it appears.

14. Click OK.

N

OTE

Replace /FOLDERPATH/ with the folder path where the non-HTML content is contained.

15. Save and close Web.config.

Activating/Deactivating Manual Aliasing

To activate the aliasing feature, follow this path to the URL Aliasing

Configuration screen: Settings > Configuration > URL Aliasing.

N

OTE

If you do not see a URL Aliasing option under Configuration, see ”Enabling

Manual Aliasing” on page 392 .

The screen indicates if Manual Aliasing is currently on or off. To change its state, click the Edit button ( ), check or uncheck the box, and click the Save button.

See Screen Sample

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 399

URL Aliasing

If Aliasing is turned on and you uncheck it, your page URLs return

to their original format (see ”Sample Quicklinks Folder with URL

Aliasing Turned Off” on page 389

).

Permissions for Manual Aliasing

To give users or groups permission to assign a manual alias to content, follow these steps.

1. Go to the Ektron CMS400.NET Workarea and select Settings

> Roles.

2. Select Built-In > System-Wide > Alias-Edit.

3. The Manage Members for Role: Alias-Edit screen appears.

4. Click the Add button ( ).

5. Click the check box next to all users and user groups that have permission to manually alias content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 400

URL Aliasing

6. Click the Save button ( ).

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

Adding a Base Reference to a Template

When aliasing a Web page, you must add a reference to the base

URL into the

<Head>

section of the template. Otherwise, any relative links on the page use the alias as the base URL.

For example, you have the file winners.gif on a Web page. The page’s URL is http://www.ekexample.com/baseball/team.aspx?id=37

.

The alias for this page is http://www.ekexample.com/2004/ worldchamps.aspx

. When the page tries to find winners.gif, it looks in the

/2004/ directory. The page should look in the

/baseball/ directory, because that is where the file is located.

Here is the syntax used in the

<Head>.

<BASE HREF=”baseURL”

TARGET=”WindowName”>

Here is an example:

<HEAD>

<BASE HREF=”http://www.ekexample.com/baseball/”>

<HEAD>

Assigning a Manual URL Alias

There are two ways to manually assign an alias.

Use the Page Name Maintenance screen. This method is for administrators only.

Use the Alias tab in View Content area of the content. This method can be used by content editors or administrators.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 401

URL Aliasing

Each method is explained below.

Adding a Manual Alias via the Page Name Maintenance Screen

N

OTE

Make sure you have enabled URL Aliasing and given the administrator’s group

permissions for aliasing. See ”Enabling Manual Aliasing” on page 392 and

”Viewing the Users in a User Group” on page 438

.

1. Go to Workarea > Settings > Configuration > URL Aliasing.

2. Click the Page Name Maintenance button ( ).

3. The Page Name Maintenance screen appears.

The following explains the columns on the screen.

Field

Alias

Description

The URL as it appears aliased.

Actual The actual URL before aliasing.

Content Title The title of the content.

Status The status of the content. See Also:

”Content Status” on page 19

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 402

Field

ID

Lang ID

Primary

URL Aliasing

Description

The content’s ID number.

The language code for the content. See Also:

”Appendix A: List of Supported Languages” on page 357

The alias a content editor sees when editing an alias via the Alias tab. See Also:

”Adding a Manual URL Alias via the Alias Tab” on page 404

= Primary Alias for that URL

4. Click the Add Alias button ( ). The Add a New Alias screen appears.

5. In the Alias Name field, choose the name you want to use for an alias.

6. Click Select a Content Block to choose content.

7. The QuickLink Select window appears.

8. Choose content.

9. Check the Primary box if you want to make this the primary alias, that is, the alias a content editor sees when editing an alias via the Alias tab.

10. Choose a Quicklink option.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 403

URL Aliasing

Overwrite Existing Quicklink overwrites the existing

Quicklink for the content.

W

ARNING

!

When you choose to overwrite an existing Quicklink, you permanently delete it.

There is no way to revert back to the old Quicklink. If you want to use the old

Quicklink again, you need to add a new one. For more information on creating

Quicklinks, see Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual > “Library Folder”

>”Quicklinks” ”Quicklinks and Forms” on page 172 .

Do not add Quicklink does not create a Quicklink for this alias.

11. Click the Save button ( ).

Adding a Manual URL Alias via the Alias Tab

N

OTE

Make sure you have enabled URL Aliasing and given the administrator’s group permissions for aliasing. For information on Enabling URL Aliasing, see

”Benefits of Manual URL Aliasing” on page 392

. For information on User Group

Permissions, see

”Viewing the Users in a User Group” on page 438

.

On the Alias tab, Alias Name has the message, [Not Defined].

There are two reasons this message appears:

No alias is defined

An alias is defined in Page Name Maintenance, but it is not set to be a primary alias

1. In the Workarea, click the content you want to work with.

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).The Edit Content screen appears.

3. Click the Alias tab.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 404

URL Aliasing

4. In the Alias Name field, enter the name you want to use for an alias.

5. Save and publish the content.

N

OTE

An alias goes live only after content is published.

Editing a Manual URL Alias

You can edit an alias by going to the Page Name Maintenance screen. This lets you change the alias name and Quicklink properties. You can also change the primary alias if you have more than one for a content item.

To edit a Manual URL Alias, follow these steps.

1. Go to Workarea > Settings > Configuration > URL Aliasing.

2. Click the Page Name Maintenance button ( ).

3. On Page Name Maintenance screen, click the link you want to edit.

4. The Edit Alias screen appears.

N

OTE

When editing an Alias, you can only change the Alias Name and Primary fields.

5. Make any changes. To learn about the fields, see

”Adding a

Manual Alias via the Page Name Maintenance Screen” on page 402 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 405

URL Aliasing

6. Click the Save button ( ).

Removing a Manual URL Alias

To remove a Manual URL Alias, follow these steps.

1. Go to Workarea > Settings > Configuration > URL Aliasing.

2. Click the Page Name Maintenance button ( ).

3. On Page Name Maintenance screen, click the Remove button

(

).

4. Check the boxes of the aliases you would like to remove.

5. Click the Delete button ( ).

6. Click OK to confirm.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 406

Business Rules

B u s i n e s s R u l e s

Introduction

Business Rules allow you to define conditions for Web pages on your site. You choose an action based on whether the conditions are true or false when a site visitor visits your site. For example:

Condition - a site visitor visits your site for the first time

Action - add a cookie to the site visitor’s system and have a welcome message pop-up

With Business Rules, you do not write code to set conditions and initiate actions. You simply fill in requested information in the

Business Rules wizard, have your developer add a Business Rules server control to your Web form, and assign the server control the

Business Rules Ruleset.

N

OTE

For Information on the Business Rules server control, see the Developer Manual

Section “Introduction to Server Controls” > “Business Rules Server Control”.

Business Rules start out with a Ruleset that is assigned an ID.

Each Ruleset is made up of one or more rules. Rules are made up of conditions and actions. There are several predefined conditions and actions for rules in CMS400.NET.

Conditions include:

Cookie Parameter = value

Form Parameter = value

QueryString Parameter = value

Server Variable = value

Custom Parameter = value

Actions include:

Displaying a calendar

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 407

Business Rules

Displaying a message

Opening a URL in a new window

Popping up a message

Redirecting to a new URL

Setting a cookie value

Displaying a content block.

Once a rule is defined, you can add it to multiple Rulesets. This is useful if you have several groups of rules that use a common rule.

Business Rules are more fully explained through the following topics.

”Selecting a Rule” on page 408

”Creating a New Business Rule Ruleset” on page 409

”Working with Rulesets” on page 410

Selecting a Rule

There are two ways to select a rule. The first, check boxes, allows you to select a rule by clicking the check box. This method is used when turning a rule on or off in the Ruleset. Checked, the rule is active. Unchecked the rule is inactive.

The second, highlighting a rule, is used to when you want to work with the rule. For example, you want to add or remove a rule from a

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 408

Business Rules

Ruleset. To highlight a rule, click its title. Once a rule is highlighted, it is ready for an action, such as Remove or Edit.

Creating a New Business Rule Ruleset

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrators group or those defined in Manage Members for Role: Rule Editor screen can create or edit Business Rules and Rulesets.

See

Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

You create Business Rules Rulesets from the Business Ruleset screen in the Workarea.

The Business Ruleset screen contains these columns:

ID - the numerical ID assigned to the Ruleset.

Name - a unique name you give to the Ruleset to help you understand what the Ruleset does.

To add a new Ruleset, follow these steps:

1. In the Workarea, click Modules > Business Rules.

2. Click the Add New Ruleset button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 409

3. The Add New Ruleset screen appears.

Business Rules

4. In the Name: text box, add a name for the rule.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

6. The View Ruleset screen appears.

At this point, you can continue on to ”Add a New Rule to a Ruleset” on page 414

or ”Add an Existing Rule to a Ruleset” on page 419 to

add a rule or click the Back button ( ) and return to add a rule later.

Working with Rulesets

After creating a Ruleset, you typically add rules to it. To do this you would use the View Ruleset screen.

The View Ruleset screen is the launch pad for working with existing Rulesets. From this screen you can:

”Edit a Ruleset” on page 411

”Remove a Rule From a Ruleset” on page 412

”Change the Order of Rules in the Ruleset” on page 413

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 410

”Delete a Ruleset” on page 413

”Add a New Rule to a Ruleset” on page 414

”Add an Existing Rule to a Ruleset” on page 419

”Edit a Rule in a Ruleset” on page 421

”Viewing a Rule in a Ruleset” on page 422

Business Rules

Edit a Ruleset

You can initiate editing a Ruleset from two different locations, the

Web page or the Workarea. To edit a Ruleset from the Web page, navigate to Business Rule on a Web page while logged in. Then, right click the Business Rule icon and click Edit.

If editing from the Workarea, click Modules > Business Rules and then click the Ruleset to edit. Next, click the Edit button ( ) on the View Ruleset screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 411

The Edit Ruleset screen appears.

Business Rules

Remove a Rule From a Ruleset

Follow these steps to remove a rule from the Ruleset:

1. Navigate to the Edit Ruleset screen, as explained in

”Edit a

Ruleset” on page 411

.

2. Highlight the rule you want to remove.

W

ARNING

!

The check box associated with the rule must be empty for you to remove the rule.

If the check box is not empty, the rule will look as though it has been removed

3. Click the Remove Rule button ( ).

4. A pop up appears letting you know that the rule will be removed from this Ruleset only.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 412

Business Rules

5. Click OK.

6. The rule is removed from the Edit Ruleset screen.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

Change the Order of Rules in the Ruleset

The order of rules in a Ruleset affects the way the rules are applied when a site visitor views a page. For example, you might want to have a welcome message pop-up before a piece of content is displayed. Thus, you would move the rule for popping up the welcome message above the rule for displaying a piece of content.

The following steps explain how to change the order of the rules in the Ruleset.

1. Navigate to the Edit Ruleset screen as explained in

”Edit a

Ruleset” on page 411

.

2. Highlight the rule you want to reorder.

3. Click the Move Up or Move Down buttons ( ) ( ) to move the rule up or down the list.

4. Click the Save button ( ).

Delete a Ruleset

5. The View Ruleset screen appears with the rule in the new location.

When you delete a Ruleset, it is removed from the system permanently. However, the rules that are a part of the Ruleset do not get deleted. This is to ensure that a rule that is used in multiple

Rulesets does not get deleted.

The following steps explain how to delete a Ruleset.

1. Navigate to the Edit Ruleset screen as explained in

”Edit a

Ruleset” on page 411

.

2. Click the Delete Ruleset button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 413

Business Rules

3. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion.

4. Click OK.

5. The Ruleset is deleted and you are redirected back to the main

Business Rules screen.

Add a New Rule to a Ruleset

Adding a new rule is easy with Ektron CMS400.NET. Just click the

Add button on the View Ruleset screen and the Rules Wizard launches. The Rules Wizard helps you define your rules.

The steps below explain how to add a new rule to your Ruleset.

1. If you arrived here from the

”Creating a New Business Rule

Ruleset” on page 409 section, continue on to the next step.

Otherwise:

Navigate to the Business Rules screen in the Workarea by clicking Modules > Business Rules. Next, click the name of the Business Rule for which you want to create a new rule.

2. Click the Add button ( ).

3. Click Add New from the menu.

4. The Rules Wizard launches.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 414

Business Rules

.

5. Step 1 in the Wizard allows you to create conditions for the rule and decide whether a site visitor needs to match Any or All of the conditions. Clicking the param and value links opens a dialog to enter information.

.

Place a check in the box next to any of the conditions you want to use. Use the table below to help you fill out the param and value fields.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 415

Business Rules

Conditions Table

Condition

The Cookie param equals value

The Form param equals value

The QueryString param equals value

The Server Variable param equals value

Description

Use a cookie for this condition.

param - enter Name in this field.

value - enter the name of the cookie in this field.

Example

Does the site visitor's system have an

Ektron cookie?

Usage:

The Cookie param “Name” equals value “Ektron”

Use a form elements field name and match the value entered into the element.

param - enter a form’s element Field

Name from a form.

value - enter the value you want the form element to match.

A form has a Choices Field element with the Field Name “Favorite_Food” and choices of Pizza, Steak and

Chicken. When a site visitor chooses

Pizza and clicks submit, your rule launches a Pizza company’s Web site.

Usage:

The Form param “Favorite_Food” equals value “Pizza”

Use the QueryString for this condition

param - the name of the QueryString. For example, ID.

value - the value associated with the parameter. For example, 18.

Use server variables from the site visitor.

param - enter the name of a server variable. For example, HTTPS.

value - the value associated with the parameter. For example, On.

Is content with the ID of 18 being displayed?

Usage:

The QueryString param “ID” equals value “18”

Is the site visitor’s browser using

SSL?

Usage:

The Server Variable param “HTTPS” equals value “On”

A list of server variables and their descriptions can be found at http:// windowssdk.msdn.microsoft.com/ library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/ iissdk/html/21b3be8f-d4ed-4059-

8e21-6cba2c253006.asp.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 416

Condition

The Custom param equals value

Description

Use custom parameters from the user.

User parameters are defined in the codebehind of a web page.

param - enter the name of a custom parameter. For example, AcctBlnc

value - the value associated with the parameter. For example, 1000

Business Rules

Example

Is the user's account balance $1000?

Usage:

The Custom param “AcctBlnc” equals value “1000”

.

6. Once you have entered all of the information, click Next.

Step 2 of the Wizard lets you select an action to take if the conditions are true. Check the boxes for the actions you want to use. Click the blue links to add the appropriate information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 417

Business Rules

Conditions Table

Action

Display Calendar ID

Display a Message

Open URL

Popup A Message

Redirect to a URL

Set Cookie to Value

Display Content Block ID

Description

Enter a CMS400.NET Calendar ID.

Enter a message to be displayed.

Enter a URL. This opens a new window with the URL.

Enter a message that appears in a popup dialog box.

Enter a URL to redirect a the site visitor’s browser.

Creates a cookie on the site visitor’s system. Enter

Name for Cookie and the name of the cookie for Value .

Enter a CMS400.NET content block’s ID.

7. After you enter all appropriate information, click Next.

8. Step 3 of the Wizard allows you to select actions to take when the conditions are false. This works the same way as Step 2 of the Rules Wizard. All actions are the same and work the same way. For descriptions of the actions, see ”Conditions Table” on page 416 .

9. After you enter all appropriate information, click Next.

10. Step 4 of the Wizard asks you to enter a name for the rule in the text box.

11. Click Done.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 418

Business Rules

12. The View Ruleset screen appears. Your rule appears in the

Ruleset box.

Add an Existing Rule to a Ruleset

Because rules are not tied to a Ruleset once they are created, you can add a rule to more than one Ruleset. To add an existing rule to a Ruleset, follow these steps:

1. If you arrived here from the

”Creating a New Business Rule

Ruleset” on page 409 section, continue on to the next step.

Otherwise:

Navigate to the Business Rules screen in the Workarea by clicking Modules > Business Rules. Next, click the name of the Business Rule for which you want to add an existing rule.

2. Click the Add button ( ).

3. Click Add Existing from the menu.

4. The Add an Existing Rule Screen Appears

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 419

Business Rules

.

5. Place a check mark in the check box for the rule you want to add to the Ruleset.

6. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 420

Business Rules

7. The View Ruleset screen appears with the existing rule added.

Edit a Rule in a Ruleset

The following steps explain how to edit a rule in a Ruleset.

1. In the Workarea, navigate to Modules > Business Rules.

2. Select the Ruleset that contains the rule to be changed.

3. Highlight the rule to be changed.

4. Click the Edit Rule button ( ).

5. The Rules Wizard appears with the rule loaded. The Rules

Wizard is explained in ”Add a New Rule to a Ruleset” on page 414 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 421

Business Rules

Viewing a Rule in a Ruleset

To help you understand the contents of a rule, a (View) link appears next to each rule in a Ruleset. Clicking this link launches a view window for the rule. In this window, you can view the settings for each Rules Wizard step applied to a rule.

N

OTE

The steps are not editable from this window. To edit rules in a Ruleset, see

”Edit a

Rule in a Ruleset” on page 421

.

(

To navigate through the steps, use the Previous and Next Step buttons ( ). To close the window, click the Close button

).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 422

We b S i t e N a v i g a t i o n

A i d s

C o l l e c t i o n s

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Collection feature lets users create a list of content that can be placed on a Web page to offer readers links to them. In the following illustration, the circled content is an example of a collection on a Web page.

Collections can also be used to display listings such as job postings, press releases, and Knowledge Base articles. The following graphic illustrates the use of a collection on the landing page of Ektron’s Knowledge Base.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 423

Collections

This section only describes managing permissions to use the

Collections feature. For more information about the Collections feature, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Working with Collections.”

Collection Permissions

There are two ways that you can create a Collection, and each has its own permission model.

Collection Creation

Method

Illustration

Via the Workarea’s

Modules tab

How to set permissions

The user must be either a member of the administrators user group or be assigned the Collection and Menu Admin role. See

Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 424

Collection Creation

Method

Illustration

Via the View Contents of Folder screen’s New

> Collection option

Collections

How to set permissions

See ”Permissions for Collections Created from the View Contents of Folder Screen” on page 425

Permissions for Collections Created from the View Contents of Folder Screen

Permissions for collections are set in the content folder permissions table, in the advanced permissions section.

”Setting Permissions” on page 25

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 425

Collections

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 426

Menu Feature

M e n u F e a t u r e

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu navigation system for your Web site. Like

Collections, the Menu feature gives you the flexibility to display links to content, library assets, external hyperlink and submenus.

This section only describes managing permissions to use the

Menus Feature and suggestion for implementing it. For more information about using the Menus feature, see the

Ektron

CMS400.NET

User Manual

Permission to Use the Menus Feature

There are two ways that you can create a menu, and each has its own permission model.

Menu Creation

Method

Via the Workarea’s

Modules tab

Illustration How to set permissions

The user must be either a member of the administrators user group or be assigned the Collection and Menu Admin role. See

Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 427

Menu Creation

Method

Via the View Contents of Folder screen’s New

> Menu option

Illustration How to set permissions

Menu Feature

See

”Permissions for Menus Created from the View Contents of Folder Screen” on page 428

Permissions for Menus Created from the View Contents of

Folder Screen

Only users with permission to use the Collections feature

(illustrated below) can work with menus. If user does not have permission to Collections, the Menu option does not appear.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 428

Menu Feature

Also, if a user has permission to Collections but Read Only permission for content and the library, he cannot add content from a navigation link.

Implementation of the Menus Feature

In order for a menu to appear on your Web site, your Web developer must modify a page template to display it. This procedure is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer

Manual section “Ektron CMS400.NET Server Controls” > “List of

Server Controls” > “Menu Server Control”.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 429

Managing Users & User Groups

M a n a g i n g U s e r s a n d

P e r m i s s i o n s

M a n a g i n g U s e r s & U s e r G r o u ps

Users are people who administer the Web site, create content, or publish content. Without users, the Web site would be blank. In

Ektron CMS400.NET, you can add, edit, and delete users to and from the application through the Settings folder in the Workarea.

Every Ektron CMS400.NET user belongs to a User Group. User groups are used when creating permissions and an approval chain for content folders. User groups can be departments in your company (Human Resources, Sales, Engineering) or indicate a user’s role (Publishers, Administrators, Editors, etc.).

I

MPORTANT

!

If your system uses the Active Directory Integration Feature, proceed to ”Active

Directory Feature” on page 47

to learn about user management functions. This chapter only applies to systems that do not use Active Directory Integration.

I

MPORTANT

!

If your system uses LDAP Authentication, proceed to

”LDAP Authentication” on page 100

. Some functionality in this chapter does apply to LDAP. The LDAP chapter explains which information is applied.

This section explains the most common actions that you will perform on users and user groups. These actions include:

”Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders” on page 431

”Creating a New User” on page 432

”Viewing a User” on page 434

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 430

Managing Users & User Groups

”Editing a User” on page 434

”Deleting a User” on page 435

”Assigning Users To User Groups” on page 437

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrators User Group and those defined in the Manage

Members for Role: User Admin screen can view, add, or edit users and user groups.

Accessing the Users and User Groups Folders

All user and user group information is accessible from the

Workarea.

Accessing the User Folder

To access the user folder in Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.

1. Access the Workarea.

2. Click the Settings button in the lower left frame.

3. Click the Users folder from the folder tree.

4. All Ektron CMS400.NET users appear.

From this screen, you can add, edit, and delete users. These procedures are explained in the next sections.

Accessing the User Group Folder

To access the user group folder in Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.

1. Access the Workarea.

2. Click the Settings folder from the left frame of the Workarea window.

3. Click the User Group folder.

4. All user groups appear.

From this screen, you can add, edit, and delete user groups. These procedures are explained in the next sections.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 431

Managing Users & User Groups

Managing Users

I

MPORTANT

!

If you are using Active Directory to Manage users, see ”Associating User

Information in AD with Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61 .

The following topics explain how to manage users.

”Creating a New User” on page 432

”Viewing a User” on page 434

”Editing a User” on page 434

”Deleting a User” on page 435

”Removing Users from User Groups” on page 436

Creating a New User

I

MPORTANT

!

If you are using Active Directory to add a new user, see

”Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61

.

Before you can assign a user to a user group, you must add the user to the system. To create a new user, follow these steps.

1. Access the User folder, as described in

”Accessing the User

Folder” on page 431 .

2. Click the Add User button ( ).

3. The Add a New User to the System screen appears.

4. Enter the following information about the user.

Field

Username

Organization

Organizational Unit

Domain

First Name

Last Name

Description

Insert a username for the user you want to create.

These fields are only available when using LDAP Authentication.

See Also:

”Adding User Information from an LDAP Server to Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 106 .

Enter the first name of the user.

Enter the last name of the user.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 432

Field

Password

Confirm Password

User Language

Email Address

Forum Editor

Disable Receiving of

System Notification

Email

Any custom user properties

Managing Users & User Groups

Description

Enter a password for the user.

Note: Passwords can be either case-sensitive or case-insensitive.

For more information, see ”Making Passwords Case Sensitive” on page 6

.

Confirm the password by typing it again.

Select the language in which the user will view Ektron CMS400.NET

screens and messages. The language also determines the default value whenever a drop-down list of languages appears within

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

.

The dropdown list of choices at this field is derived from the

Language Settings screen, available from the Settings>

Configuration folder.

Do not confuse the system language with the user’s ability to create and edit foreign editions of content. This field does not prevent a user from working with multiple language content.

See Also:

”Multi-Language Support” on page 116

Note: If the selected language is not English, French or German, it is only supported after you download the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

Language Support Program from Ektron and translate the Web site.

Enter the email address of the user.

Determines which editor will be used when this user replies to a

Discussion Board.

See Also:

”Using Discussion Boards on Your Web Site” on page 353

Select to disable the email notifications for the user. If you do, the user will not receive the automatic email notification described in

”Automatic eMail Notification” on page 296 . However, this field has

no effect on the user’s ability to receive instant email.

See

”Custom User Properties” on page 5

N

OTE

If email notification is turned off in the setup page, you are notified when editing, adding, or viewing a user.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 433

Managing Users & User Groups

6. The View Users in Group Everyone screen appears with the new user included in the table.

N

OTE

When you add a new user, he is automatically placed in the Everyone user group.

To assign users to other groups, see ”Assigning Users To User Groups” on page 437

.

7. Continue this process until you add all users of your Web site, or are allowed to depending on your license.

N

OTE

Contact Ektron Sales for pricing of adding more users to your license.

Viewing a User

After adding a user, you can view that information. While viewing a user, you can edit or delete the user.

To view a user, follow these steps.

1. Access the user folder as described in

”Accessing the User

Folder” on page 431 .

2. Click the Username of the user you want to view.

3. The View User Information screen is displayed.

To learn about the fields, see

”Viewing a User” on page 434

and ”The following fields are only available when editing a user.” on page 435

From the View User screen, you can edit or delete users. These actions are described in the next sections.

Editing a User

I

MPORTANT

!

If you are using Active Directory to edit a user, see ”Editing User Information in

Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 63 .

When editing a user, you can change the username, first name, last name, password, user language, and email address. Also, while editing, you can change three fields that were not available when the user was created.

Account Locked

Work Page Size

Landing Page after login

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 434

Managing Users & User Groups

To edit a user, follow these steps.

1. Access the view user screen of the user you want to edit as described in

”Viewing a User” on page 434 .

2. Click the Username of the user you want to edit.

3. The View User Information screen is displayed.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

.

5. The Edit User screen is displayed. To learn about the fields,

see ”Viewing a User” on page 434

.

The following fields are only available when editing a user.

Field

Account Locked

Forum Editor

Work Page Size

Landing Page after login

Description

See

”Restricting Login Attempts” on page 6

Determines which editor will be used when this user replies to a Discussion Board. See

Also:

”Using Discussion Boards on Your Web

Site” on page 353

See

”Work Page Size” on page 28

See

”Landing Page after login” on page 29

6. Make the necessary changes to the user information.

7. Click the Update button ( ).

Deleting a User

I

MPORTANT

!

If you are using Active Directory to delete a user, see

”Deleting Users” on page 64 .

When you need to remove a user from the application, you can easily do it from the User’s Folder in the Workarea.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 435

Managing Users & User Groups

W

ARNING

!

Once a user is deleted from the database, he is deleted permanently. The process cannot be undone.

To delete a user, follow these steps.

1. Access the view user screen for the user you want to delete, as described in

”Viewing a User” on page 434 .

2. Click the Username of the user you want to delete.

3. The View User Information screen is displayed.

4. Click the Delete button ( ).

5. A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Removing Users from User Groups

I

MPORTANT

!

If you are using Active Directory to remove a user from a group, see ”Removing

Users from a Group” on page 69

.

N

OTE

Removing a user from a user group does not delete the user from Ektron

CMS400.NET. Also, you cannot remove users from the Everyone or Admin user groups.

To remove a user from a user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the User Groups folder, as described in

”Accessing the

User Group Folder” on page 431

.

2. Click the User Group that includes the user you want to remove.

3. Members of the selected group appear.

4. Click the user to remove.

5. The View User Information screen is displayed.

6. Click the Delete button ( ) to delete the user from the group.

7. A confirmation message is displayed.

8. Click OK.

Managing User Groups

The following topics explain how to manage User Groups.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 436

Managing Users & User Groups

”Creating a New User Group” on page 437

”Assigning Users To User Groups” on page 437

”Viewing the Users in a User Group” on page 438

”Editing a User Group” on page 439

”Deleting a User Group” on page 440

”Removing Users from User Groups” on page 436

Creating a New User Group

To create a new User Group in Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.

1. Access the User Groups folder in the administrator Workarea, as described in

”Accessing the User Group Folder” on page 431 .

2. Click the Add User Group button ( ).

3. The Add a New User Group to the System screen is displayed.

4. Enter a name and brief description of the user group you want to create.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

Assigning Users To User Groups

To add a user to a user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the User Groups folder in the Workarea.

2. Click the user group to which you want to add a user.

3. The View Users in Group screen appears with all current members of the group.

N

OTE

When you create a new user group, no user assigned to it initially.

Note that you can select any number of users by checking the box to the left of their name. To select all users, check the box in the column header row.

You can also sort the display by Username, Lastname or

Firstname.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 437

Managing Users & User Groups

And, you can enter characters into the Search field and find only users that match them. For example, you could enter bill, click the Search button, and see only users with those characters in their name.

4. Click the Add User button ( ).

5. Users who do not belong to the group appear.

6. Click the user you want to add.

7. A confirmation message is displayed.

8. Click OK.

9. The selected user is now a member of the selected group.

10. Continue this process until you add all users into User Groups.

Viewing the Users in a User Group

To view a list of users who are members of a user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the User Group folder in the administrator Workarea, as described in

”Accessing the User Group Folder” on page 431 .

2. Click the user group whose members you want to view.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 438

Managing Users & User Groups

3. The View Users in Group screen appears with a list of users who are members of the group.

From this screen, you can edit or delete user groups, as well as add and remove users to and from the user group.

You can also send an email to any group member by clicking the checkbox next to the email icon on the same line as the user’s name.

After selecting all users to receive email, click the email toolbar button ( ). A new screen appears that lets you compose the email.

Editing a User Group

When editing a User Group, you can only change its name.

N

OTE

You cannot edit the default Administrators and Everyone user groups.

To edit a user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Users in Group screen for the user group you

want to edit, as described in ”Viewing the Users in a User

Group” on page 438 .

2. Click the User Group you want to edit.

3. The View Users In Group screen is displayed.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. The Edit User Group screen is displayed.

6. Make the necessary changes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 439

Managing Users & User Groups

7. Click the Update button ( ).

Deleting a User Group

When you do not need a User Group anymore, you can delete it from the system.

N

OTE

You cannot delete the Administrator and Everyone groups.

To delete a user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Users in Group screen for the user group you want to delete, as described in

”Viewing the Users in a User

Group” on page 438 .

2. Click the User Group you want to delete.

3. The View Users In Group screen is displayed.

4. Click the Delete button ( ).

5. A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

7. The User Group is deleted from the Ektron CMS400.NET Web site.

Removing Users from User Groups

See

”Removing Users from User Groups” on page 436 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 440

Membership Users and Groups

M e m b e r s h i p U s e r s a n d G r o u ps

Membership users are a category of users who have limited privileges to

Ektron CMS400.NET

. Unlike regular CMS users, they cannot use the Workarea. When a membership user logs in, he can only view content -- all other functionality is disabled. Once logged in, only a logout button is displayed.

A big advantage of membership users is that they do not count against your user license. So, if you have a ten (10) user license, your CMS can have hundreds of membership users.

Membership groups are used to group similar membership users.

Privileges of Membership Users

They can view private content after log in. See Also: ”Private

Content” on page 1

They can self-subscribe to receive Web Alerts. See Also:

”Web

Alert Feature” on page 238

If a Discussion Board requires sign in, they can view and post

to them. See Also: ”Discussion Boards” on page 324

If a blog requires authentication, they can post blog comments.

See Also:

”Blogs” on page 354

If a poll or survey is set up to track participating users, membership users’ names appear on the Form reports.

Membership User/User Group Example

A typical membership scenario is a Partners section of your Web site that contains private content for partners only. However, you don’t want partners to perform any Ektron CMS400.NET-related activities.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 1

Membership Users and Groups

You can set up a membership user group to include users from your partner’s organization. The group is given read-only permissions to the Partners section, which contains private content. Any partner can log into Ektron CMS400.NET and view the private content.

This topic is more fully explained through the following subtopics.

.

”Accessing the Membership Module Folder” on page 2

”Working with Membership Users” on page 3

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

”Assigning Permissions for Memberships” on page 11

”Troubleshooting Problems with Membership Users and

Groups” on page 12

Accessing the Membership Module Folder

Use the Membership Module folder to enter and edit membership users and user groups. To access the folder, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to the Workarea.

2. From the left frame of the Workarea, click the Modules folder button.

3. The Modules folder hierarchy is displayed.

4. Click the Memberships folder to view its subfolders.

Folder Name More Information

Users

Users not

Verified

User Groups

”” on page 3

”What Happens if Verification email is Used” on page 266

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

Messages

”What Happens if Verification email is Used” on page 266

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 2

Membership Users and Groups

Working with Membership Users

The following sections explain all actions that may be performed on membership users via the following topics.

”Adding Membership Users” on page 3

”Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group” on page 4

”Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership

Users” on page 4

”Viewing Membership User Information” on page 4

”Editing Membership Users” on page 6

”Deleting Membership Users” on page 7

Adding Membership Users

N

OTE

If you are using the Web Alert feature, visitors to your site can sign up to be membership users. That represents another way to add membership users to

Ektron CMS400.NET. For more information, see ”How Users Sign up for

Subscriptions” on page 265

.

To add a new membership user, follow these steps.

1. Access the membership users folder, as described in

”Accessing the Membership Module Folder” on page 2

.

2. Click the Add Membership User button ( ).

3. The Add Membership User screen is displayed.

4. Complete the form using the following table as a reference.

Field Description

Username

First Name

Enter a unique username for the membership user.

Enter the first name of the user.

Last Name Enter the last name of the user.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 3

Membership Users and Groups

Field

Password

Confirm Pwd.

Email Address

Description

Enter a password for the user.

Re-type the password to confirm it is correct.

Enter an email address for the user.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group

See

”Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group” on page 9

.

Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership Users

See

”Assigning Permissions for Memberships” on page 11

.

Viewing Membership User Information

To view membership user information, follow these steps.

1. Access the membership users folder, as described in

”Accessing the Membership Module Folder” on page 2

.

N

OTE

The ek_PageSize

setting in the web.config file determines the maximum number of users that can appear on a page before it “breaks.” When a page breaks, additional entries appear on another screen, and the following text appears near the bottom of the list:

Page 1 of 2

[First Page] [Previous Page] [Next Page] [Last Page]

The View Users in Group All_Members screen lets you add new users, as well as sort and search for existing users. See

”Sorting Membership Users” on page 4

and ”Searching for

Membership Users” on page 5 .

2. Click the user you want to view.

3. The View Membership User Information screen is displayed.

From this screen, you can edit or delete membership users.

Sorting Membership Users

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 4

Membership Users and Groups

You can arrange users on the View Users in Group All_Members screen by clicking the following column headers:

Username

Last Name

First Name

By default, users are arranged alphabetically by Username, starting with the beginning of the alphabet. To switch that arrangement so that users whose username is last when sorted alphabetically, click the column header. To revert to the original arrangement, click the header again.

You can also sort the list by last name or first name. Like username, clicking the column header reverses the arrangement.

Searching for Membership Users

You can use the Search field (circled below) to display only users who meet your criteria. This would be especially helpful to filter out a large number of membership users.

Use the Search field to enter unique characters to find members you seek. For example, to find all members whose username includes @yahoo.com, enter that into the Search field and click the Search button. Only users with those characters in that exact sequence in their username, first name, or last name appear on the screen.

You can also search by First and Last name fields. Click the down arrow to the left of the Search button to select a field to search.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 5

Membership Users and Groups

The sequence of search characters must match your entry in the

Search field. For example, if you are searching by last name and enter MI, anyone whose name is Smith appears. But, if you enter

IM, users with the last name of Smith do not appear.

Also, the search is case-insensitive, so MI produces the same results as mi.

Editing Membership Users

To edit a membership user, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Membership User screen of the membership

user you want to edit, as described in ”Viewing Membership

User Information” on page 4

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The Edit Membership User Information screen is displayed.

4. Use the following table to assist with editing the membership user’s information.

Field Description

Username

First Name

Enter a unique username for the membership user.

Enter the first name of the user.

Last Name

Password

Confirm Pwd.

Enter the last name of the user.

Enter a password for the user.

Re-type the password to confirm it is correct.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 6

Membership Users and Groups

Field

Email Address

Description

Enter an email address for the user.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

Deleting Membership Users

To delete a membership user, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Membership User screen of the membership

user you want to edit, as described in ”Viewing Membership

User Information” on page 4

.

2. Click the Delete button ( ).

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.

Membership User Groups

Membership user groups organize similar membership users, reducing the effort required to assign identical permissions to many users. You can assign them Read-only permission to any folder by going to Folder Properties > View Permissions for Folder >

View MemberShip users.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 7

Membership Users and Groups

The following sections explain membership user group management.

”Adding Membership User Groups” on page 8

”Viewing Users in a Membership User Group” on page 9

”Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group” on page 9

”Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User

Groups” on page 9

”Editing Membership User Group Name” on page 9

”Deleting User from Membership User Group” on page 10

”Deleting Membership User Groups” on page 10

Adding Membership User Groups

To create a new membership user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the membership user group folder, as described in

”Accessing the Membership Module Folder” on page 2

.

2. Click the Add Membership User Group button ( ).

3. The Add a New User Group screen is displayed.

4. Enter a unique name for the group.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

See Also:

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 8

Membership Users and Groups

Viewing Users in a Membership User Group

To view the information about a membership user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the membership user group folder, as described in

”Accessing the Membership Module Folder” on page 2

.

2. Click the membership user group you want to view.

3. The View Users In Group screen is displayed.

See Also:

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

Adding Membership Users to a Membership User Group

To add a membership user to a membership user group, follow these steps.

N

OTE

Only membership users can be added to membership user groups.

1. Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group to which you want to add a

membership user, as described in ”Viewing Users in a

Membership User Group” on page 9

.

2. Click the Add Membership User button ( ).

3. The Add User to Group screen is displayed.

N

OTE

Only membership users who do not belong to the group appear.

4. Click the user you want to add.

5. A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

See Also:

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

Setting Permissions on Private Content for Membership User

Groups

See

”Assigning Permissions for Memberships” on page 11

Editing Membership User Group Name

To edit a membership user group name, follow these steps.

N

OTE

The membership user group, All_members, cannot be edited.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 9

Membership Users and Groups

1. Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership group you want to edit, as described in

”Viewing

Users in a Membership User Group” on page 9 .

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The Edit User Group screen is displayed.

4. Change the membership group name.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

See Also:

”Membership User Groups” on page 7

Deleting User from Membership User Group

To remove a user from a membership user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group that contains the membership user you want to delete, as described in

”Viewing Users in a

Membership User Group” on page 9

.

2. Click the name of the membership user you want to remove.

3. The View User Information screen is displayed.

4. Click the Delete button ( ).

5. A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Deleting Membership User Groups

To delete a membership user group, follow these steps.

1. Access the View Membership User Group screen for the membership user group you want to delete, as described in

”Viewing Users in a Membership User Group” on page 9 .

2. Click the Delete button ( ).

3. A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 10

Membership Users and Groups

Assigning Permissions for Memberships

After you create membership users and groups, you can assign them permissions to content folders. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Access the permissions table for the content or folder you want to assign membership permissions for.

For See

Content folders

Content

”Setting Permissions for a Content Folder” on page 29

”Setting Permissions for Content” on page 32

2. If necessary, break the inheritance for the content or folder.

See Also:

”Inheritance” on page 26

3. Set the content folder or item to Private. See Also: ”Private

Content” on page 1

4. Click View MemberShip Users on the right side of the permissions table.

5. The membership users/user groups added to the permissions table are displayed.

6. Click the Add button ( ).

7. The Add Permissions screen is displayed.

8. Click a username or user group name to add to the permissions table.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 11

Membership Users and Groups

9. The Add Permissions Options screen is displayed.

10. Check Read-only if you want the membership user or user group to be able to view the private content when logged in.

11. Click the Save button ( ).

The membership user or user group is saved and added to the permissions table.

Troubleshooting Problems with Membership Users and Groups

Symptom

Error message:

Response object error 'ASP

0251 :

80004005'

Response

Buffer

Limit

Exceeded

Problem

Response Buffer exceeded its limit

Solution

Increase limit. To do so, follow these steps.

1.

Stop IIS.

2.

Locate the file

%WinDir%\System32\Inetsrv\Metabase.xml

3.

Modify the AspBufferingLimit value.

4.

Restart IIS.

The default value is 4194304, which is about 4 MB.

Suggest changing it to 20MB (20971520) and see if that helps.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 12

Private Content

P r i v a t e C o n t e n t

Private content is only visible to CMS or membership users with at least Read-Only permissions for a folder. Those users must log in to see the private content. Regular site visitors cannot see it.

You can designate a folder to be private. In that case, all content in it and its subfolders is private (if they inherit permissions).

Alternatively, you can designate specific content items as private.

.

To demonstrate private content, the following table shows how the user’s status affects the display of content in three scenarios.

Scenario

Site visitor accesses private content

Web Page Display

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 1

Scenario

Logged in user with read-only permissions accesses private content

Web Page Display

Logged-in user with edit permissions accesses private content

Private Content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 2

Private Content

Making a Folder Private

N

OTE

You can only set content to private when inheritance is broken.

To make a folder private, follow these steps.

1. In the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Workarea, navigate to the folder that you want to make private.

2. Click View > Folder Properties.

3. Click the View Permissions button ( ).

4. If necessary, uncheck the box that says Allow this object to

inherit permissions. (Inheritance must be disabled before you can make the content private.)

5. Check the box that says The content in this folder is private

and can only be viewed by authorized users and members.

6. A confirmation message is displayed.

7. Click OK.

The content in that folder is now private.

Making Content Private

To make any content private, follow these steps. See Also: ”Making

Assets Private” on page 4

1. In the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Workarea, navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to make private.

2. Click the content item you want to make private.

3. Click the View Permissions button ( ).

4. If necessary, uncheck the box that says Allow this object to

inherit permissions. (Inheritance must be disabled before you can make the content private.)

5. Check the box that says This content is private and is NOT

viewable on the public Web site.

6. A confirmation message is displayed.

7. Click OK.

The content is now private.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 3

Private Content

Making Assets Private

If assets are set to private, they are handled like other private content with one important exception: Unless you must follow the procedure described below, anyone can access the asset by

typing the URL of the asset into the browser’s address field.

If a user attempts to access the asset in any other way (such as, linking to it from a Web page), the regular methods of making content private work.

To make assets private even if someone types their URL into the browser’s address field, follow these steps.

1. In the web.config file, enable the httpHandlers

section of

Web.config. To do so, uncomment the following tags by removing dashes and the exclamation point (!):

To uncomment the opening tag, remove the characters in red below:

< !-add verb="*" path="*/Assets/*.*" type="Ektron.ASM.FileHandler.AssetHttpHandler"/>

<add verb="*" path="*.asmx" type="System.Web.Services.Protocols.WebServiceHandlerFactory,

System.Web.Services, Version=1.0.5000.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a" validate="false"/>

To uncomment the closing tag, remove the characters in red below:

<add verb="*" path="*" type="URLRewrite.URLRewriter,Ektron.Cms.URLRewriter" / ->

</httpHandlers>

2. Update the IIS Application Mappings. See ”Updating IIS

Application Mappings for Windows 2000 and XP” on page 393

and ”Updating IIS Application Mappings for Windows 2003

Server” on page 397

.

3. Make either the asset (content) or its folder private. See

”Making a Folder Private” on page 3 or ”Making Content

Private” on page 3 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 4

C u s t o m U s e r P r o p e r t i e s

Custom User Properties

Custom User Properties allow you to create custom fields. These custom fields appear on the User Properties and Membership User

Properties screens, and on the Membership server control. They are used to define information about a user beyond the standard

Ektron CMS400.NET user properties, such as Username, First

Name, Password and email Address.

Examples of Custom User Properties might be:

employee ID

phone number

phone extension

instant message screen name

position

start date

department

birthday

the IP address of the user’s machine

Your ability to create and manage custom user properties is explained through the following topics.

”The View Custom Properties Screen” on page 6

”Adding a Custom User Property” on page 7

”Editing a Custom User Property” on page 17

”Deleting a Custom User Property” on page 18

”Setting the Custom User Properties Order” on page 19

”Using Custom User Properties for Non-English Languages” on page 21

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 5

Custom User Properties

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group can work with Custom User

Properties.

The View Custom Properties Screen

Use the View Custom Properties screen to create custom properties for users and membership users. From the View

Custom Properties screen, you can:

add a new custom property. See ”Adding a Custom User

Property” on page 7

edit a custom property. See ”Editing a Custom User Property” on page 17

reorder the way custom properties appear on the users and

membership users screen. See ”Setting the Custom User

Properties Order” on page 19

work with custom properties in different languages. See

”Using

Custom User Properties for Non-English Languages” on page 21

Below is an example of the View Custom Properties screen.

The table below describes the View Custom Properties screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 6

Custom User Properties

.

(

Buttons, Dropdown

Boxes or Fields

Add button

( )

Reorder button

( )

Language Selection

Dropdown List

Description For More Information

)

Add custom user properties.

Change the order in which the custom properties appear on the Users or

Membership User Properties screen.

”Adding a Custom User

Property” on page 7

”Setting the Custom User

Properties Order” on page 19

Allows you to view custom user properties by language.

”Viewing Custom User

Properties By Language” on page 23

Title Field

Type Field

Required Field

Displays the title of a custom user property.

When viewing by language, the title changes to the title used in a specific language if it has been defined. Click a Title to edit the property.

Note: The title and label are the same field.

On some screens, Title is used; on others

Label is used.

”Editing a Custom User

Property” on page 17

”Type” on page 9

Shows the Type that was chosen for a custom user property.

Shows whether the field is required.

”Required” on page 9

Adding a Custom User Property

After you add a custom user property, it appears on all User and

Membership User Information screens, under the User Properties header. When new users and membership users are added, custom user properties appear during the creation process.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 7

Custom User Properties

Follow these steps to add a custom user property.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Choose the standard language used in your

Ektron

CMS400.NET

Workarea.

3. Click the Add Property button ( ).

4. The Add Custom Property screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 8

Custom User Properties

Field

Label

Type

5. Complete the screen according to the table below.

The Custom User Properties Fields

The following table describes the custom user properties fields

Required

Description

Title of the property you are adding. For example, Employee ID.

Note: The Title and Label are the same field. On some screens the word Title is used, on others the word Label is used.

More Information

The property’s data type. Once a type is selected and saved, you cannot change it. You must delete the custom property and reenter it.

Forces the user completing the screen to enter a value. If you make the property a requirement, a red asterisk appears next to its label. For example:

”The Type Field” on page 10

Input Type

Validation

Choose how a user is able to enter a response to the property.

Ensures the right type of data is entered in a text box or text area.

”The Input Type Field” on page 11

”Validation” on page 12

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 9

Custom User Properties

Field

Min Value

Max Value

Message

Description

If desired, enter the minimum value you want to allow. The Min

Value only appears when the following Validations are used:

Numeric Only, Date Only and U.S. Zip Code.

The following is an example of a Date Only Min Value: 01/01/1900.

More Information

If desired, enter the maximum value you want to allow. The Max

Value only appears when the following Validations are used:

Numeric Only, Date Only and U.S. Zip Code.

The following is an example of a Date Only Max Value: 01/01/

1987.

A message that appears when information entered in a user property violates the validation criteria.

For example, if the validation is U.S. Zip Code, you might use the following message: Please enter a valid zip code

Types

The Type Field

6. Click the Save button ( ).

7. The new property appears on the View Custom Properties screen.

The following table describes the types available in the Type field.

Description

String

Boolean

Accepts all alpha, numeric, and symbol characters

Accepts a true or false response

Input Types

Available

Text Box

Text Area

Hidden

Check Box

Validations

Available

All validations

See Also:

”Validation” on page 12

None

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 10

Types

Numeric

Accepts numbers only

Date

Description

Only a date can be entered.

SelectList

Multi

SelectList

Category

Select a response from a list of choices.

See Also:

”SelectList Field” on page 14

NA

Select any number of responses from a list of choices. See Also:

”MultiSelectList

Field” on page 16

NA

A system-defined type that appears when the first subscription is created. One entry covers all subscriptions.

See Also:

”Defining Subscriptions” on page 255 .

NA

Input Types

Available

Text Box

Text Box

Custom User Properties

Validations

Available

No Validation

Cannot be blank

Numeric Only

U.S. Zip Code

Dollar Amount

No Validation

Cannot be blank

Date Only

NA

NA

NA

The Input Type Field

The following table describes possible responses to the Input

Type field.

Input Type

Text Box

Description

Creates a standard text box. Below is an example of a text box.

An Option When

Used With

String

Numeric

Date

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 11

Input Type

Text Area

Custom User Properties

Description An Option When

Used With

Creates a multi-lined area for entering text. Typically used when more than one line of text needs to be added. Below is an example.

String

Hidden

Check Box

Hides the input field. This can be used by an administrator to add additional values at postback time. This requires a developer to add client-side JavaScript.

String

Creates a checkbox. Used when the field requires a boolean

(true / false) response. Below is an example of a check box.

=

True = False

Boolean

Validation

Validation

No Validation

Cannot be blank

Numeric Only

Text Only

The following table describes the validations available in the

Validation field.

Description

The entry is not checked.

A response must be entered.

The response must be a number.

The response must be characters.

An Option When

Used With

String

Numeric

Date

String

Numeric

Date

String

Numeric

String

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 12

Custom User Properties

Validation

Date Only

Email Only

Credit Card Only

Social Security

Only

U.S. State Code

U.S. Zip Code

Valid US Phone

Number

Canadian Postal

Code

Time HH:MM or

HH:MM:SS or

HH:MM:SS.mm

IP Address

Description An Option When

Used With

The response must be entered in the following format: mm/ dd/yyyy.

String

Date

The response must be entered as an Email address. For example, [email protected]

String

The response must be entered as a credit card number. For example, nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn

String

The response must consist of nine digits in this pattern: nnnnn-nnnn.

String

A two letter state code. For example: NH = New Hampshire.

String.

The response must consist of 5 (nnnnn) or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth (nnnnn-nnnn).

Note: If you use the Numeric Type, you cannot have a dash or space when using a nine digit Zip Code

String

Numeric

The response must consist of a 10 digits in this pattern: nnnnnn-nnnn.

The response must consist of 6 (xnx nxn) alpha or numeric characters with a space after the first three characters.

String

String

Time is entered in one of the following three formats.

HH:MM - Hours and Minutes 09:30

HH:MM:SS - Hours, Minutes and Seconds 09:30:45

HH:MM:SS.mm - Hours, Minutes, Seconds and milliseconds

09:30:45.002

String

The response must be in the form of an IP address.

String

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 13

Custom User Properties

Validation

Dollar Amount

Canadian Social

Insurance Number

Description An Option When

Used With

This validation works differently depending on the Type used.

If used with the String Type, you can have a dollar sign ($) along with the money amount in the text field.

When used with the Numeric Type, you are not allowed to have a dollar sign ($) in the text field. The following are examples of each type with validation:

String - $3.00

Numeric - 3.00

String

Numeric

The response must consist of nine digits in this pattern (nnn nnn nnn).

String

SelectList Field

Use a SelectList field to present the user completing the User

Information or Membership User Properties screen with a list of choices. See example below.

When you create a custom user property and specify its type to be

Select List, the screen changes as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 14

Custom User Properties

Completing a SelectList Field Entry

To add an item to the list, enter its text in the Text field, then click the Add button. Added items then appear in the larger box on the left.

You can then

remove any item from the list by clicking it. It appears in the

Text field. Click Remove.

change the text of any list item by clicking it. It appears in the

Text field. Make changes then click Change.

change the sequence of list items by selecting an item then clicking the up or down arrow to move the item

Using the First List Item to Prompt a Response

You can use the first list item to prompt the user to make a selection instead of being a valid response. For example, the first list item may say Select from a list of choices. To do this, check the First item is not a valid selection for example, “[Select]” check box.

If you do, the field has an asterisk (*) next to it (indicating it is required) on the User Information and Membership User

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 15

Custom User Properties

Properties screens. The user completing the screen must choose any selection other than the first item. If he tries to file the screen without choosing a different item, the following error message appears:

Please fill in all required fields (*)

MultiSelectList Field

Use a MultiSelectList field to present the user completing the

User Information or Membership User Properties screen with a list of choices. The user can choose as many responses as appropriate. See example below.

Selected items are indicated by a blue background.

When you create a custom user property and specify its type to be

MultiSelect List, the screen changes as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 16

Custom User Properties

For information about completing the screen, see

”Completing a

SelectList Field Entry” on page 15 .

Editing a Custom User Property

When you click a custom user property’s title, you are brought to the Edit Custom Property Screen. From this screen, you can edit and delete a custom property or create a version of the custom property in a non-English language.

When you edit a custom user property, the changes are applied to all users and membership users. These changes are also applied to any other language versions of the custom properties that exist.

To learn how to:

edit a custom user property. See

”Editing a Custom User

Property” on page 17 .

delete a custom property. See

”Deleting a Custom User

Property” on page 18 .

create a custom property for a non-English language. See

”Create a Custom User Property for a Non-English Language” on page 21

.

Editing a Custom User Property

When editing a custom user property, the changes are available to users and membership users when the save button is clicked.

Follow these steps to edit a custom user property.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Click the Title of the Custom User Property you want to edit.

3. Choose the field you want to change. You can edit the following fields:

Label

Required

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 17

Custom User Properties

Input Type

Validation

Min Value

Max Value

Message

For descriptions of these fields, see ”The Custom User

Properties Fields” on page 9

N

OTE

You cannot edit the Type field. If you need to change the type, you must delete the custom user property and create a new one.

W

ARNING

!

If you delete a custom user property, it is removed from all users and membership users. Any information that has been collected about users and membership users for that property will be lost. In addition, any language versions of the custom user property are deleted.

4. Click the Save button ( ).

5. When you click on a user or membership user, you see your changes.

Deleting a Custom User Property

If you delete a custom user property, it is removed from all users and membership users. Any information that has been collected about users and membership users for that property will be lost. In addition, any language versions of the custom user property are deleted.

Follow these steps to delete a custom user property.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Click the Title of the custom user property you want to delete.

3. Click the Delete button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 18

Custom User Properties

A dialog box appears asking if you are sure you would like to delete the item.

4. Click OK.

5. The View Custom Properties screen appears, and the property is no longer available.

Setting the Custom User Properties Order

From the View Custom Properties screen, you can set the order in which the properties appear on the User and Membership Users

Properties screen. To set the custom user properties order, complete these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Click the Reorder button ( ).

3. The Reorder Custom Properties screen appears.

4. Click on a property.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 19

Custom User Properties

5. Click the Up or Down arrows ( ) to move the property up or down the list.

6. Click the Save button ( ).

7. On the View Custom Properties screen, you now see the properties in the new order. If you go to the User or

Membership User Properties screen, the order of the properties there now reflects the changes.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 20

Custom User Properties

Using Custom User Properties for Non-English

Languages

Like content, custom user properties have a language attribute.

This is useful if you have users or membership users that only use a specific language. It can also be used if you want a custom user property to appear in the language in which the user is signed in.

Unless a language other than English is defined for a custom user property, the property defaults to the English version. For example, if you have two properties called Birthday and Phone Number in

English and you can translate the French version of Birthday to

Anniversaire, when you view the properties in French, you see the

English version of Phone Number and the French version of

Birthday.

Create a Custom User Property for a Non-English Language

When creating a custom user property, it must be created in

English then translated to the desired language. This is done by editing the property, changing languages, filling out the Translate

Custom Property Label screen and saving the property.

I

MPORTANT

!

All custom user properties in languages other than English are tied to the English version of the property. If you delete the English version of the property, all other language versions of the properties are deleted also. However, you can remove a non-English language version of the custom properties without deleting the

English version. See

”Removing a Non-English Custom User Property Title” on page 22

The following steps illustrate how to translate the Title/Label of a property into French.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Choose a custom property to be defined in another language.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 21

Custom User Properties

3. Choose a language from the language select dropdown box.

4. The Translate Custom Property Label screen appears.

5. Enter a Label for the property in the language you have chosen. For example, if you are creating a French version of a

Birthday custom user property, you would enter Anniversaire in the label text field. For information on the Label property, see

”Label” on page 9

6. Click the Save button ( ).

Removing a Non-English Custom User Property Title

Removing a non-English version of a custom user property title does not remove the english version of the property. When you remove the non-English version of a property, you are basically removing the label for that specific language in the custom property.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Choose the language in which the custom user property appears from the Language Dropdown Box.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 22

3. Click on the Title you want to delete.

Custom User Properties

4. The Translate Custom Property Label screen appears.

5. Click the Delete button ( ).

6. A dialog box appears asking if you would like to remove the translated custom property title.

7. Click OK.

8. The English version of the Edit Custom Property screen appears.

9. Click the Back button ( ).

W

ARNING

!

Do not click the delete button on the Edit Custom Property screen. This action deletes the English version of the custom user property. If you click the delete button, you lose all information collected by the property and all language versions of the property.

Viewing Custom User Properties By Language

From the View Custom Properties screen, you can view the custom users properties by languages. When viewing by

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 23

Custom User Properties

languages, it is important to remember that if there is only an

English version of the property, the English version appears in all the languages.

All custom user properties, in languages other than English, are tied to the English version of the property. If you delete the English version of the property, all other language versions of the properties are deleted.

To view the custom user properties by language, follow these steps.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Configuration > User

Properties > User Properties.

2. Choose the language in which to view the properties from the language dropdown box.

3. The View Custom Languages screen for that language appears.

N

OTE

In the example below, some properties have not been translated, so the English versions appear instead.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 24

Setting Permissions

S e t t i n g P e r m i s s i o n s

Permissions determine which actions users and members of user groups can perform on content, library items, and content folders.

For example, you allow your Webmaster to perform the most advanced actions, such as adding folders, editing folder properties, and deleting folders. At the same time, you could restrict content contributors to viewing, editing, and adding new content.

You can set permissions for a content folder or content item. If you assign permission to a content folder, it affects all of its subfolders unless you break inheritance for a subfolder.

Permissions are explained though the following topics:

”Who Is Authorized to Set Permissions” on page 25

”Setting Permissions through the Permissions Table” on page 25

”Inheritance” on page 26

”Standard & Advanced Permissions” on page 27

”Setting Permissions for a Content Folder” on page 29

”Setting Permissions for Content” on page 32

Who Is Authorized to Set Permissions

Only Ektron CMS400.NET administrators and users identified on the Manage Members for Role: Folder User Admin screen can set

permissions. See Also: ”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42

Setting Permissions through the Permissions Table

I

MPORTANT

!

All members of the Administrator group are automatically granted all permissions to all Ektron CMS400.NET folders. Although these users do not appear when you view a folder’s permission settings, they have full permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 25

Setting Permissions

You manage the following permissions through the Permission

Table (illustrated below).

Content management: view, add, edit, delete, restore

Library File Management: view, add images, add other types of files, add hyperlinks, overwrite files

Folder management: add, edit, delete, traverse

Work with Collections and Menus

N

OTE

You can use the Roles screens to assign additional permissions that are not defined in the Permission Table, such as the ability to create tasks.

See Also:

”Defining Roles” on page 42

The Permission Table appears when you click the Permission button ( ) from a folder’s or content item’s Properties window.

Inheritance

By default, all content folders and items inherit permissions from their parent folder. You have two options for modifying permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 26

Setting Permissions

Modify the permissions of the parent folder - see

”Setting

Permissions for a Content Folder” on page 29

Break inheritance and add permissions to a folder

Breaking Inheritance

To break inheritance from a parent folder, follow these steps.

1. Access the Permissions Table for a content folder or content in your Workarea, as described in

”Accessing the Permissions

Table” on page 29 .

2. Remove the check mark from the box that says Allow this

object to inherit permissions.

3. A confirmation message appears.

4. Click OK.

Restoring Inheritance

To restore inheritance for a content folder or content, follow these steps.

1. Access the Permissions Table as described in

”Accessing the

Permissions Table” on page 29

.

2. Place a check in the box that says Allow this object to inherit

permissions.

3. A confirmation message appears.

4. Click OK.

Standard & Advanced Permissions

There are two categories of permissions. You assign permissions in each category from a different screen.

Standard Permissions - basic functions

Advanced Permissions - administrator level functions

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 27

Setting Permissions

The following table explains the permissions in Ektron

CMS400.NET.

Category

Standard

Advanced

Permission

Read Only

Edit

Add

Delete

Restore

Library Read Only

Add Images

Add Files

Add Hyperlinks

Overwrite Library

Collections

Add Folders

Edit Folders

Delete Folders

Traverse Folders

Modify Preapproval

Allows user/user group to perform this action on content in selected folder

View content

Edit content

Add content

Delete content

Restore old versions of content

View items in the corresponding library folder

See Also:

”Managing Library Items” on page 115

Upload images to the corresponding library folder

Upload files to the corresponding library folder

Add hyperlinks to the corresponding library folder

Overwrite images and files to the corresponding library folder

Manage collections See Also:

”Collections” on page 423

Add sub folders See Also:

”Adding Subfolders” on page 59

Edit folder properties See Also:

”Folder Properties” on page 42

Delete the current folder or its subfolders

View the subfolders under the main content folder. By default, the everyone user group has permission to view all subfolders.

Set or update a folder’s preapproval group. See Also:

”Automatic Creation of Tasks Associated with Content” on page 301

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 28

Setting Permissions

Setting Permissions for a Content Folder

You can set permissions for any content folder and language from the Folder Properties screen. Here is the Permissions button on the Folder Properties screen.

Accessing the Permissions Table

To access the Permissions Table, follow these steps.

1. Select a folder from the left frame of the Workarea.

2. Select the language whose folder properties you want to update.

3. Click the Folder Properties button ( ).

4. The Folder Properties screen appears.

5. Click the Permissions button ( ).

6. The Permissions Table appears.

The Permissions Table displays each user’s abilities to perform actions on content within the selected folder. Since all permissions cannot fit on one screen, you can click View Advanced

Permissions to see the other group.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 29

Setting Permissions

After viewing the permissions, you can change them. Below is a list of actions you can perform from this screen.

Actions You Can Perform from the Permissions Table

The following table summarizes actions you can perform from the

Permission Table screen.

Action How to perform it

View advanced permissions

Add user or group to permission table

Click View Advanced

Permissions

Click

Remove user or group from permission table

Click

View membership users

Click View MemberShip users

Have this folder inherit permissions from parent folder

Check box next to Allow this

object to inherit permissions

Make content in this folder private

For more information, see

”Standard & Advanced Permissions” on page 27

”Adding a User or User Group to the

Permissions Table” on page 31

”Deleting Users or User Groups from the

Permissions Table” on page 32

”Private Content & Memberships” on page 439

”Inheritance” on page 26

Check box next to The content

in this folder is private and can only be viewed by authorized users and members

Note: If Allow this object to

inherit permissions is checked, you cannot check this box. In that case, this folder is inheriting this setting from its parent folder.

”Private Content” on page 439

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 30

Setting Permissions

Adding a User or User Group to the Permissions Table

To add a user or user group to the Permissions Table, follow these steps.

N

OTE

Before adding users or groups, you must break inheritance. See ”Inheritance” on page 26 .

N

OTE

If a user and the user group to which that user belongs are both given permission to a folder, the user has all permissions to which he/she is assigned as well as permissions assigned to the user group.

N

OTE

You can only assign Read Only permission to a Membership user or user group.

See Also:

”Private Content & Memberships” on page 439

1. Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content,

as described in ”Accessing the Permissions Table” on page 29

.

2. Click the Add button ( ).

3. The Add Permissions screen appears. Only users and groups not assigned to the Permissions Table appear.

4. Click a user or group to add to the Permissions Table.

5. The Add Permissions screen appears.

6. Check the standard and advanced permissions for the user or group. Refer to

”Standard & Advanced Permissions” on page 27

for a description of permission options.

N

OTE

Check Enable All to assign all standard permissions. If you do, you still must assign advanced permissions by hand.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

Editing User or User Group Permissions

To add or remove permissions for a user or group, editing the user or group in the Permissions Table. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content,

as described in ”Accessing the Permissions Table” on page 29

.

2. Click the user or group for which you want to edit permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 31

Setting Permissions

3. The Edit Permissions screen appears.

4. To assign any permission, check the box. To remove any permission, uncheck the box.

N

OTE

Remember to toggle between standard and advanced permissions.

5. Click the Update button ( ).

Deleting Users or User Groups from the Permissions Table

To remove permissions from a user or user group, use the Delete button on the View Permissions window. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Access the Permissions Table for the content folder or content,

as described in ”Accessing the Permissions Table” on page 29

.

2. Click the Delete button ( ).

3. The Remove Permissions screen appears.

4. Click the user or group to remove from the Permissions Table.

5. A confirmation message appears.

6. Click the OK button.

N

OTE

When you delete the permissions of a user or user group, that change is propagated to all subfolders and content. Also, if the user or group was part of an approval chain, they are removed from it.

Setting Permissions for Content

You can assign permissions to a single content item, overriding the default permissions inherited from the folder. To do so, follow these steps.

1. Access the content by navigating to its folder, selecting a language, and clicking on it.

2. Click the View Permissions button ( ).

3. Uncheck the box next to Allow this object to inherit

permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 32

Setting Permissions

4. A confirmation message appears. Press OK.

5. You can perform any action on the content that you can

perform on a folder. These options are described in ”Actions

You Can Perform from the Permissions Table” on page 30

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 33

S e t t i n g A p p r o v a l C h a i n s

Setting Approval Chains

What is an Approval Chain?

An approval chain is a series of users or user groups who must approve content before it can be published on your Web site.

When the last person in the chain approves content, it goes live.

Also, if a user deletes content, before it can be removed from

Ektron CMS400.NET

, everyone in the approval chain must approve the deletion.

An approval chain can include any number of users or user groups.

However, to be eligible, a user or user group must have permissions to the content folder or content item.See Also:

”Setting Permissions” on page 25

N

OTE

If you assign a user group to an approval chain, only one member of the group needs to approve the content, not all members.

Also, if a user appears in an approval chain twice (both as a user and part of a user group), the approval chain skips the second approval because the user has already approved the content.

You can set up an approval chain for a content folder or a content item as well as a language. See Also:

”Multi-Language Approval

Chains” on page 142

Finally, the Approval Method determines if content must be approved by all users in the chain, or only users higher up the chain than the one making the edits.

This chapter explains how to manage approval chains through the following subtopics.

”Examples of Approval Chains” on page 35

”Inheritance and the Approval Chain” on page 35

”Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder” on page 35

”Editing an Approval Chain For Content” on page 39

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 34

Setting Approval Chains

”The Approval Method” on page 40

N

OTE

Only Ektron CMS400.NET administrators and users identified on the Manage

Members for Role: Folder User Admin screen can modify the approval chain.

Examples of Approval Chains

An approval chain lets you control how and when your Web site is updated. For example, if your Webmaster needs to approve every new content item or update of an existing item, he would be last user in every approval chain and exert total control over the site.

Alternatively, you could set up a less centralized organization, where each department head controls his section. To accommodate this, set up an approval chain for each department, and assign the department head as the last person in the chain.

On the opposite extreme, you can delete the approval chain for a content item or folder. In this case, every content item in that folder is published as soon as a user submits it for publication.

Inheritance and the Approval Chain

By default, every content folder and item inherits the approval chain from its parent folder. To modify an approval chain, either modify the parent’s approval chain or break inheritance. This procedure is described in

”Inheritance” on page 26 .

Creating an Approval Chain for a Content Folder

Before you can edit an approval chain, you first have to view it.

See Also:

”Viewing a Folder’s Approval Chain” on page 36

”Adding Approvers” on page 37

”Editing the Approval Order” on page 38

”Deleting Approvers” on page 39

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 35

Setting Approval Chains

Viewing a Folder’s Approval Chain

To view a folder’s approval chain, follow these steps.

1. Select a folder from the left frame of the Workarea.

2. Using the View field and languages drop-down list, select the language of the approval chain you want to view.

3. Click the Properties button ( ).

4. Click the Approvals button ( ).

5. The approval chain appears in the lower section of the screen.

This screen shows the following information about the approval chain.

its language

every user and user group in the approval chain

the approval order

the approval method (See also:

”Changing the Approval

Method” on page 41

)

toolbar buttons for modifying the approval chain and method

Actions You can Perform from the Approvals Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 36

Action

Add approvers

Setting Approval Chains

From this screen, you can perform these actions.

Button See this section for details

”Adding Approvers” on page 37

Remove approvers

Change the order of users in the approval chain

Change the approval method

Change the language of the approval chain

”Deleting Approvers” on page 39

”Editing the Approval Order” on page 38

”Changing the Approval Method” on page 41

Content

Language

”Multi-Language Approval Chains” on page 142

Adding Approvers

To add a user or user group to the approval chain, follow these steps.

1. Access the approval table, as described in

”Viewing a Folder’s

Approval Chain” on page 36

.

2. Select the language of the approval chain. The chain only applies to content in this language.

3. Click the Add button ( ).

4. The Add Approvals screen appears.

N

OTE

Only users and user groups with permissions to the folder appear. See

”Adding a

User or User Group to the Permissions Table” on page 31

for more information.

5. Click the user or user group to add to the approval chain.

6. A confirmation message appears.

7. Click OK.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 37

Setting Approval Chains

N

OTE

If you assign a user group to an approval chain, only one member of the group needs to approve the content, not all members.

Editing the Approval Order

After you assign approvers to a folder, you may want to adjust the approval order. Place the user or group with final review at the end of the approval chain (that is, the highest number).

For example, if you have a content contributor whose edits must be approved by a department head, and the Webmaster has final review of all content, the approval order would look like this.

User or Group Name

Content contributor

Department Head

Webmaster

Approval Order

1

2

3

To edit the approval order, follow these steps.

1. Access the approval table as described in ”Viewing a Folder’s

Approval Chain” on page 36

.

2. Select the language.

3. Click the Reorder button ( ).

4. The Edit Approval Order screen appears.

5. Click the user or group whose approval order you want to change.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 38

6. Click the Up ( ) or Down ( group to the desired order.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

Setting Approval Chains

) arrow to move the user or

Deleting Approvers

N

OTE

If a user in an approval chain is deleted from the permissions table, he or she is automatically deleted from the approval chain.

To delete a user or user group from an approval chain, follow these steps.

1. Access the approval table as described in ”Viewing a Folder’s

Approval Chain” on page 36

.

2. Select the language.

3. Click the Remove button ( ).

4. The Remove Approval screen appears.

5. Click the user or group that you want to remove from the approval chain.

6. A confirmation message appears.

7. Click OK.

Editing an Approval Chain For Content

At times, you may need to change the approval chain for a specific content item. Use the Approvals button ( ) on the View Content screen to change a content item’s approval chain.

Viewing an Approval Chain for Content

To view the approval chain for content, follow these steps.

1. Select the content.

2. Click the View Permissions button ( ).

3. Uncheck the checkbox next to Allow this object to inherit

permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 39

4. Return to the View Content screen.

5. Click the Approvals button ( ).

6. The content’s approvals table appears.

Setting Approval Chains

After viewing the content’s approval chain, you can perform the same actions on it as you can perform on a folder. This list of actions is available from

”Actions You can Perform from the

Approvals Screen” on page 36 .

The Approval Method

The Approval Method determines if content must be approved by all users in the chain, or only users higher up in the chain than the user making the edits. The approval method only affects the approval process if the person submitting content for publishing is a member of the approval chain.

Two approval methods are available.

Approval Method

Force All Approvers

Do Not Force All Approvers

Description

All users in approval chain must approve the content, beginning with the first

Approvers after the user submitting content in the approval chain must approve the content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 40

Setting Approval Chains

For example, assume the approval chain is set as below.

User or Group Name

Content contributor

Department Head

Webmaster

Approval Order

1

2

3

If the Approval Method is Force All Approvers, and the

Department Head submits content, the content must be approved by the content contributor, then the department head, and the

Webmaster before it is published.

If the Approval Method is Do Not Force All Approvers, and the

Department Head submits content, the content must only be approved the Webmaster before it is published.

Changing the Approval Method

By default, the approval method is set to Do Not Force All

Approvers. To change the approval method for a content folder or item, follow these steps.

1. Access the approval table, as described in

”Viewing a Folder’s

Approval Chain” on page 36

.

2. Click the Edit button ( ).

3. The Edit Approval Method screen appears.

4. Select an approval method by clicking the radio button.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 41

Defining Roles

D e f i n i n g R o l e s

Ektron CMS400.NET

contains an Administrators User Group. Any user who is a member of that group automatically has full

administrator privileges. See Also: ”Guidelines for Using The

Folder-User Admin Role” on page 44

The Roles feature lets you assign limited or specific administrator privileges to users who should not have full administrator privileges. For example, you can let certain users create, redirect, or remove tasks but deny them other privileges normally granted to administrators.

Best Practice

When creating new user groups to use with roles, assign names as a mnemonic aid for the role, especially for folder-specific rules. For example, the Marketing Folder Admins user group could be used for all role members who can administer the marketing folder.

N

OTE

The Permissions Table lets you control which users can manage a folder’s properties, its content, library items, and create or edit collections. (

See Also:

”Setting Permissions” on page 25 ) So, together, the Roles feature and the

Permission Table give you the ability to assign administrative privileges to users who are not members of the Administrators group.

This section explains the use of Roles through the following topics.

”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42

”Guidelines for Using The Folder-User Admin Role” on page 44

”List of Administrator Privileges” on page 45

Using the Roles Screens

Use the Roles screens to assign limited administrator privileges.

To access the Roles screens, go to the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Workarea and select Settings > Roles.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 42

Defining Roles

N

OTE

In the screens listed below, you can select users or groups. However, you can never select the Administrators group, because that group already has all permissions.

The following table describes the Roles screens.

Screen

Alias-Edit

Calendar-

Admin

Collection and Menu

Admin

Lets you give a user or user group the ability to

Assign a manual alias to content

Create, edit and delete calendars

Create, edit and delete Collections and Menus via the Modules tab.

Note: To manage permissions for creating collections and menus via the folder’s New > Collection or

New> Menu option, use folder permissions.

See Also:

”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

For more information, see

”Permissions for Manual Aliasing” on page 400

”Calendar Permissions” on page 370

”Collection Permissions” on page 424

Feature” on page 427

;

”Menu

Metadata-

Admin

Business

Rule Editor

Smart Forms

Admin

Task Create

Task Delete

View, create and edit metadata definitions

Create or edit Business Rules and

Rulesets

Create or edit Smart Forms

Create tasks

Delete tasks

Task Redirect

Template

Configuration

User-Admin

Redirect tasks

View, create, update and delete system templates

Create, view, edit, and delete users and user groups

”Metadata” on page 87

”Business Rules” on page 407

”Managing XML Content” on page 126

”Task Permissions” on page 291

”Task Permissions” on page 291

”Task Permissions” on page 291

”Creating/Updating Templates” on page 62

”Managing Users & User Groups” on page 430

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 43

Defining Roles

Screen

XLIFF-Admin

Folder-User

Admin

Custom

Permissions

Lets you give a user or user group the ability to

For more information, see

Use the Language Xport feature, which copies content into XLIFF files that can be submitted to a translation agency.

”Using the Language Export Feature” on page 131

View and edit folder properties.

These users can update properties, permissions, the approval chain, metadata, Web alerts, purge history, etc.

For example, create a user group and give it permission to manage the top-level marketing folder. Members of the group can do everything to that folder and its subfolders, but lack authority over other folders.

See Also:

”Guidelines for Using The

Folder-User Admin Role” on page 44

”Folder Properties” on page 42

Would be used by a developer when extending

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

’s standard features.

Guidelines for Using The Folder-User Admin Role

When setting up users and groups for administrative access over folders, keep these in mind.

After being identified on the Manage Members for Role: Folder

User Admin screen, users or groups must also be given at least Read-Only permission for individual folders on the Folder

Properties > View Permissions for Folder screen. See Also:

”Setting Permissions” on page 25

You must use the same identity on the Manage Members for

Role: Folder User Admin and Folder properties screens. So, if a user group is listed for the role, use the same group when assigning folder permissions, not simply a group member.

Conversely, if individual users are listed on the role screen, they must be specified in the folder permission.

Ektron strongly recommends adding only user groups to the

Folder User Admin role, not individual users.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 44

Defining Roles

If you set up an individual user as a role member, he could accidentally receive administrative rights to other folders.

List of Administrator Privileges

Administrator privileges include access to most screens that appear when you select Settings > Configuration from the lower left panel of the Workarea (illustrated below).

Administrators can also

edit folder properties (including Web alerts, metadata, permissions, and the approval chain)

manually alias content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 45

Defining Roles

add, edit, or delete a calendar

create, view, edit, and delete metadata definitions

create, redirect, and delete tasks

export content for translation to another language using XLIFF

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 46

A c t i v e D i r e c t o r y F e a t u r e

Active Directory Feature

The Active Directory feature allows you to retrieve user and user group information from the Microsoft Windows Active Directory

(AD) into Ektron CMS400.NET. As a result, you can administer user information from one place only, and users need to remember only one password/username combination to sign on to the network and Ektron CMS400.NET.

To learn more about Active Directory, see http:// www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/technologies/directory/ activedirectory/default.mspx.

The Active Directory feature has two implementation modes, described in the following table. Choose the mode that best meets your needs.

Mode

user authentication only

Information Shared between AD and

CMS

How to Implement

user logon name domain

password

On the Active Directory Setup screen, check Enable Active

Directory authentication.

active directory integration

user logon name domain password

user’s first and last name

email address

user groups

user’s group memberships

On the Active Directory Setup screen, check Enable Active

Directory authentication and

Enable Active Directory

integration.

You may also want to check

Enable automatic addition of

user from AD and Enable

automatic addition of user to

groups.

For more information, see

”User Authentication

Only Mode” on page 95

”Active Directory

Integration” on page 49

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 47

Active Directory Feature

W

ARNING

!

To successfully operate Ektron CMS400.NET with Active Directory, the anonymous access user must be running as a domain user account. It cannot be run under a local user account. That domain account can be permission-limited if security is a concern. If anonymous access user is not running as a domain user account, you receive an Automation Error when viewing the Active Directory

Setup page.

After Active Directory is installed correctly, you can view the AD Setup page and click edit, but when you try to save the settings, you receive a User Properties

Verification error. At that point, you must either set up IIS to run as a domain user or the user properties are invalid. The domain user must have query permission into Active Directory so he can retrieve that information.

After you change the user account under which IIS is running, run Net Stop

IISAdmin and Net Start W3SVC from the DOS prompt before trying to save the settings again.

W

ARNING

!

Ektron strongly recommends configuring a secure socket layer (SSL), especially if you are using Active Directory Integration. SSL encrypts passwords that are otherwise sent as clear text to the Ektron CMS400.NET server. See SSL Support in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Setup Manual for more information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 48

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

A c t i v e D i r e c t o r y I n t e g r a t i o n

This chapter covers the following topics:

”How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 49

”Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 50

”Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration” on page 52

”Single Sign On” on page 52

”Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61

”User Groups” on page 64

”The Screens of the Active Directory Feature” on page 71

”Setup Guidelines” on page 90

”Disabling AD Integration” on page 92

How Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET does not write to the AD – it only reads from it. This results in the following changes to how user information is handled within Ektron CMS400.NET.

Once you enable AD integration, all changes to user and user group information must be made in the AD -- the Ektron

CMS400.NET Edit User and User Group screens change to primarily view screens.

When adding a new user or user group toEktron CMS400.NET, you can only select users and groups in the AD. If the user or user group does not exist in the AD, create them there first, and then import the user or group into Ektron CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 49

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Which Information is Transferred from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET accesses the following AD user information.

Field in AD

User logon name (pre-

Windows 2000)

Authentication (password, user logon name, and domain) for signing in to Ektron CMS400.NET.

The password is not stored in Ektron CMS400.NET – the application only refers to the password during sign in.

User information, listed in the following table

AD attribute

Corresponding field in Ektron

CMS400.NET

sAMAccountName Domain and Username

Note: Users can share a name in different domains. For example, juser/planets.com and juser/saturn.com. Otherwise, user names must be unique.

Last Name

First Name

Email sn givenName mail

Lastname

Firstname email Address

user group information, listed in the following table.

Field in AD AD attribute

Group Name (pre-Windows

2000) cn

Corresponding field in Ektron

CMS400.NET

Domain and User group name

Note: User groups can share a name in different domains. For example, editors/ planets.com and editors/saturn.com.

Otherwise, user group names must be unique.

The following diagram illustrates the components of the Active

Directory feature.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 50

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 51

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

A key component of this feature is keeping information in the AD consistent with Ektron CMS400.NET. The next sections explain

”Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration” on page 52

”Associating User Information in AD with Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61

”User Groups” on page 64

”The Screens of the Active Directory Feature” on page 71

Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration

Because usernames and passwords are stored in the AD by domain, the AD sign on procedure requires you to select a domain name. So, if AD integration is enabled, the sign on screen includes a drop-down list that prompts the user to select a domain.

N

OTE

Your organization determines AD domain names.

For more information about logging in, see

”Logging Into an Ektron

CMS400.NET Web Site” on page 6

.

Single Sign On

You can implement a Single Sign On feature that lets a user bypass the Login screen. The feature retrieves the user’s Windows login information from the server to authenticate access to

Ektron

CMS400.NET

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 52

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

How Single Sign on Works

The feature uses a variable called

User.Identity.Name

. This holds the user's account/domain in Active Directory, and has the format

[domain]\[username]

. For example,

EKTRON1\skearney

. This variable is set when a user authenticates against a Windows server.

The user logs in to

Ektron CMS400.NET

by going to the site and clicking the login server control. If the variable is passed and Active

Directory is enabled, the server control opens the autologin.aspx page. Next, the opening window refreshes just like a normal login, except the user is not prompted to enter a username, password, and domain.

However, if the user‘s computer is not on a domain, not on the same domain as

Ektron CMS400.NET

, or does not include the

Ektron CMS400.NET

server as a trusted site, the following login screen appears.

If Active Directory is not enabled, the normal login.aspx page appears.

Setting up Single Sign On

The Single Sign On login process uses two files: autologin.aspx (in the workarea/SSO

directory) and login.aspx (in the workarea

directory).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 53

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Once set up, user authentication is enabled from any domain that this server can reach. For example, if

Ektron CMS400.NET

is located in a third level domain, users from third, second, and first level domains can authenticate.

Setting up Single Sign On involves these procedures.

”Modifying Web.config for Single Sign On” on page 54

”Adjusting Security Settings for the Site Root Folder” on page 54

”Adjusting Security Settings for autologin.aspx” on page 56

”Adjusting Security Settings for login.aspx” on page 59

”Adjusting the Login Server Control” on page 60

After completing these procedures, enable Active Directory within

Ektron CMS400.NET

(if it isn’t already enabled). See Also: ”Setup

Guidelines” on page 90

Ektron recommends turning on the auto add options (user and group).

Modifying Web.config for Single Sign On

1. Open the web.config file, located on your site’s root folder.

2. Find the ek_AUTH_protocol

element.

3. Change its value to GC. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_AUTH_Protocol" value=" GC " />

4. Find the authentication

element.

5. Change the value of the impersonate

attribute to true. It should look like this:

<authentication mode="Windows" />

<identity impersonate=" true " userName="" password=""/>

Adjusting Security Settings for the Site Root Folder

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 54

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

1. Go to Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools >

Internet Information Services.

2. Within IIS, go to Web Sites > Default Web Site > CMS400

example.

3. Right click the CMS400 example folder and select Properties.

4. Click the File security tab then the Edit button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 55

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

5. Uncheck everything except Anonymous Access. The

Account used for anonymous access should specify a domain account, preferably the root of the Active Directory tree.

Adjusting Security Settings for autologin.aspx

1. Go to Windows Control Panel > Administrative Tools >

Internet Information Services.

2. Within IIS, go to Web Sites > Default Web Site > your Web

site’s root folder > Workarea > SSO > autologin.aspx.

3. Right click autologin.aspx and select Properties.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 56

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

4. Click the File security tab and the Edit button.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 57

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

5. Under Authenticated Access, uncheck all except Integrated

Windows Authentication.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 58

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

As a result, autologin.aspx will pass credentials from the logged-in user's desktop.

Adjusting Security Settings for login.aspx

1. Within IIS > Web Sites > Default Web Site > your web site

root > Workarea, right click login.aspx and select Properties.

2. Click the File security tab then the Edit button.

3. Uncheck everything except Anonymous Access. The

Account used for anonymous access should specify a domain account, preferably the root of the Active Directory tree.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 59

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Adjusting the Login Server Control

4. In Visual Studio.NET, open the Login server control and set the

AutoLogin property to True. (Server Controls are explained in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s Manual.)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 60

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Associating User Information in AD with Ektron

CMS400.NET

A key component of the Active Directory Integration feature is to maintain consistent information between the AD and Ektron

CMS400.NET. This section explains the transfer of user information between AD and Ektron CMS400.NET when integration is first enabled and on an ongoing basis.

This section covers the following topics.

”Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61

”When Integration is First Enabled” on page 62

”After Integration is Enabled” on page 63

”Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 63

”Deleting Users” on page 64

”Replacing a User” on page 64

Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET

Before using the AD integration feature, add all AD users that will use your Web site to Ektron CMS400.NET. To copy an AD user into Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.

1. From the left side of the Workarea, click Users.

2. Click the Add Users button ( ).

3. The Search Active Directory for Users screen appears.

4. From the Domain pull-down list, select the domain from which you want to add a user.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 61

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

5. Enter as much information as you know into the other fields.

6. Click the Search button.

7. A new screen displays all users that satisfy the search criteria.

8. Click the check box under the Add column to add users to

Ektron CMS400.NET.

9. Click the Save button ( ).

When Integration is First Enabled

Ektron CMS400.NET Database Already Implemented

If

Enable automatic addition of user from AD

is checked on the Active

Directory Setup screen, user information is copied from the AD to

Ektron CMS400.NET when that user logs in or is added to Ektron

CMS400.NET.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

The first time the user information is copied, the AD information overwrites all Ektron CMS400.NET information. To learn how

information is updated from then on, see ”After Integration is

Enabled” on page 63

.

If two or more AD users have the same Ektron CMS400.NET user logon name but different domains (for example, JDoe in

Eng.Acme.com and JDoe in Mkt.Acme.com) and that username

(JDoe) also exists in Ektron CMS400.NET, the Active Directory

Setup and Active Directory Status screens indicate this discrepancy by the following message:

CMS users need to be associated with Active Directory users.

Click the message to proceed to the Associate Ektron

CMS400.NET Users to Active Directory Users screen and associate an AD user with the Ektron CMS400.NET user.

See Also:

”Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active

Directory Users” on page 81

Ektron CMS400.NET is Being Installed, so No User Database Exists

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 62

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Go to the Search Active Directory for Users Screen and select AD users that will use Ektron CMS400.NET. When you add a user, the user information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400.NET.

See Also:

”The Search Active Directory for Users Screen” on page 86

N

OTE

You can only select AD users that do not already exist in Ektron CMS400.NET.

Also, the Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain.

If it does, you can only search for users within that domain.

After Integration is Enabled

User information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400.NET when either of these events occurs:

the user logs in

someone clicks the Refresh button ( ) on the user’s View

User Information screen

See Also:

”The View User Information Screen” on page 85

If a user’s last name, first name, email field, or group membership changed in the AD, those changes are copied to Ektron

CMS400.NET. However, if a user’s logon name changed in the

AD, that change is not copied to Ektron CMS400.NET because

Ektron CMS400.NET uses that field to identify the user. Instead, that discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and

Active Directory Status screens. You should proceed to the

Associate Ektron CMS400.NET Users to Active Directory Users screen, where you can update the AD user associated with the

Ektron CMS400.NET user.

See Also:

”Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active

Directory Users” on page 81

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET

Because

Ektron CMS400.NET

does not write to the AD, you can only change the User Language and Disable email Notifications fields within the Ektron CMS400.NET Edit User screen. You must edit all other user fields from the AD.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 63

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Deleting Users

If a user is deleted in AD, Ektron CMS400.NET does not automatically delete the user. However, the user’s login fails because he cannot be authenticated.

The user remains in Ektron CMS400.NET, and the discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens. You should delete the user from Ektron CMS400.NET using the Delete User function.

See Also:

”Deleting a User” on page 435

N

OTE

If you mistakenly delete all users with administrative privileges, you can still sign in using the builtin user’s username and password. For more information, see

”BuiltIn User” on page 32

.

Replacing a User

If you associate the wrong AD user with a Ektron CMS400.NET user, you can replace the user. If you do, all Ektron CMS400.NET privileges and workflow responsibilities assigned to the old user transfer to the new one.

Follow these steps to associate a Ektron CMS400.NET user with a new AD user.

1. From the left side of the Workarea, click Users.

2. Click the user you want to replace.

3. Click the Associate CMS User with Different AD User button

( ).

4. Select a user to replace the user you selected in Step 2.

5. Click the Save button ( ).

When you complete this procedure, the first user is deleted from

Ektron CMS400.NET.

User Groups

This section explains how a user’s group membership is copied from the AD to the Ektron CMS400.NET system when integration is first enabled, and then on an ongoing basis. Once assigned to a

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 64

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

group, the user automatically receives all Ektron CMS400.NET privileges and workflow responsibilities associated with it.

N

OTE

The Active Directory has two kinds of user groups: security and distribution.

Ektron CMS400.NET does not distinguish between them – as long as a user is a member of either kind of group, group information is imported to Ektron

CMS400.NET.

This section explains the following topics.

”Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 65

”Associating a User’s AD Group Information with Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 66

”Mapping the Administrator Group” on page 67

”User Belongs to AD Group that Does Not Exist in Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 69

”User Belongs to Ektron CMS400.NET Group that Does Not

Exist in AD” on page 69

”Removing Users from a Group” on page 69

”Adding User Groups” on page 70

”Adding a User to a Group” on page 70

”Replacing a User Group” on page 70

”Deleting a User Group” on page 70

Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET

Before using the AD integration feature, copy all AD groups you will use in your Web site into Ektron CMS400.NET. To copy an AD group into Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.

1. From the left side of the Workarea, click the User Groups folder.

2. Click the Add Groups button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 65

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

The Search Active Directory for Groups screen appears.

3. From the Domain drop-down list, select the domain from which you want to add a user group.

N

OTE

The Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain. If it does, you can only search within that domain.

4. Enter as much information as you know into the Active

Directory Group field.

5. Click the Search button.

6. A new screen displays all groups that satisfy the search criteria.

7. Click the check box under the Add column to add users to

Ektron CMS400.NET.

8. Click the Save button ( ).

Associating a User’s AD Group Information with Ektron

CMS400.NET

When Integration is First Enabled

Ektron CMS400.NET User Database Already Exists

If

Auto Add User To Group

is checked (on the Active Directory Setup screen), a user’s group membership is first copied from the AD to

Ektron CMS400.NET when a user logs in or is added. At this time, any AD group memberships overwrite Ektron CMS400.NET group memberships except the Everyone group, to which all users belong.

N

OTE

The Everyone group, unlike other Ektron CMS400.NET groups, is not associated with an AD group. It is an all-encompassing group with no special permissions.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 66

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

If a user belongs to an AD user group that does not exist in Ektron

CMS400.NET, nothing happens because the feature assumes that all AD groups are not meaningful in Ektron CMS400.NET.

If a user belongs to an Ektron CMS400.NET user group that does not exist in AD, the discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory

Setup and Active Directory Status screens. From these screens, you can copy the AD group information into Ektron CMS400.NET.

See Also:

”Associating User Group Membership with Active

Directory User Group Membership” on page 83 and

”Associating

Groups with Active Directory Groups” on page 84

To learn how membership is updated from then on, see

”After

Integration is Enabled” on page 67

.

Ektron CMS400.NET is Being Installed, so No User Groups Exist

Follow the procedure described in ”Copying User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 65

to copy AD user groups to

Ektron CMS400.NET. As users in those groups are added to

Ektron CMS400.NET, their group membership is copied from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET.

After Integration is Enabled

A user’s group membership is updated in Ektron CMS400.NET when all of the following are true:

The Enable automatic addition of user to groups field is checked on the Active Directory Setup screen

A user is added to Ektron CMS400.NET or his group membership changes in the Active Directory

The user logs in or someone clicks on the Refresh button ( ) on the user’s View User Information screen

Mapping the Administrator Group

On the Ektron CMS400.NET Active Directory Setup screen, you can identify an AD user group that maps to the Ektron

CMS400.NET Administrator group.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 67

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Administrators have access to all functions documented in this documentation. (Unlike other Ektron CMS400.NET user groups, whose names are copied from the AD, the Administrator and

Everyone group names cannot be changed.)

For example, if the AD has a user group named CMSAdmin whose members should have the privileges of Ektron CMS400.NET administrators, assign that group to Administrators on the Active

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 68

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Directory Setup screen. If such a group does not exist in AD yet, you should create it and then assign it on the Active Directory

Setup screen.

Note that only one AD group can be mapped to the Ektron

CMS400.NET Administrator group -- you cannot have an AD administrator group within each AD domain.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

User Belongs to AD Group that Does Not Exist in Ektron

CMS400.NET

If user is assigned to an AD user group that does not exist in

Ektron CMS400.NET, nothing happens. The AD integration feature assumes that an Ektron CMS400.NET administrator only maintains user groups that are meaningful to Ektron CMS400.NET, and not all AD groups may be meaningful to Ektron CMS400.NET.

N

OTE

If a user belongs to a user group that is given Membership permissions, but also to a group that has CMS permissions, the user will only receive Membership permissions if logged into Ektron CMS400.NET.

User Belongs to Ektron CMS400.NET Group that Does Not

Exist in AD

If a user was a member of a user group in Ektron CMS400.NET before integration was enabled, but does not belong to that group in the AD, this discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens.

If the user should belong to the AD group, add the group membership within the AD. Then, refresh the user on these screens to copy AD group information into Ektron CMS400.NET.

See Also:

”Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups” on page 84

Removing Users from a Group

If you delete a user from an AD group, the user is automatically removed from the associated Ektron CMS400.NET group the next time the user’s information is updated (as explained in

”After

Integration is Enabled” on page 63

).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 69

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Adding User Groups

Once AD integration is enabled, you can only add new user groups in the AD. In Ektron CMS400.NET, use the Search Active Directory for Groups screen to copy an AD user group to Ektron

CMS400.NET. You can only add groups that do not already exist in

Ektron CMS400.NET. This procedure is described in ”Copying

User Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 65

.

Adding a User to a Group

You cannot add a user to a user group within Ektron CMS400.NET

-- you must do so in the Active Directory.

Replacing a User Group

If you realize that you have associated the wrong AD user group with an Ektron CMS400.NET user group, you can replace the user group. Follow these steps to do so.

1. From the left side of the Workarea, click User Groups.

2. Click the user group that you want to replace.

3. Click the Associate Ektron CMS400.NET Group with Different

AD Group button ( ).

4. Select a group to replace the group you selected in Step 2.

5. Click the Save button ( ) to finalize the change.

Deleting a User Group

Deleting a User Group in AD

If you delete a user group in AD and users are assigned to the group within Ektron CMS400.NET, the group is not automatically deleted in Ektron CMS400.NET. However, any Ektron

CMS400.NET users who were members of the group are no longer members the next time their Ektron CMS400.NET information is updated. The discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens.

Deleting a User Group in Ektron CMS400.NET

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 70

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

If you delete a user group in Ektron CMS400.NET and users are assigned to that group within AD, nothing happens. This is because the AD Integration Feature assumes that, in Ektron

CMS400.NET, the administrator only sets up user groups that are meaningful to Ektron CMS400.NET, and some AD groups are not meaningful to Ektron CMS400.NET.

The Screens of the Active Directory Feature

The Active Directory feature uses the following screens:

”The Edit Domains Screen” on page 71

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

”The Active Directory Status Screen” on page 80

”The View Users Screen” on page 84

”The View User Groups Screen” on page 87

This section explains how to use each screen.

The Edit Domains Screen

Use this screen to identify each network domain you will use with

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Active Directory feature. You would use this when you want to define domains, as opposed to using auto discovery to find them.

This feature is described through the following subtopics.

”Enabling the Edit Domains Screen” on page 71

”Accessing the Edit Domains Screen” on page 72

”Fields of the Edit Domains Screen” on page 73

”How Domains are Used” on page 74

Enabling the Edit Domains Screen

To have the Edit Domains screen appear, set the following web.config file values as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 71

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

web.config value

ek_ADEnabled ek_ADAdvancedConfig ek_ADUsername ek_ADPassword ek_AUTH_Protocol

Setting

True

True blank (username entered in Edit Domains screen) blank (username entered in Edit Domains screen)

LDAP

Accessing the Edit Domains Screen

After you modify web.config as described above, access the Edit

Domains screen by going to Workarea > Settings >

Configuration > Active Directory > Domains.

Below is a sample of the screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 72

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

The screen lets you add new domains, modify existing ones, or delete obsolete ones.

Fields of the Edit Domains Screen

When defining a domain, enter the following information.

Field

Name

DNS

Description

Enter the name of the domain. Contact your server administrator for this information.

Enter the domain’s DNS. Contact your server administrator for this information. For example, corp.company.com.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 73

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Field

NetBIOS

Username

Password

Server IP

Description

If your NetBios is the same as your domain name, leave the checkbox box checked. Otherwise, uncheck the box and enter your NetBIOS setting. Contact your server administrator for this information.

Enter the name of the user with permission to sign on to the domain server. The name is in the format username@domainDNS. For example,

[email protected].

Enter the password of the user identified above.

Enter the IP address or DNS name of your domain controller.

Note: If using Active Directory across a firewall, the IP address should be that of the firewall. On the firewall, traffic on port 389 (LDAP) should be allowed.

How Domains are Used

Domains defined on this screen are referenced when defining the user group that maps to the hard coded Ektron CMS400.NET administrator group. See Also:

”User Groups” on page 64

While defining the user group, first select a domain.

Ektron

CMS400.NET

creates a selection list of Active Directory user groups in that domain. In this way, you must choose a user group within the selected domain.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 74

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

The Active Directory Setup Screen

The Active Directory Setup screen (illustrated below) lets you enable and disable the Active Directory feature, as well as determine other aspects of AD management, such as whether users and groups are automatically updated. To access the screen, click Settings > Configuration > Active Directory > Setup from the left panel of the Workarea.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 75

.

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

The following table describes the fields on the screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 76

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

See Also:

”Messages Near the Top of the Active Directory Setup

Screen” on page 79

Field Description

Active Directory Installed

Disable Active

Directory and

LDAP

Authentication

Disables the use of Active Directory and LDAP

Authentication.

Enable LDAP

Authentication

If enabled, you need to fill out the following five fields. These fields are explained in the LDAP

Authentication chapter.

LDAP Server

Port

Organization

Domain

Explained in LDAP Authentication chapter.

Explained in LDAP Authentication chapter.

Explained in LDAP Authentication chapter.

Explained in LDAP Authentication chapter.

Organizational

Unit

Explained in LDAP Authentication chapter.

Active Directory

Authentication

If enabled, user authentication is functional, and you can enable the following three fields.

For more information, see

”Disabling AD Integration” on page 92

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”User Authentication Only

Mode” on page 95

For information on LDAP, see

”LDAP Authentication” on page 100

”Active Directory Integration” on page 49

Active Directory

Integration

If enabled, the Active Directory feature is functional.

Can only be enabled if Active Directory

Authentication is enabled.

Auto Add User If enabled, user information is copied from the AD to Ektron CMS400.NET when that user logs in or when the user is added to Ektron CMS400.NET.

Can only be enabled if Active Directory Integration is enabled.

”Associating User Information in AD with Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 61

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 77

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Field

Auto Add User

To Group

Description For more information, see

If enabled, a user’s group membership is first copied from the AD when a user logs in or is added.

Can only be enabled if Active Directory Integration is enabled.

”User Groups” on page 64

User Property Mapping

FirstName Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to the user’s first name in Ektron CMS400.NET. By default, this is set to givenName

, but you can change it to any AD property.

LastName Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to the user’s last name in Ektron CMS400.NET. By default, this is set to sn

, but you can change it to any AD property.

MSDN Library ( http:// msdn.microsoft.com/library/ default.asp

)> Active Directory,

ADSI and Directory Services >

Directory Services > Active

Directory > Active Directory

Reference > Active Directory

User Interface Mappings.

same reference as FirstName

(above)

EmailAddr1 Enter the Active Directory Property that maps to the user’s last name in Ektron CMS400.NET. By default, this is set to mail

, but you can change it to any AD property.

same reference as FirstName

(above)

Ektron CMS400.NET Administrator Group Mapping

AD Group

Name @ AD

Domain

Enter the Active Directory user group and domain name that maps to the hard coded Ektron

CMS400.NET administrator group. If you do not have an AD user group that includes all Ektron

CMS400.NET administrators, you should create one and enter its name and domain here.

”Mapping the Administrator

Group” on page 67

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 78

Field

Domain

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Description

If you want to restrict the search of new users and groups to one AD domain, select that domain.

If you do, the Search Active Directory for Users and Search Active Directory for Groups screens let you search in the selected domain only.

Also, if any Ektron CMS400.NET user or group names include a domain (for example, [email protected]) that is excluded by your selection, those users/groups are flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory

Status screens because the names now include an invalid domain.

For more information, see

Messages Near the Top of the Active Directory Setup Screen

Message

Active Directory Authentication is Enabled and

Requires More Configuration.

Explanation

Some Ektron CMS400.NET users are not associated with AD users. Also, if you are using full active directory integration mode, user groups and/or user group relationships may not be associated.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 79

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Message

Active Directory Authentication is disabled, but needs further configuration

Explanation

Some Ektron CMS400.NET users and/or groups are no longer unique.

This happens because, in the AD, users and groups can share a logon name as long as their domains are different.

But, when AD authentication is disabled, two Ektron

CMS400.NET users or groups can no longer share a name -- each must be unique.

If you see either message, click it. You proceed to the Active

Directory Status screen, which helps you resolve the discrepancies.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Status Screen” on page 80

The Active Directory Status Screen

Use the Active Directory Status screen to resolve the following discrepancies between Ektron CMS400.NET and AD.

an Ektron CMS400.NET user needs to be associated with an

AD user

an Ektron CMS400.NET user group needs to be associated with an AD user group

an Ektron CMS400.NET user’s group membership need to be associated with the same AD user’s group membership

To access the screen, click Configuration > Active Directory >

Status from the left panel of the Workarea.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 80

.

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

There are several reasons why such discrepancies may occur. To learn more about why

an Ektron CMS400.NET user is not associated with an AD

user, read ”Associating User Information in AD with Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 61

.

an Ektron CMS400.NET user’s group membership is not associated with the user’s AD group membership, read

”Associating a User’s AD Group Information with Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 66

an Ektron CMS400.NET group is not associated with an AD group, read

”User Groups” on page 64

If you click any link on the Active Directory Status screen, a new screen appears that allows you to resolve the discrepancy. For information on how to use these screens, see the following topics.

”Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active Directory

Users” on page 81

”Associating User Group Membership with Active Directory

User Group Membership” on page 83

”Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups” on page 84

Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active Directory Users

If you click CMS users need to be associated with Active

Directory users on the Active Directory Status screen, the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 81

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Associate Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active Directory Users screen appears (illustrated below). Use this screen to associate

Ektron CMS400.NET users with AD users.

If a user with the same username exists in the AD, that name and domain appear by default in the AD Username and AD Domain fields. If the user exists in the more than one AD domain (as illustrated in the first example above), select a domain from the pull-down list.

If there is no default and you know the AD user name to associate with an Ektron CMS400.NET user, enter that in the AD Username and AD Domain fields. If you do not know the AD username, click

Search to find the user in the AD.

If you decide to change the username in AD to match the Ektron

CMS400.NET username, make the change in the AD. Then, click the Refresh button ( ) to update Ektron CMS400.NET and resolve the discrepancy.

Finally, if this user should not exist in the Ektron CMS400.NET database, click the box under the Delete column to delete the user from Ektron CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 82

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

After you make all necessary changes, click the Save button ( ) to save them.

Associating User Group Membership with Active Directory User Group

Membership

If you click CMS relationships need to be associated with

Active Directory relationships on the Active Directory Status screen, the Associate Ektron CMS400.NET Relationships with

Active Directory Relationships screen appears (illustrated below).

Use this screen to coordinate Ektron CMS400.NET user group membership with AD user group membership.

The screen displays a user’s group membership that exists in

Ektron CMS400.NET, but does not exist in the AD.

See Also:

”Associating a User’s AD Group Information with Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 66

After viewing the discrepancy on the screen, you have two choices:

To associate the user with the same user group in the AD, go to the AD and assign the user to the group. Then, return to this screen and click the Refresh button ( ) to update the user group information in Ektron CMS400.NET.

To remove the user’s group membership in Ektron

CMS400.NET, check the box under the Delete column and click the Save button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 83

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Associating Groups with Active Directory Groups

If you click CMS groups need to be associated with Active

Directory groups on the Active Directory Status screen, the

Associate Ektron CMS400.NET User Groups with Active Directory

Groups screen appears (illustrated below). Use this screen to associate Ektron CMS400.NET groups with AD groups.

If a group with the same groupname exists in the AD, that name appears by default in the AD Group Name field. If the group exists in the more than one domain within the AD, select a domain from the pull-down list.

If there is no default and you know the AD group name to associate with an Ektron CMS400.NET group, enter that in the AD

Group Name and AD Domain fields. If you do not know the AD groupname, click Search to find the group in the AD.

Finally, if this group should not exist in the Ektron CMS400.NET database, click the box under the Delete column to delete the group from Ektron CMS400.NET.

After you make all necessary changes, click the Save button ( ) to save them.

The View Users Screen

The View Users screen (illustrated below) lists all users in the

Ektron CMS400.NET database. To access the screen, click Users

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 84

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

from the left panel of the Workarea. To view more information for a user, click that user to move to the View User Information screen.

The View Users screen also provides a toolbar button ( ) that lets you add AD users to the Ektron CMS400.NET database. When you click it, the Search Active Directory for Users Screen appears.

The View User Information Screen

The View User Information Screen displays the user’s

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 85

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

username and domain

first and last name

language

email address and whether the user receives email notifications

user groups

If you are using user authentication mode, username and domain can only be edited in the AD. You can edit all other fields on this screen.

If you are using full AD Integration mode, you can only edit

language and whether the user receives email notifications. You must edit the other fields in the AD.

The screen also displays the following buttons.

Button Description

Edit information on screen

Delete user

See Also:

”Deleting Users” on page 64

Retrieve latest information from AD into Ektron

CMS400.NET

See Also:

”After Integration is Enabled” on page 63

Note: This toolbar button does not appear if you are using user authentication mode.

Replace user

See Also:

”Replacing a User” on page 64

Return to previous screen

The Search Active Directory for Users Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 86

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

Use this screen to add AD users to Ektron CMS400.NET. To access the screen, click Users from the left panel of the Workarea, then click the Add button ( ).

Enter as much search criteria as you know to reduce the number of users that the search yields. For example, if you know that the user’s last name is Jackson and the user is in the planets domain, enter those criteria and you will get fewer hits.

When the Active Directory Users screen appears, click the box next to users that you want to create in Ektron CMS400.NET.

Then, click the Save button ( ) to copy their information into

Ektron CMS400.NET.

The View User Groups Screen

The View User Groups Screen displays all AD user groups that have been copied into Ektron CMS400.NET. (See

”Copying User

Groups from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 65 ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 87

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

To access the screen, click User Groups from the left panel of the

Workarea.

To view more information for a group, click that group to move to the View Users in Group screen.

The View User Groups screen also provides a toolbar button ( ) that lets you add AD groups to the Ektron CMS400.NET database.

When you click it, the Search Active Directory for Groups screen appears.

View Users in Group Screen

The View Users in Group Screen displays, for each user in the group

username and domain

first and last name

language

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 88

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

The screen also displays the following buttons.

Button Description

Replace group

See Also:

”Replacing a User Group” on page 70

Return to previous screen

The Search Active Directory for Groups Screen

Use this screen to add AD groups to Ektron CMS400.NET. Enter as much search criteria as you know to reduce the number of groups that the search yields.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 89

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

N

OTE

You can only select AD groups that do not already exist in Ektron CMS400.NET.

Also, the Active Directory Setup screen can restrict AD integration to one domain.

If it does, you can only search for groups within that domain.

For example, if you know that the group begins with S and is in the planets domain, enter those criteria and you will get fewer hits.

After you click Search, a new screen appears listing all AD groups that satisfy the search criteria. Click the box next to groups that you want to create in Ektron CMS400.NET. Then, click the Save button

( ) to copy their information.

Setup Guidelines

1. Make sure the users and user groups in Active Directory are defined correctly. Remember that, when you enable AD integration, first name, last name and email are copied from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET.

2. Determine which AD users and groups will be used in Ektron

CMS400.NET.

3. Try to match up names. For example, if a user in Ektron

CMS400.NET has the username of jsmith, but that user in AD has a username of john.smith, rename the user in Ektron

CMS400.NET or in Active Directory so they match. This can be done during the actual integration, but doing it beforehand simplifies the process later.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 90

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

4. Determine which users should be in which groups, and make sure those relationships exist in both Ektron CMS400.NET and

AD.

5. If your Active Directory Forest has multiple domains, decide if

Ektron CMS400.NET should reference all domains or a specific one. (You will use this information when setting up domains.)

6. Determine if you want users to be added automatically upon log in or you want to manually add them yourself. (You will use this when completing the Enable automatic addition of user

from AD field of the Active Directory Setup Screen.)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 91

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

7. Determine if you want user groups to be associated upon log in or if you want to manually associate them. (You will use this when completing the Enable automatic addition of user to

groups field of the Active Directory Setup Screen.)

8. Set the following elements in the Web.config.

-

For the authentication

element, change the value of the impersonate

attribute to true. It should look like this:

<identity impersonate=" true " userName="" password=""/>

-

Set the ek_ADEnabled

element to true. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_ADEnabled" value="true"/>

-

Set the ek_AUTH_Protocol

element to GC. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_AUTH_Protocol" value="GC"/>

-

You can either set the anonymous access user for your application to a domain account, or declare the domain account to use through ek_adusername

and ek_adpassword

. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_ADUsername" value="[username]@domain" />

<add key="ek_ADPassword" value="YourPasswordHere" />

Disabling AD Integration

If you decide to disable AD authentication or integration, edit the

Active Directory Setup screen and uncheck the box next to Enable

Active Directory Authentication or Enable Active Directory

Integration.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

If you do this, and any users or groups share the same name within different domains, the following message appears on the screen.

Active Directory Authentication is disabled, but needs further configuration

For example, two users are named [email protected] and

[email protected] When AD was enabled, the domain names made the two users unique. However, when you disable

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 92

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

integration, the domain names are dropped, so the user names are now identical. You need to make the users unique.

If you click the message (above) on the Active Directory Setup screen, you move to the Active Directory Status screen. The following messages may appear.

Click the message to proceed to the Make Ektron CMS400.NET

Users Unique screen (illustrated below).

This screen lists all users whose user names are not unique and suggests a new, unique Ektron CMS400.NET username. The new name consists of the user name, underscore, at sign (@), underscore, the domain name. So, for example,

[email protected] would appear as [email protected]_saturn.com.

The same is true for user groups. For example, if you had two groups name Account Operators, one in the planets.com domain

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 93

Active Directory IntegrationActive Directory Feature

and another in the saturn.planets.com domain, the Make Ektron

CMS400.NET Groups Unique screen would look like this.

Ektron recommends that you accept the suggested new names.

Click the Save ( ) button to do so.

One advantage of using the new name format is that, if you later decide to re-enable AD integration, the software can automatically associate the AD and Ektron CMS400.NET users or groups.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 94

User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature

U s e r A u t h e n t i c a t i o n O n l y M o d e

How Information is Transferred from Active

Directory to Ektron CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET does not write to the AD – it only reads from it. This results in the following changes to how the username, domain, and password are handled within Ektron CMS400.NET.

Changes to user logon name, domain and password must be made in the AD — you cannot update these fields in the Ektron

CMS400.NET Edit User screens.

When adding a new user to Ektron CMS400.NET, you can only select AD users. If the user does not exist in the AD, create the user there, and then import the user into Ektron CMS400.NET.

Which Information is Transferred from Active

Directory to CMS400.NET

CMS refers to the following AD sign-in authentication information during sign-in: password, user logon name, and domain. Note that the password is not stored in CMS — CMS only refers to the password during sign-in.

Logging In

See

”Logging into a System that Uses AD Integration” on page 52

Adding User Information from AD to Ektron

CMS400.NET

See ”Adding User Information from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 61

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 95

User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature

Changing the User Login Name in AD

If a user’s logon name changes in the AD, it no longer matches the

Ektron CMS400.NET logon name. This discrepancy is flagged on the Active Directory Setup and Active Directory Status screens.

You should proceed to the Associate Ektron CMS400.NET Users to Active Directory Users screen, where you can update the user information.

Alternatively, you could

1. Go to the View User Information screen.

2. Select the user whose AD name changed.

3. Click the Associate the Ektron CMS400.NET user with

Different AD user toolbar button ( ).

4. Select the AD user and domain.

See Also:

”Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active

Directory Users” on page 81

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET

Ektron CMS400.NET does not write to the AD. This means that you can only change the Username and Domain fields from the

AD.

You can change the First Name, Last Name, email Address,

User Language and Disable email Notifications fields on the

Ektron CMS400.NET Edit User screen.

Deleting Users

See

”Deleting Users” on page 64

Replacing a User

See

”Replacing a User” on page 64

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 96

User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature

I

MPORTANT

!

If you replace a user in user authentication-only mode, the user’s first name, last name, and email address are not overwritten with information in the active directory.

User Groups

User authentication mode has no effect on user groups. To learn

more about user groups, see ”Managing User Groups” on page 436 .

The Screens of the Active Directory Feature in

User Authentication Mode

Since the scope of user authentication mode is limited, only some fields on the AD screens are used. For example, on the Active

Directory setup screen, the only relevant fields are authentication and domain.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

Also, on the Active Directory Status Screen, only one discrepancy message may appear:

CMS user needs to be associated with an AD user

See Also:

”Associating Ektron CMS400.NET Users with Active

Directory Users” on page 81

The View Users Screen works the same for both modes.

See Also:

”The View User Information Screen” on page 85

Setup Guidelines

1. Make sure each AD user to be used in Ektron CMS400.NET is defined correctly in the Active Directory. Remember that, when you enable AD integration, logon name and domain are copied from AD to Ektron CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 97

User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature

2. Try to match up names. For example, if an Ektron

CMS400.NET user’s username is jsmith, but that user’s AD username is john.smith, rename the user in Ektron

CMS400.NET or Active Directory so they match. While you can match user names when authentication is enabled, doing it beforehand simplifies the process.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 98

User Authentication Only ModeActive Directory Feature

3. If you have multiple domains in your Active Directory Forest, decide if you want Ektron CMS400.NET to reference all domains or if you want to choose a specific one. (You will use this when completing the Domain field of the Active Directory

Setup Screen.)

4. Set the following elements in the Web.config.

-

For the authentication

element, change the value of the impersonate

attribute to true. It should look like this:

<identity impersonate=" true " userName="" password=""/>

-

Set the ek_ADEnabled

element to true. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_ADEnabled" value="true"/>

-

Set the ek_AUTH_Protocol

element to GC. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_AUTH_Protocol" value="GC"/>

-

You can either set the anonymous access user for your application to a domain account, or declare the domain account to use through ek_adusername

and ek_adpassword

. It should look like this:

<add key="ek_ADUsername" value="[username]@domain" />

<add key="ek_ADPassword" value="YourPasswordHere" />

Disabling AD Authentication

See

”Disabling AD Integration” on page 92

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 99

LDAP Authentication

L D A P A u t h e n t i c a t i o n

LDAP is short for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. It is a set of protocols that enable corporate directory entries to be arranged in a hierarchical structure which reflects geographic and organizational boundaries.

Ektron CMS400.NET’s LDAP feature lets you retrieve user Login information from an LDAP server to Ektron CMS400.NET. As a result, you can administer user information from one place, and users only need to remember one password/username combination to sign on to the network and Ektron CMS400.NET.

The hierarchical structure of LDAP authentication can look a few different ways. For example, if you had the following LDAP structure, the domain would typically span multiple countries.

N

OTE

Here is a list of the abbreviations: CN = Common Name, OU = Organizational

Unit, O = Organization, DN = Distinguished Name.

CN=David Wells, OU=Pitchers, O=Red Sox, C=US,

DN=Baseball.com

By changing the order of C and DN, the hierarchy indicates that the domain Baseball.com is located in the US.

CN=David Wells, OU=Pitchers, O=Red Sox, DN=Baseball.com,

C=US.

I

MPORTANT

!

The hierarchical structure makes a difference when entering information in Ektron

CMS400.NET.

Below is a visual example of an LDAP hierarchical structure.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 100

LDAP Authentication

This chapter covers the following topics:

”Using LDAP with Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 101

”LDAP Screen Descriptions” on page 111

”Disabling LDAP Authentication” on page 115

Using LDAP with Ektron CMS400.NET

N

OTE

Active Directory and LDAP are not the same. While they can perform some similar functions, LDAP when used with Ektron CMS400.NET only verifies user login information and creates the user in the everyone group. Active Directory can can be used to verify user login information only or it can become completely integrated with Ektron CMS400.NET. To learn more about using Active Directory with Ektron CMS400.NET, see

”Active Directory Feature” on page 47

The following sections explain how to use LDAP with Ektron

CMS400.NET.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 101

LDAP Authentication

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

”Adding an Organizational Unit During Setup” on page 105

”Adding User Information from an LDAP Server to Ektron

CMS400.NET” on page 106

”Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 110

”Deleting Users” on page 111

Enabling LDAP

You enable LDAP through the Active Directory Setup screen. To enable the LDAP functionality in Ektron CMS400.NET, follow these steps.See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 111

I

MPORTANT

!

Before enabling LDAP in Ektron CMS400.NET, make sure your LDAP server is set up and ready for use. Be sure to include an Ektron CMS400.NET administrator account for yourself. Once you enable LDAP, the only account available to access Ektron CMS400.NET without LDAP authentication is the

BuiltIn account. For more information on the BuiltIn account, see ”BuiltIn User” on page 32 .

1. In the webroot\CMS400Demo\web.config

file, change the following line:

<add key="e" value=" None "/> becomes

<add key="ek_AUTH_Protocol" value=" GC "/>

2. Save and close the

Web.config

file.

3. In the Workarea, navigate to the Settings > Configuration >

Active Directory > Setup screen.

4. Click the Edit button ( ).

5. On the Active Directory Setup screen, choose Enable LDAP

Authentication.

6. Fill in the following fields.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 102

LDAP Authentication

Field

Type

LDAP Server

Port

Organization

Domain

Organizational Unit

Description For more information, see

Choose the type of LDAP authentication you are using.

Note: Depending on your choices, the fields below may be required or disallowed.

The following choices are available:

Active Directory (LDAP) - Domain allowed, Organization is not.

Novell eDirectory/NDS - Organization allowed,

Domain is not.

Sun Iplanet/JSDS - Domain allowed, Organization is not.

Other - Allows both Domain and Organization

”Using Active Directory for LDAP” on page 104

The IP Address or name of the LDAP server

The LDAP server port that Ektron CMS400.NET communicates with.

If you are unsure, consult the documentation provided with your Directory Service (such as, Novell, iPlanet,

Microsoft, or Red Hat).

The name of your company or organization. For example, Ektron, Inc.

This field can be blank if you enter a domain in the

Domain field.

The name of the domain you are using. For example, www.ektron.com. This should be the same name you used when you received your license key.

This field can be blank if you enter an organization in the Organization field.

The next levels below your Organization or Domain.

These can include multiple levels of Organizational

Units. For example, Content Editors, Marketing, East

Coast.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 103

Field

Add

Delete

LDAP Authentication

Description For more information, see

Enter your the Organizational Units in the text field and click the Add link.

When adding Organizational Units, the paths are comma separated and run from specific to general.

For example, Content Editors, Marketing, East Coast.

Do not add individual Common Names here. Only add

Organizational Units that contain the people who should have access to Ektron CMS400.NET.

”Adding an

Organizational Unit

During Setup” on page 105

To add a single individual from a different

Organizational Unit, see

”Adding User Information from an LDAP Server to

Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 106

Choose any Organizational Unit from the multiselection box and click the Delete link.

7. Click the Save button ( ).

Using Active Directory for LDAP

In the webroot\CMS400Demo\Web.Config

file, add the Username and

Password for ek_ADUsername

and ek_ADPassword

. For example:

<add key="ek_ADUsername" value="[email protected]" />

<add key="ek_ADPassword" value="mypasswordisthis" />

When using LDAP to connect to Active Directory, use the following settings in the Workarea.

N

OTE

LDAP using AD is NOT the same as AD integration. LDAP integration

(independent of server type) does not support groups, only user authentication.

Field

Type

LDAP Server

Needed Information

Active Directory (LDAP)

[IP Address of the AD domain controller]

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 104

Field

Port

Organization

Domain

Organizational Unit

LDAP Authentication

Needed Information

389

[leave this blank]

[dns name of the AD domain]

For example: intra.ektron.com

[any OUs that you want to draw users from]

For example: Support,Users,Ektron Corporate also

Engineering,Users,Ektron Corporate

Adding an Organizational Unit During Setup

Things to consider when adding Organizational Units are:

Should everyone in the OU have access to Ektron

CMS400.NET?

Once LDAP is enabled, users are added to the everyone group upon login. While everyone in the OU has access to Ektron

CMS400.NET, every user does not necessarily have permission to edit content. To control permissions, set up user groups, adding each user to a group, and assigning permissions to the group. For more information on user groups,

see ”Managing Users & User Groups” on page 430

. For more

information on assigning permissions, see ”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

.

Do users in other Organizational Units need access?

Sometimes, managers or editors are in a different OU. They need to be added manually, or you need to add their OU.

When adding an Organizational Unit, several entries might cover the same hierarchical path. For example, you might have:

Pitchers,Players,Red Sox

Players,Red Sox

Red Sox

This allows you to authenticate users listed in Pitchers, Players, and Red Sox.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 105

LDAP Authentication

Adding User Information from an LDAP Server to Ektron

CMS400.NET

There are three ways to add LDAP user information to Ektron

CMS400.NET.

Have the user log in after LDAP is enabled. As a result, the user appears in the Users list and is added to the Everyone group.

N

OTE

After a user logs in, some fields on the Add User screen can be filled in manually,

such as first and last name. For a description of these fields, see ”Fill out the fields according to the table below.” on page 107

.

Add the user’s LDAP information manually. See Also: ”Steps to

Manually Add an LDAP User” on page 106 .

A combination of browsing for the user, then manually completing the remaining fields

Steps to Manually Add an LDAP User

The following steps explain how to add an LDAP user manually.

1. Enable LDAP by following the instructions in

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102 .

2. From the left side of the Workarea, click Users.

3. Click the Add Users button ( ).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 106

LDAP Authentication

4. The Add a New User to the System screen appears.

Field

Username

Organization

Organizational Unit

Domain

First Name

Last Name

Fill out the fields according to the table below.

Description

The username of the person logging in, as found on the LDAP server.

The name of your company or organization. For example, Ektron,

Inc.

The next levels below your Organization. These can include multiple levels of Organizational Units. For example, Content Editors,

Marketing, East Coast.

The name of the domain you are using. For example, www.ektron.com.

This should be the same name you used when you received your license key. This field can be blank if you enter a organization in the

Organization field.

The first name of the user.

The last name of the user.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 107

Field

User Language

E-Mail Address

Disable Email

Notification

LDAP Authentication

Description

Select the language in which the user will view Ektron CMS400.NET screens and messages. The language also determines the default value whenever a drop-down list of languages appears within Ektron

CMS400.NET.

The dropdown list of choices at this field is derived from the

Language Settings screen, available from the Settings >

Configuration folder.

Do not confuse the system language with the user’s ability to create and edit foreign editions of content. This field does not prevent a user from working with multiple language content.

See Also:

”Multi-Language Support” on page 116

Note: If the selected language is not English, French or German, it is only supported after you download the Ektron CMS400.NET

Language Support Program from Ektron and translate the Web site.

Enter the email address of the user.

Select to disable email notifications for this user. If you do, the user will not receive the automatic email notification described in

”Automatic eMail Notification” on page 296 . However, this field has

no effect on the user’s ability to receive instant email.

5. Click Save ( ) to add LDAP users to Ektron CMS400.NET.

6. The View Users in Group Everyone screen appears, displaying the new user and the other Ektron CMS400.NET users.

Using the Browse Feature to Add an LDAP User

The Browse LDAP feature provides a more friendly and intuitive way to find the username, domain/organization and organizational unit(s).

I

MPORTANT

The default server IP/DNS name and port are taken from the settings specified in the Configuration > Setup page. These settings must be specified before connecting to the LDAP server. See Also:

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

I

MPORTANT

An Organizational Unit that can see the user to be added must be specified in the

Configuration > Setup page before using the browse feature. See Also:

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 108

LDAP Authentication

1. Enable LDAP by following the instructions in

”Enabling LDAP” on page 102 .

2. From the left side of the Workarea, click Users.

3. Click the Add Users button ( ).

4. The Add a New User to the System screen appears.

5. Click the Browse LDAP button ( ).

6. The LDAP Explorer appears.

Navigate the LDAP server’s folders by clicking on the folder images. Each folder represents an Organizational Unit (OU).

When you choose an OU level, its users appear.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 109

LDAP Authentication

N

OTE

In the LDAP Explorer, the Path and Org/Domain fields update dynamically as you navigate through the LDAP tree.

7. Select a user.

8. The Add User screen appears with the Username,

Organization or Domain (depending on your LDAP service), and Organizational Unit fields completed.

9. Complete the remaining information by using the table in the

”Steps to Manually Add an LDAP User” on page 106 section.

10. Click Save ( ) to add the LDAP user.

11. The View Users in Group Everyone screen appears, displaying the new user and the other Ektron CMS400.NET users.

Editing User Information in Ektron CMS400.NET

It is important to note that

Ektron CMS400.NET

does not write to the

LDAP server. So, while you can change any fields when editing a user in Ektron CMS400.NET, you also need to make these changes in the LDAP server.

Steps to Edit an LDAP User’s Information

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 110

LDAP Authentication

The following steps explain how to edit an LDAP user’s information.

1. In the Workarea, click Settings > Users.

2. In the Username column, click a user to edit.

3. The View User Information screen appears.

4. Click the Edit button (

)

.

5. Change the information as needed. For more information on

the fields you can edit, see ”Fill out the fields according to the table below.” on page 107 .

6. Click Save ( ).

Deleting Users

If a user is deleted in an LDAP server, Ektron CMS400.NET does not automatically delete the user. However, the user’s login fails because he cannot be authenticated.

In this case, you should delete the user from Ektron CMS400.NET using the Delete User function. See Also:

”Deleting a User” on page 435

N

OTE

If you mistakenly delete all users with administrative privileges, you can still sign in using the builtin user’s username and password. For more information, see

”BuiltIn User” on page 32

.

LDAP Screen Descriptions

The LDAP feature uses the following screens:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 111

”The View Users Screen” on page 112

This section explains how to use each screen.

The Active Directory Setup Screen

The Active Directory Setup screen (illustrated below) lets you enable and disable the Active Directory or LDAP features, as well as determine other aspects of AD management, such as whether

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 111

LDAP Authentication

users and groups are automatically updated. To access the screen, click Configuration -> Active Directory -> Setup from the left panel of the Workarea.

For a description of the fields, see the Active Directory section

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 75

.

The View Users Screen

The View Users screen (illustrated below) lists all users in the

Ektron CMS400.NET database. To access the screen, click Users

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 112

LDAP Authentication

from the left panel of the Workarea. To view more information for a user, click that user to move to the View User Information screen.

The View Users screen also provides a toolbar button ( ) that lets you add LDAP users manually to the Ektron CMS400.NET database. This is useful if you want to add a single user from an

Organization that is does not have the same Organizational Unit as the rest of your users, and you do not want to add any other users from that Organization.

The View User Information Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 113

LDAP Authentication

The View User Information Screen displays the user’s

username

organization

organizational unit

domain

first and last name

language

email address and whether the user receives email notifications

user groups

user properties (if any)

The screen also displays the following buttons.

Button Description

Edit information on screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 114

Button

LDAP Authentication

Description

Delete user

See Also:

”Deleting Users” on page 111

Return to previous screen

Launches a help screen

Disabling LDAP Authentication

If you decide to disable LDAP authentication or integration, edit the

Active Directory Setup screen and select Disable Active

Directory and LDAP Authentication.

See Also:

”The Active Directory Setup Screen” on page 111

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 115

M u l t i - L a n g u a g e S u p p o r t

There are several aspects to translating within

Ektron

CMS400.NET

. They are listed below.

Type of Translation

Content

Spell check dictionary

Special Character Encoding

Seen by

Content contributors; visitors to your site

Visitors to your site

Visitors to your site

Workarea screen labels, alt text, system messages

Content contributors

For more information, see

”Working with Multi-Language

Content” on page 116

”Set the Language of Spell

Checking” on page 153

”Character Encoding” on page 153

”Translating the Workarea” on page 153

Working with Multi-Language Content

Ektron CMS400.NET

supports the creation of content in any language supported by the Unicode standard. This section explains how to create and work with content in any language.

Overview

First, determine the languages in which your site’s content should appear (see

”Determining Which Languages are Available” on page 120 ). Then, for any content, you can provide editions in each

supported language.

To provide multi-language content, you can either create new content or copy and edit existing content. For example, you can begin the creation of German content by copying English content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 116

into it, then translating that content into German and deleting the

English content.

All editions of content have the same ID number but are differentiated by the language attribute. As a result, your Web page template can link to a single content item, but what is displayed is determined by the selected language. There are two ways that content’s language can be selected:

a language cookie, which is created when a visitor enters your site and selects a language

the link to another page includes the language ( langType

) parameter. For example, mytemplate.aspx?LangType=1033

.

N

OTE

For a list of the decimal values for each supported language, see ”Appendix A:

List of Supported Languages” on page 357 .

The View Contents of Folder screen’s View field lets you choose a language then view and create content in that language. You can also view all content in the folder, regardless of language. This field makes to easy to find and work on content editions in a selected language.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 117

The View Contents of Folder screen also displays the language of each content item. This helps you distinguish them when viewing all content.

Finally, you can set up a separate approval chain for each edition of a content, and can assign collections and tasks in any supported language.

This section describes how to work with a multiple language Web site through the following topics.

”Enabling/Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content” on page 118

”Viewing Your Site in Another Language” on page 119

”Determining Which Languages are Available” on page 120

”The Default Language” on page 123

”Creating New Content” on page 124

”Translating Content” on page 125

”Additional Multi-Language Topics” on page 141

”Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site” on page 144

”Using a Language Other than American English as the

Default” on page 148

”Resolving Conversion Issues” on page 148

Enabling/Disabling Support for Multiple Language Content

Support for multi-language content is enabled in the web.config file. To enable or disable it, follow these steps.

1. Open the file webroot\yourwebsite\web.config

.

2. To enable multi-language content, set the value of ek_EnableMultilingual to 1. To disable it, set it to zero (0).

3. Save and close web.config.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 118

Viewing Your Site in Another Language

It’s easy for your site visitors to view your site in any enabled language. On any screen, your developer can display a language drop-down list (circled in red below).

(For more information about the function used to display this, ecmShowSiteLanguage, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer’s

Manual.) On the sample site provided with

Ektron CMS400.NET

, this drop-down list appears in the lower right corner of the home page, but your developer can place it anywhere on any page.

Another way to indicate which language-edition of content to display is by adding the language parameter ( langType

) to the

Quicklink. For example, products.aspx?LangType=1033

displays the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 119

English (US) edition of the products.aspx content. This syntax automatically sets the language cookie.

N

OTE

For a list of the decimal values for each supported language, see ”Appendix A:

List of Supported Languages” on page 357 .

See Also:

”What Happens if Chosen Language is Not Available” on page 120

What Happens if Chosen Language is Not Available

A visitor to your site uses one of the methods listed above to select a language.

Ektron CMS400.NET

uses the following criteria to determine which language edition to display for content.

1. If an edition of the content is available in the selected language, display that.

2. If option 1 is not available, display an edition of the content in the default language (defined in the ek_DefaultContentLanguage variable in web.config).

N

OTE

When

Ektron CMS400.NET

is installed, the default language is English.

See

Also:

”The Default Language” on page 123

3. If neither edition is available, display nothing.

Determining Which Languages are Available

To determine which languages are available for creating content, go to the Workarea and click Settings > Configuration >

Language Settings. The Language Settings screen lists all languages in which content can be created on your site.

N

OTE

Only members of the Administrator User Group can view, add, or edit language settings.

To change the list, follow these steps.

1. Click the Edit button ( ).

2. The Edit Language Setting screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 120

3. Each language has two check boxes. They are described below.

To enable a language in the Workarea only, click ( ). If this column is checked, the language populates the language dropdown lists within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, as shown below.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 121

To enable a language in the Workarea and let site visitors select it when viewing the site, click (

).

So, you can enable languages in the column when you are translating the site but are not ready to make those content items publicly available. When you complete the translation, check the

column.

N

OTE

If you select , the check box in the column is checked automatically.

This is because, if you let users view the language on the site, it must be enabled in the Workarea.

N

OTE

The default content language on a dropdown list is determined in the ek_DefaultContentLanguage

element of the

web.config file.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 122

If you choose only one language on the Language Settings screen, fields that prompt the user to select a language do not appear in

Ektron CMS400.NET

. Instead, all content is created in that language.

The Default Language

The default language determines which edition of content to display when a visitor to your site does not select a language.

It is also used if a visitor selects a language other than the default, then navigates to page for which content does not exist in the selected language. In that case,

Ektron CMS400.NET

displays that content in the default language (if available).

Within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, the default language determines the default value on the language drop-down lists that appear on every page on which a user can select a language.

When you install

Ektron CMS400.NET

, the default language is

English.

Use the following procedure to change the default language for your multi-language Web site.

1. Open the folder webroot\yourwebsite

.

2. Within that folder, open web.config.

3. Set the value of ek_DefaultContentLanguage to the locale id of the default language. For example, 1031 for German.

N

OTE

For a list of locale ids, see

”Appendix A: List of Supported Languages” on page 357

.

4. Save and close web.config.

See Also:

”Using a Language Other than American English as the

Default” on page 148

Disabling a Language

To disable any language, uncheck the accompanying checkbox on the Edit Language Setting screen. (For more information, see

”Determining Which Languages are Available” on page 120 .)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 123

If you want to disable the default language, you must first assign a

new default language. See Also: ”The Default Language” on page 123 explains what a default language is and how to assign

one.

What Happens to Content When You Disable Its Language

If you disable a language for which content exists, that content remains in the database but no one can access it, either from within

Ektron CMS400.NET

or when visiting your site.

If you later enable that language, the content is once again available.

Creating New Content

To create content in a non-English language, follow these steps.

1. Navigate to the content folder in which you want to create the content. (You must have permission to add content to the folder.)

2. From the language drop-down list, select the language in which you want to create the content

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 124

.

If the desired language is not available, see ”Determining

Which Languages are Available” on page 120 .

3. Click the Add Content button ( ) and create the content as you would any content.See Also:

”Adding Content” on page 72

4. In order to add metadata to a content, metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language.See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

Translating Content

When translating content into a foreign language, you have three options.

Option

Copy original content into a new content item in a new language. Then, translate content manually.

For more information, see

”Translating Content Manually” on page 126

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 125

Option

Use the computer-based translation tool provided with

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

For more information, see

”Using Machine Translation” on page 128

Create an XLIFF or XHTML file from existing content. The files are sent to a translation agency and return translated in the new language(s).

Then, you import the translated files into the CMS.

”Using the Language Export Feature” on page 131

Translating Content Manually

Use this procedure when you want to initialize new foreign language content with content from a source language, then translate the content manually. This copying should facilitate the translation.

For example, an editor is translating content from French to

German. The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German. As the editor translates the French edition into German, he deletes the French content. Any images in the content would usually remain, and all formatting (tables, bullets, etc.) is retained.

After signing in to

Ektron CMS400.NET

, you copy content into new content of a different language by either

navigating the Web site, or

accessing the Workarea and navigating the folder structure

After copying the original content, translate it into the new language then delete the original text. Both procedures are described below.

Accessing Content via the Web Site

1. Navigate to a page on which you can select the site language.

See Also:

”Viewing Your Site in Another Language” on page 119

2. Select the language into which you want to translate the content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 126

3. Navigate to content that you want to translate. You must have

privileges to add content to this folder. See Also: ”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

4. Right click within the content’s border and a small menu appears.

5. Click the Add New Language option ( ).

6. The original language content appears. Translate into the new language then delete the original content.

N

OTE

At this point, you can click the Translate Content button ( ) to have the software translate the content. You can then edit it as needed to perfect the translation.

7. In order to add metadata to content, metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language. See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

8. When you save the content, it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language.

Accessing Content via its Content Folder

To copy content into a new content of a different language, follow these steps.

1. Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate. Its status must allow editing (it cannot be submitted or pending).

2. From the View drop-down list, select a original language.

3. Click the content you want to translate.

4. It appears on the View Content screen.

5. Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 127

6. The original language content appears. Translate into the new language then delete the original content.

7. In order to add metadata to content, metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language.See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

8. When you save the content, it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language.

Using Machine Translation

Ektron CMS400.NET

includes a machine translation feature, which can automatically translate content from/to the following languages.

English

Dutch

French

German

Italian

Portuguese (Brazil)

Spanish

N

OTE

Currently, machine translation is not supported for all languages in the Language

Settings screen.

Like most software-based translation, someone fluent in the new language should review the translated content to verify that the translation is appropriate within the context of the page.

The machine translation feature lets you choose a glossary (that is, a field, industry, or subject area). This helps the software find the best translation for a term or phrase with different meanings in different fields.

To use the machine translation feature, follow these steps.

Accessing Content via the Web Site

1. Navigate to a page on which you can select the site language.

See Also:

”Viewing Your Site in Another Language” on page 119

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 128

2. Select the language into which you want to translate.

3. Navigate to content you want to translate.

N

OTE

You must have privileges to add content to the folder.

See Also:

”Setting

Permissions” on page 25

4. Right click within the content’s border. A menu appears.

5. Click the Add Content button ( ).

6. The original language content appears.

7. If the screen uses a Smart Form, select the text that you want to translate.

N

OTE

You cannot use Machine Translation to translate field names in a Smart Form.

XLIFF files are a good way to translate XML field names.

See Also:

”Using the

Language Export Feature” on page 131

8. Click the Translate Content button ( ).

9. The Translation screen appears.

10. Select the source (old) and target (new) languages.

11. If the content should refer to a specific glossary, select one from the dropdown list.

12. Click the Translate button.

13. The translation appears. If it looks OK, press Paste Content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 129

14. The translated content replaces the original content in the editor. Modify as needed.

15. In order to add metadata to content, metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language.See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

16. When you save the content, it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language.

Accessing Content via its Content Folder

To machine translate content by identifying its content folder, follow these steps.

1. Log into the Workarea and go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate. Its status must allow editing

(that is, its status cannot be submitted or pending).

2. From the View drop-down list, select an original language (that is, the language from which it will be translated).

3. Click the content you want to translate.

4. It appears on the View Content screen.

5. Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content. It must be a language supported for machine translation

(English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Portuguese (Brazil), or Spanish).

6. The original language content appears. Edit the title if appropriate.

7. Click the Translate Content button ( ).

8. The Translation screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 130

9. Select the source (old) and target (new) languages.

10. If the content should refer to a specific glossary, select one from the dropdown list.

11. Click the Translate button.

12. The translation appears. If it looks OK, press Paste Content.

13. The translated content replaces the original content in the editor. Modify as needed.

14. In order to add metadata to content, metadata specifications must have been created for the selected language.See Also:

”Metadata” on page 87

15. When you save the content, it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language.

Using the Language Export Feature

The Language Export feature lets you copy content into XLIFF files that can be submitted to a translation agency. The agency translates the files and returns them. In the final stage, you import the translated content back into

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

The Language Export feature lets you translate the following kinds of CMS information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 131

content, including summary, comments, and meta data

forms, including response message, comments, and meta data

all menus (you cannot choose individual menus)

file assets (files managed by the DMS, including Office documents, Open Office documents, managed files, etc.)

The Language Export Feature is explained through the following topics.

”What is XLIFF?” on page 132

”Overview of Exporting/Importing Translation Files” on page 133

”Creating the .zip File” on page 133

”Importing Translated Files into Ektron CMS400.NET” on page 138

What is XLIFF?

XLIFF (XML Localization Interchange File Format) is a format that's used to exchange localization data between participants in a translation project. This special format enables translators to concentrate on the text to be translated, without worrying about text layout. The XLIFF standard is supported by a large group of localization service providers and localization tools providers.

To learn more about XLIFF, visit these Web sites:

http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/xml/library/x-localis/

http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/xml/library/x-localis2/

http://www.xliff.org/

Supported Versions of XLIFF

Ektron CMS400.NET

supports the following versions of the XLIFF standard: 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2. You specify the version you are exporting in the web.config file, using the ek_XliffVersion

element.

Any version listed above can be imported.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 132

Overview of Exporting/Importing Translation Files

1. You select content to translate. You can select:

a content item

a folder (all content in the selected folder is selected; all subfolders of the selected folder may be included)

all menus

2.

Ektron CMS400.NET

converts the selected content to XLIFF files. You can prepare the files for translation into several languages at once.

A separate .xlf file is created for each item. Then, all .xlf files for a language are compressed into one .zip file. A separate .zip file is created for each language.

3. Transmit the.zip files to a translation agency, which converts them into the new language(s).

4. The translation agency returns the files.

5. Import them into

Ektron CMS400.NET

. If the editions of the content do not exist in the target language, they are created.

Creating the .zip File

To create one or more .zip files for translation, follow these steps.

Note Only members of the Administrator User Group and those defined in the Manage

Members for Role: XLIFF-Admin screen can create or import XLIFF files.

See

Also:

”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42 .

1. To translate one content item, navigate to its View Content screen.

To translate all content in a folder (and, if desired, all of its subfolders), navigate to its View Contents of Folder screen.

To translate a menu, go to Modules > Menus.

2. Click the Export for Translation button ( ). (On the View

Contents of Folder Screen, click Action > Export for

Translation.)

3. The Export for Translation screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 133

The Include Subfolders field only appears if you click the Export for Translation button from the View Contents of Folder screen.

4. If you want to include content in all of the selected folder’s subfolders, check Include Subfolders. To translate just the selected folder, uncheck it.

5. The language of items being translated appears in the Source

Language pull-down. If this is not the correct source language, click the down arrow and select the correct one.

6. All languages enabled in the Language Settings screen are selected under Target Language(s). (See Also:

”Determining

Which Languages are Available” on page 120 ).

7. To translate the content into all languages, proceed to the next step.

To translate the content into some languages, uncheck the languages that you do not want. You can uncheck the box in

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 134

the header row (illustrated below) to uncheck all, then only check the ones you want.

8. Click the box in the left column for each language into which you want to translate the content.

9. Click the Create XLIFF Files for Translation button ( ).

10.

Ektron CMS400.NET

creates one .zip file for each language.

The .zip file includes an XLIFF file for each selected content item.

N

OTE

If any selected folder contains content in a target language whose edit date is more recent than the source language edition, that content is excluded from the

.zip file. Ektron CMS400.NET assumes that, since a more recent target-language edition exists, you do not want to translate the corresponding source language edition.

The History section of the Export for Translation screen displays the translated files.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 135

The history lists the .zip file created for each language. (.zip files are indicated by the WinZip icon ( ).) To the right of the icon are

the flag of the source language

an arrow indicating the direction of the translation

the flag and name of the destination language

the size of the zip file

N

OTE

The top of the history window display the most recently exported/imported files.

11. If you want to review the items in a zip file, click the plus button next to Extracted. When you do, each content item’s ID number, title, and last edit date appear.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 136

12. Click the blue text of a .zip file. The File Download window appears.

N

OTE

If you want to review the XLIFF files within the .zip file, click Open.

13. Click the Save button. The Save As window appears. Navigate to the folder where you want to place the zip file and click

Save.

14. Transmit the files to the translation agency.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 137

N

OTE

When XLIFF files are returned by the translation agency, their extension must be

.xlf. Other than that, the file name is not important.

File Naming Patterns

File

Type

Pattern

XLIFF item identifier[item ID]_[new language hexadecimal code][two letter new language code].xlf

item identifier options:

-

content: cont

-

form: form

-

menu: s

-

menu item: s

item ID varies, depending on whether the item is content, a form, a menu, or a menu item

-

content: content ID number

-

form: form ID number

-

Menu: menu ID number

-

Menu item: menu ID number

Zip xlf[timestamp in format yyyymmddThhmmss]_u[user ID] _ [new language hexadecimal code]-

[two letter language code].zip

The user ID indicates which user performed the export or import.

Importing Translated Files into Ektron CMS400.NET

To import the translated files into

Ektron CMS400.NET

, follow these steps.

Note Only members of the Administrator User Group and those defined in the Manage

Members for Role: XLIFF-Admin screen can create or import XLIFF files.

See

Also:

”Using the Roles Screens” on page 42 .

1. Go to Workarea > Modules > Import XLIFF Files.

2. Click the Browse button and navigate to the folder that contains the translated files.

3. Select the files to import.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 138

4. Click the Upload and Import button ( ).

5.

Ektron CMS400.NET

creates new or updates existing foreignlanguage editions of the imported content.

6. Information about the imported file appears in the history area of the Import XLIFF Files screen. You can click plus signs (+) to reveal increasing levels of information about the imported content.

When you import the file, the comment Translated appears next to it.

For each new edition:

If the content title is the same as the source edition, the next available number is appended to the title to distinguish it from the source. For example: Henry Williams(1).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 139

its status matches the status of the source content. Typically, its status is checked out. When imported, it can enter the approval process just like other content.

its history indicates it was checked in at the time the report was run

for content, the following properties are inherited from the original content:

-

status

-

Smart Form

-

content searchable

-

approval method

date created and last edit date are captured from when the content is imported

the last user to edit is captured by user who imported the file

After you import the translation files,

Ektron CMS400.NET

removes them from the file system.

N

OTE

If an error exists in any of the files, the erroneous files are moved into a subdirectory. The directory is created using a timestamp. For example: uploadedFiles\localization\merged\xlf20060208T141841_u1\error\.

Viewing Foreign Language Content

1. Navigate to the folder that contains the content.

2. Click View > Language and select the desired language.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 140

3. Only content in that folder and the selected language appears.

You can perform the same activities with this content as any other content.

Additional Multi-Language Topics

”Multi-Language Approval Chains” on page 142

”Working with Tasks in a Multi-Language System” on page 142

”Working with Collections in a Multi-Language System” on page 142

”Working with Calendars in a Multi-Language System” on page 143

”Working with Menus in a Multi-Language System” on page 143

”Creating an External Link to a Page of Foreign Content” on page 143

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 141

Multi-Language Approval Chains

Just as you can create separate editions of content for each enabled language, you can set up a language-specific approval chain and method. When determining a folder’s approval chain, first select a language then select users and groups with authority to approve content in that folder and that language.

The screen below shows the language selection drop-down list on the View Approvals screen.

Only users in the language-specific approval chain for a folder can approve content in that language.

You can also set a language-specific approval method. See Also:

”The Approval Method” on page 40

Working with Tasks in a Multi-Language System

If you create content then add a task to it, the task can be in any enabled language. This would be helpful if, for example, you review English content then want to assign the task of translating it into another language in that language.

If you create a task then try to assign content to it, you can only choose from content in the language of the task.

Working with Collections in a Multi-Language System

In a multi-language

Ektron CMS400.NET

system, you can create a language-specific edition of each collection. For information about

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 142

doing this, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section

“Working with Collections.”

Working with Calendars in a Multi-Language System

Calendars can be created in any supported language. Once you enter the calendar and event information in the foreign language, the calendar display (that is, day and month names) automatically appears in that language. Also, regional conventions for first-last days of the week, and date and time formats are maintained.

For more information, see

”Creating a Foreign Language

Calendar” on page 380 .

Working with Menus in a Multi-Language System

N

OTE

If you are not familiar with the Ektron CMS400.NET’s menus feature, please read

“Menu Feature” on page 427 and the Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual section

“Working with Menus.”

You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language. When a site visitor selects a language, navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link,

Ektron

CMS400.NET

displays the menu in the selected language if it is available. If a menu in that language is not available, nothing appears.

Before creating or translating a menu, it’s a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu. In this way, you can link these content items to the new menu. However, after creating a menu, you can always add new items to it.

For details about translating menus, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

User Manual section “Working with Menus”, “Managing Menus”,

“Working with Menus in a Multi-Language System.”

Creating an External Link to a Page of Foreign Content

If another Web site links to a multilingual page on your site, the

URL must include the language ID parameter. For example: www.ektron.com/web-content-management-solutions.aspx

?LangType=1036

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 143

Setting Up a Multilingual Web Site

Ektron CMS400.NET

supports content in several languages. This section lists the steps to follow when setting up such a site.

See Also:

”Creating Web Pages that Support Several Languages” on page 145

Step

1.

In web.config, make sure multilingual support is enabled.

For details, see

”Enabling/Disabling Support for Multiple Language

Content” on page 118

2.

Set a default content language to be the one used by the majority of your site’s content.

If you had a previous version of

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

and selected a default language on the Database

Upgrade Utility, be sure that default language matches the one in web.config.

”The Default Language” on page 123

3.

4.

Enable languages your site will support.

Add language selection function to templates.

”Determining Which Languages are Available” on page 120

”Viewing Your Site in Another Language” on page 119

5.

Create a metadata definition for each supported language.

6.

Create or translate content.

”Adding a Metadata Definition” on page 99

”Creating New Content” on page 124

”Translating Content” on page 125

7.

Change the language of content not in the default language.

Note: Only needed if Web site previously had content in more than one language.

”Resolving Conversion Issues” on page 148

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 144

Step

8.

Set up approval chains for new content.

9.

Set up multilingual collections.

For details, see

”Multi-Language Approval Chains” on page 142

10. Set up multilingual menus.

11. Modify text on templates.

12. Translate graphics.

”Working with Collections in a Multi-Language System” on page 142

”Working with Menus in a Multi-Language System” on page 143

”Modifying Page Content Based on Language

Selection” on page 146

”Modifying Images Based on Language Selection” on page 147

Creating Web Pages that Support Several Languages

When thinking about setting up your Web site to support content in multiple languages, consider these three actions.

Action

Create language-specific content, menus, collections

For more information, see

”Translating Content” on page 125

”Working with Collections in a Multi-Language System” on page 142

”Working with Menus in a Multi-Language System” on page 143

After you create these items, have the page invoke that item dynamically using an appropriate function (such as ecmContentBlock

). When

Ektron CMS400.NET

receives a request to display an item that includes a language and item id number, it returns the languagespecific edition. To learn about letting the user select a language from a Web page, see

”Viewing Your Site in

Another Language” on page 119

.

Adjust template content to user language

Translate text in images

”Modifying Page Content Based on Language

Selection” on page 146

”Modifying Images Based on Language Selection” on page 147

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 145

Modifying Page Content Based on Language Selection

If a template’s text should change according to a user’s language selection, use a case statement to provide the language-specific content. A good example of this is the template used on the RC international sample site (Illustrated below).

Assume you want to create editions of the menu that runs across the header (Home, Products, etc.) in three languages:

English

French

German

To do so, follow these steps.

Note This procedure uses the header.asp file delivered with the RC international sample site as an example.

1. In the template file, declare each menu option a variable. For example:

Dim t_search, t_products, t_support, t_news, t_careers, t_calendar, t_home, t_login, t_site_lang, t_contact, t_copyright, calendar_id

2. Enter case statements that provide the value of each variable in each language. (1031 is the decimal code for German, 1036 for French.) The following illustrates how to do this for the search menu option.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 146

Select Case ContentLanguage

Case "1031" t_search = "Suche"

Case "1036" t_search = “Recherche"

Case else t_search = "Search"

End Select

Now, when a user visits a page controlled by this template and selects French or German as the site language, the page is refreshed and the translated values appear on the template.

Modifying Images Based on Language Selection

Many Web page templates also include images that require translation. You can set up templates to invoke images in the userselected language by following these steps.

1. Add to the library each image that should change when the language changes. For example, if your company’s tag line is translated into three languages, upload the three images into the library.

It‘s a good idea to include the language in the title of the image.

For example, tagline_English, tagline_French.

2. Create a separate content block for each language-specific image. Each content block must have a unique ID number.

3. Insert the appropriate image into a content block for each language. For example, insert the tagline_English image into the English content block.

4. Insert the content blocks into the appropriate templates. For example, insert the English content block into the English template.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 147

Using a Language Other than American English as the Default

Use this procedure if your site supports one language only, and it is not American English (1033).

To set your site’s default language to something other than

American English, follow these steps.

1. Install a new site. Do not log in at this point.

2. Open your site’s web.config file (located in your site root folder.) Set ek_EnableMultilingual

to zero (0). Set ek_DefaultContentLanguage

to the four digit locale id for the desired language. See

”Appendix A: List of Supported

Languages” on page 357

3. Log in to

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

4. Go to Settings > Configuration > Language Settings.

5. Enable the desired language, and disable all other languages.

6. Go to Settings > Configuration > Setup.

7. Make sure the desired language is the Default Application

Language.

8. Go to Settings > Users > Edit User Information. Set the

User Language to the desired language. Do not leave App

Default as the value.

9. Repeat Step 7 for every

Ektron CMS400.NET

user.

Resolving Conversion Issues

I

MPORTANT

!

This section is only relevant to Web sites that upgrade to

Ektron CMS400.NET

Release 4.7 or higher and which, prior to the upgrade, had content in more than one language. If your site does not meet both criteria, you can ignore this section.

When you upgrade to 4.7 or higher, the Database Upgrade utility prompts you to select a language. All content in your site is then assigned that language. (Prior to Release 4.7, content did not have a language attribute.) If all content is not in the selected language, you must resolve that discrepancy.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 148

For example, assume for the sake of simplicity that your pre-4.7

Web site had four content items: three English and one French.

During the database upgrade, you select English. Three content items are assigned the correct language, but the fourth content item, which should be assigned French, is also assigned English.

You cannot simply change the content’s language assignment.

When resolving the discrepancy, there are two possible scenarios.

Scenario 1

Before Upgrade

Prior to 4.7, your site had unique content in French (id number 4).

To resolve this, copy the content to a new French edition with the same id number. Then, delete the English edition.

3

4

1

2

Content id Language attribute

not available not available not available not available

Actual language

English

English

English

French

After Upgrade

Content id Language attribute

English 1

2 English

3 English

4 English

Actual language

English

English

English

French

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 149

After Following Procedure Listed Below

Content id Language attribute

English 1

2 English

3 English

4 (deleted)

4

English

French

Actual language

English

English

English

English

French

Procedure for Scenario 1

To change a content item’s language, follow these steps.

N

OTE

Before beginning this procedure, make sure

the correct language for the content is enabled. See ”Determining Which

Languages are Available” on page 120 .

metadata has been defined for the new language. See

”Adding a Metadata

Definition” on page 99

1. Within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, navigate to the View Content screen on content item 4.

2. From the Add drop-down list, select French.

3.

Ektron CMS400.NET

creates a French edition of the content.

4. Check in that edition of the content.

5. Delete the English edition of the content.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 150

Scenario 2

Before Upgrade

Prior to 4.7, your site had English and French content (id numbers

3 and 4) that presented the same content in each language. You want to leave the English content alone, create a French edition of that content with the same id number, then delete the French content.

The advantage of this solution is that both editions of the content have a single id number. So, when a site visitor selects a language and navigates to that page,

Ektron CMS400.NET

displays the edition of the content for the selected language.

To resolve this, create a French edition of the English content, copy the French content, then delete the French content.

3

4

1

2

Content id Language attribute

not available not available not available not available

Actual language

English

English

English

French

After Upgrade

1

2

3

Content id Language attribute

English

English

English

Actual language

English

English

English

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 151

4

After Following Procedure Listed Below

English French

Content id

1

2

3

3

4 (deleted)

Language attribute

English

English

English

French na

Actual language

English

English

English

French na

Procedure for Scenario 2

To solve the language conversion issue explained in scenario 2, follow these steps.

N

OTE

Before beginning this procedure, make sure

the correct language for the content is enabled. See ”Determining Which

Languages are Available” on page 120 .

metadata was defined for the new language. See

”Adding a Metadata

Definition” on page 99

1. Within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, navigate to the View Content screen of content id 3.

2. From the Add drop-down list, select French.

3.

Ektron CMS400.NET

creates a French edition of content id 3.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 152

4. Translate the title into French.

5. Delete the English elements of content id 3 (content, summary, metadata, schedule, and comments).

6. Check in the French edition of content id 3.

7. Copy and paste all relevant elements of the French content (id

4) into the French edition of content id 3 (content, summary, metadata, schedule, and comments).

8. Delete content id 4. See Also: ”Deleting Content” on page 80

Set the Language of Spell Checking

To specify which dictionary to reference when checking spelling, specify a language in Microsoft Word, version 2000 or later. To do this, open Word and select Tools > Language > Set Language.

Character Encoding

The following Ektron Knowledge Base articles describe issues surrounding the display of special characters within

Ektron

CMS400.NET

. Note that these articles refer to eWebEditPro,

Ektron’s WYSIWYG editor embedded within

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

Wherever these articles contain references to eWebEditPro’s configuration data or file (config.xml), you should instead update the web.config file, located in your site’s root folder.

HOWTO: produce UTF-8 ( www.ektron.com/developers/ ewebeditpro_tutorials.cfm?id=403 )

INFO: Character Encoding ( www.ektron.com/developers/ ewebeditprokb.cfm?id=1807 )

INFO: Encoding special characters ( www.ektron.com/ developers/ewebeditprokb.cfm?id=384 )

Translating the Workarea

You can translate

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Workarea into French or

German by changing the Default Application field in the Setup

screen. (See ”Default Application Language” on page 26 .)

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 153

If you want to translate the Workarea strings into another language, read this section.

N

OTE

Ektron provides the American English strings in a text file. You must translate them to the new language.

Prerequisites

The alphabetical, four-character identifier of the country/ language into which you are translating.

The server that hosts

Ektron CMS400.NET

must have Visual

Studio.NET

Procedure for Translating Workarea Strings

1. Click the Windows Start button.

2. Click the Visual Studio.NET command prompt (illustrated below) to open a command window.

3. Within the command window, change the directory to this folder:

your web site\Workarea\resources

.

4. Insert the following text: resgen EKResource.resources

anyfilename.txt

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 154

N

OTE

You can assign whatever name you wish to the .txt file.

5. The .txt file is created in the

\resources

directory.

6. Use Visual Studio.NET to open the .txt file.

7. Replace every backslash (\) with a double backslash (\\).

8. Translate the text following every equal sign (=) to the end of the line. Be careful not to change any occurrences of n surrounded by double backslashes (

\\n\\

).

9. Save and close the .txt file.

10. Within the command window, insert the following: resgen

anyfilename.txt

EKResource.

two-character country code twocharacter language code .resources

For example, to indicate that the workarea is being translated into the Spanish/Spain, enter resgen span_translation.txt

EKResource.es-ES.resources

This command translates all strings in the Workarea to the values you set in Step 8. Writing Resource File ...Done appears within the command window when the replacement is completed.

11. A new resource file is created in the

\resources

directory. You determined its name in Step 10.

12. Enable the new language in the Language Settings screen.

See

”Determining Which Languages are Available” on page 120

13. Make the new language the default language in the

Configuration Setup screen. See ”Default Application

Language” on page 26 .

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 155

Site Replication

M a n a g i n g Yo u r C M S 4 0 0

S y s t e m

S i t e R e p l i c a t i o n

W

ARNING

!

If you upgrade a staging server from version 5.2 to 6.0 but don’t choose to upgrade the production server, you need to complete some steps to make the two systems compatible.This procedure is explained in “Upgrading Ektron

CMS400.NET” > “Updating a Site Replication Production Machine after

Upgrading from 5.2 to 6.0” in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Setup Manual.

N

OTE

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Site Replication software is an extra cost option.

Please contact your Ektron Sales representative for details on purchasing it.

Site Replication is an automated, one-way site synchronization between a staging or test server and a production server. It lets you perfect the changes on a staging server, then effortlessly copy them to the production server. In this way, your production server can easily be kept up-to-date, while at the same time be spared simple errors that typically accompany last-minute changes.

(Synchronization differs from copying in that it only copies files that are new or have changed. Since many files on both servers are typically the same, synchronization is faster than copying.)

Whether you’ve been testing a new site template or an upgraded version of CMS400.NET, Site Replication pushes the latest information to the production server. Site Replication is especially useful when your site contains sensitive information (for example, pricing) that needs to be carefully reviewed for quality assurance before it goes live.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 156

Site Replication

Before the latest data is copied to the production server, it is backed up. So, you can restore the production server to an earlier version if you ever need to.

Site Replication is explained through the following subtopics.

”Site Replication vs. the Move Site Procedure” on page 157

”Site Replication Overview” on page 158

”What Information is Synchronized” on page 158

”What Information is Not Synchronized” on page 159

”Possible Site Replication Configurations” on page 159

”Prerequisites” on page 160

”Installing the Site Replication Utility” on page 162

”Configuring the Site Replication Utility” on page 180

”Setting up a Staging Server” on page 192

”Previewing the Site Replication Process” on page 194

”Performing Site Replication” on page 194

”Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the Production Server” on page 196

”Replicating to Multiple Sites” on page 198

”Supporting Several Sites on One Staging Server” on page 198

”Quick Deploy” on page 207

Site Replication vs. the Move Site Procedure

The

Ektron CMS400.NET

Setup Manual section “Installing Ektron

CMS400.NET” > “Moving a Site to Another Directory or Server” describes a procedure for moving an

eWebEditPro+XML

Web site to a new folder or even a different server. You would use that procedure under the following circumstances:

The initial move of a site up to a shared server (or any other server on which you cannot run the .exe installer).

Subsequently, you would use the Site Replication feature.

Moving a site to a new server. For example, you purchase a new server to replace your existing one.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 157

Site Replication

Moving a site between two servers that are not connected by a network.

Site Replication Overview

First, install Site Replication software onto both servers. Next, supply configuration information for each server, such as the site directory and when replication begins.

After you install and configure the Site Replication software, begin using it to synchronize the test server with the production server.

Before initiating the synchronization, a Preview button displays the changes that will occur. Once you are ready, begin the synchronization. During the procedure, a screen displays its realtime progress.

When synchronization is complete, you can view a log of changes made. If you decide the update should not have occurred, you can restore the receiving server.

N

OTE

You should verify that adequate space is available for the Site Replication. The data directories are backed up before the Site Replication begins. The previous version remains, creating a sitereplication.backup/.dirbackup date time file. A new copy of the data directories is placed in the same folder and is named dirupdates

date time.

What Information is Synchronized

Synchronized information includes:

CMS400.NET code (the CMS400Scripts directory)

CMS400.NET database schema changes

CMS400.NET database content

Document Management Functionality code (the

AssetManagement directory)

templates (ASPX, ASP, PHP, JSP)

library content (uploadedfiles and uploadedimages folders)

CMS400.NET web.config file

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 158

Site Replication

user list - However, when the user list is copied to the production server, non-administrative users’ permission to add content is removed.

N

OTE

If users edit content on a production server, the same changes must be made to the staging server. Alternatively, users can edit on the staging server, and you can perform another replication.

What Information is Not Synchronized

Because they contain site-specific information, the following files are not synchronized during Site Replication:

Membership users (See Also: ”Updating Membership Users” on page 178 )

CMS400.NET form data tables - used to hold form submissions from a Web site. Also, any tasks that track form data.

Web.config (needs to be updated manually only when upgrading)

AssetManagement.config (needs to be updated manually only when upgrading if receiving server has Document

Management Functionality)

AssetManagementData.config (needs to be updated manually only when upgrading if receiving server has Document

Management Functionality)

The most recent searches table, use to generate the Search

Phrase Report

Optionally, a list of tables on the production machine (See Also:

”Preserving Database Tables” on page 179

)

Possible Site Replication Configurations

The following configurations are supported during Site Replication:

CMS400.NET site and database on same server

CMS400.NET site and database on separate servers

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 159

Site Replication

The rest of this chapter explains the Site Replication utility through the following topics.

”Installing the Site Replication Utility” on page 162

”Configuring the Site Replication Utility” on page 180

”Previewing the Site Replication Process” on page 194

”Performing Site Replication” on page 194

”Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the Production Server” on page 196

Prerequisites

Every user who will use Site Replication must be a member of the

Administrators group within Windows’ Microsoft Management

Console.

To apply this setting to a user, follow these steps.

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools >

Computer Management.

2. Click Local Users and Groups then the Users folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 160

Site Replication

3. If the user does not appear in the right frame, right click the mouse and select New User.... Then complete the dialog.

4. Right mouse click on the user and select Properties.

5. Click the Member of tab.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 161

Site Replication

6. If you do not see Administrators in the Member of window, click the Add button.

7. In the Enter the object names to select field, enter

Administrators.

8. Click OK twice.

Installing the Site Replication Utility

You must install the Site Replication utility on the staging server and all production servers. After installing on a server, you should

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 162

Directions

1.

Indicate if this is a new installation or an upgrade.

If doing an upgrade, only perform steps 3 and 6 below.

Screen

Site Replication

configure it. See Also: ”Configuring the Site Replication Utility” on page 180

1. Download the Site Replication.exe file from Ektron’s Web site.

2. Double click the downloaded file.

3. Follow the screen directions as they appear.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 163

Directions

2.

Indicate whether the server on which you are installing will be used to send or

receive information. A staging server would send, while a production server would receive.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 164

Directions

3.

Identify the Web site for which you are installing the

Site Replication utility.

If you are unsure, accept the default.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 165

Directions

4.

Enter the directory in which

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

resides.

Important! The staging and production servers must use the same directory name (for example, http://

staging server/

MySite

and http://

production server/

MySite

).

If not, the content may incorrectly reference images in the uploadedfiles directory of the staging server. As a result, the production server displays broken images.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 166

Directions

5.

Enter the server host name.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 167

Site Replication

Directions

6.

Enter the folder to which the Site

Replication files will be installed. If you are unsure, accept the default.

Screen

7.

Click Yes or No to indicate if the server uses a remote database.

That is, a database stored on a separate server.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 168

Directions

8.

If your receiving server uses a remote database server, the Site

Replication feature uses a temporary folder to store the database prior to replication.

A default folder to be used for this purpose appears.

You can accept the default or navigate to a different folder on the receiving server.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 169

Directions

9.

On the receiving server, enter the path to your installation of the

MS SQL Server

Data directory.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 170

Directions

10. If you are configuring a receiving server, enter the path to your backups directory.

Before new information is pushed from the staging server, production server files are backed up to this directory. See

Also: ”Viewing and Restoring a

Backup of the

Production

Server” on page 196

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 171

Directions

11. If you are configuring a sending server, you are prompted to enter a “from” email address.

When site replication finishes, the notification uses this as the “from” email address.

Note: You can enter a

“to” email address on the configuration screen.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 172

Directions

Server Field

Enter the path to the server that hosts the database. If using a remote database, enter the path to the database server,

not the receiving server.

Username and

Password Fields

If using a trusted connection, leave the username and password blank.

Otherwise, enter a username and password specific to the database for the receiving and sending server.

Screen

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 173

Site Replication

Directions

12. Click the Install button to begin the installation.

Screen

13. The installation begins. When it is done, the screen on the right appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 174

Site Replication

Additional Steps Prior to Configuring the Site Replication

Utility

If you are not using a trusted connection, the login user defined in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

web.config file needs sysadmin privileges.

If you are using a trusted connection, the user running the replication needs sysadmin privileges.

If you are using a remote database, configure the MSSQL

Windows Service on the remote server to run as a Domain user. To do this, follow these steps.

-

Go to Control Panel.

-

Select Administrative Tools.

-

Select Services.

-

Right click MSSQL Server.

-

Select Properties.

-

Click the Log On tab.

-

Select This account.

-

Click the Browse button and find a domain user who exists on both the

Ektron CMS400.NET

and the database server.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 175

Site Replication

Give the user selected above permission to read/write to the

SiteReplication.Temp directory. To do so, follow these steps.

-

Open Windows Explorer.

-

Right mouse click the c:/sitereplication.temp

folder.

-

Select Properties.

-

Click Sharing then Permissions.

-

Assign to the user selected above permission to read and write to this directory.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 176

Site Replication

If you will use email to communicate the completion of the replication, SMTP must be running on the sending (staging) server’s IIS.

Also, the CDO objects must be installed. Mail will be sent from

CMS400 Site Replication

.

Finally, verify that your SMTP server allows relaying from the sending machine. You may need to set the Send\EmailFrom tag in the siterepl.config file to a valid internet email address.

You can use the SendEmail web services API test in replication.asmx to test the configuration.

Go to IIS > Default SMTP Virtual Server > Properties >

Access tab > Relay button. Make sure the following field is checked: Allow all computers which successfully

authenticate to relay, regardless of the list above.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 177

Site Replication

See Also:

”Updating Membership Users” on page 178

”Preserving Database Tables” on page 179

Updating Membership Users

Typically, membership users are site visitors who register themselves via Web pages that reside on a production server. So, you would not want membership information on the staging server to overwrite that information.

However, if your staging server contains membership users that you want to move to the production server, follow these steps. You might do this on a one-time basis if, for example before your production server goes live.

1. On the production server, navigate to the folder

CMS400 server/

Documents and settings/all users/application data

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 178

Site Replication

2. Open the sitereplCMS400Replication.config

file with a simple word processor, such as Notepad.

3. Set the value of

PreserveMembershipUsers

to False.

<entry name="PreserveMembershipUsers"> False </entry>

4. Save and close the file.

The next time you run Site Replication, all membership user information on the staging server will be sent to the production server.

After running the replication, you would typically change the value of

PreserveMembershipUsers to True, so that subsequent replications do not affect membership users on the production server.

Preserving Database Tables

Some customers have a custom set of tables in the production database for tracking unique information. If your site has custom tables that you want to preserve during replication, follow these steps to instruct the site replication to do that.

1. On the production server, navigate to the folder

CMS400 server/

Documents and settings/all users/application data

.

2. Open the sitereplCMS400Replication.config

file with a simple word processor, such as Notepad.

3. Within the PreserveTables entry, list the tables to be preserved during replication.

<entry name="PreserveTables"> my_custom_table_tbl </entry>

N

OTE

If you enter more than one table, separate each with a comma.

Since the tables may have foreign key relationships, list the primary key tables first. When the tables are deleted, they are deleted in reverse order, so there are no foreign key errors.

When the tables are copied, it is done in forward order so the primary keys are restored before the foreign keys reference them.

4. Save and close the file.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 179

Site Replication

Configuring the Site Replication Utility

To configure the Site Replication utility, enter the following into your

Web browser’s address field: http://localhost/cms400replication/ConfigReplication.aspx

The following screen appears if you chose to set up a receiving machine.

The following screen appears if you chose to set up a sending machine.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 180

Site Replication

This screen displays the following Site Replication information:

current status

the receiving directory

the sending directory

This screen also links to other screens that let you configure, run, and get a detailed status of the replication process. Click

Configure Send to configure your staging server, and Configure

Receive to configure a production server.

N

OTE

Only configure the send page on the staging server, and the receive page on the production server.

See Also:

”Configuring the Receiving Server” on page 182

”Configuring the Sending Server” on page 186

”The Site Replication Status Page” on page 191

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 181

Site Replication

Configuring the Receiving Server

Use the configuration receive page to set up information about a receiving server.

N

OTE

To return to the home screen, click Replication in the top left corner.

This screen has four secondary screens, listed across the top:

”Configuration Screen” on page 182

”Security” on page 183

”Remote DB” on page 184

”Backups” on page 185

The following table explains the initial screen’s fields.

Configuration Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 182

Field

Enable Receive

Receive Directory

MSSQL Data Directory

MSSQL Log Directory

Backups Directory

.

Site Replication

Description

Determines whether the server you are signed into can receive Site

Replication information.

Checked = Receive

Not checked = Do not receive

The site directory on the receiving (production) server that is updated when Site Replication occurs. For example: c:\inetpub\wwwroot\cms400demo

Note: If you just installed the Site Replication utility, the receiving directory you specified during installation appears.

The location of the MSSQL database directory. The default is: c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL\Data

Enter the location of the MSSQL Log directory, which stores your

MSSQL .ldf files.

The location of the Site Replication backup files. For example: c:\SiteReplication.Backups

The backup directory may require a large amount of space, depending on the size of your site and if you are using the Document

Management Functionality. See Also:

”Viewing and Restoring a

Backup of the Production Server” on page 196

Saves the receiving (production) server information.

Save Button

Security

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 183

Field

Valid Username

Valid Sender IP

Save Button

Remote DB

.

Site Replication

Description

Username used for authentication on receiving (production) server. If you are setting up a receiving server that uses a trusted connection, this user needs sysadmin access for MSSQL.

Also, this value must match the Username on the Configuration

Sending Server screen.

Ektron recommends entering the name in this format: domain name\username

.

Note: You do not need to complete this field. If you do, this information provides additional security for which user can send data to this server.

The IP address of the sending (staging) server, which will be synchronized with the production server you are configuring.

It must be a static IP address.

Note: You do not need to complete this field. If you do, this information provides additional security for which server can send data to this server.

Save the receiving (production) server information.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 184

Field

DB Server’s Temp Dir

Receive DB Temp Dir

Save Button

.

Site Replication

Description

Most databases can only back up and restore to a local drive. So if your database server is on a different machine than your CMS, both machines must share a domain/group and a user/password for directory access.

Ektron recommends setting up a separate directory named

SiteReplication.Temp and sharing it on the staging or production server (whichever uses the remote database server). The database server can connect to this network share via a UNC path.

Note: The MSSQL service must run as a domain user to be able to access a UNC share.

If the receiving server uses a remote database server, enter the UNC

path to the shared directory on that server. See Also: ”DB Server’s

Temp Dir” on page 185

Save the receiving (production) server information.

Backups

Field

Replication Backups

.

Button

Description

Displays the number of Site Replication backups stored in the backups directory. Up to 10 backups are kept.

The selection box directly below this label lists the most recent 10 backups. See Also:

”Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the

Production Server” on page 196

Choose a backup from the replication backups selection box.

Click Restore to replace the site on the receiving server with the

selected backup. See Also: ”Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the

Production Server” on page 196

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 185

Site Replication

Configuring the Sending Server

The first time you configure the sending (staging) server, follow the

procedure described in ”Setting up a Staging Server” on page 192

.

Later, you can use the Configure Send page modify that information.

N

OTE

To return to the home screen, click Replication in the top left corner.

This screen has these secondary screens, listed across the top:

”Configuration Screen” on page 186

”Destinations Screen” on page 188

”Remote DB Screen” on page 189

”Notification Screen” on page 189

”Setting up a Staging Server” on page 192

The following tables explain the screens.

Configuration Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 186

Field

Send Directory

Exclude Files

Delete Removed Files

Send DB When

Schedule On

Destinations

.

Site Replication

Description

The location of site directory on the sending server whose content will be synchronized with the production server. For example: c:\inetpub\wwwroot\cms400demo

If you want to exclude certain file types from the replication, enter them here. For example, you may want to exclude all PDF files.

For each file type, enter an asterisk (), period(.), then the file extension. For example

*.pdf

.

Separate each extension with a comma.

During Site Replication, files that were deleted on the staging server are now labeled “deleted” on the production server. Check this box if you want to remove these files from the production server.

Indicate if you want to copy the

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

database to the named destination servers. Your choices are:

Always

1st Destination only (only copy the database to the first destination server listed above)

Never

To begin the replication as soon as you press the Send button, leave this field blank.

To schedule the replication for a future date and time, click the calendar button.

The path to the replication.asmx file on every production server that will be updated by this staging server. For example: http://productionserver1/CMS400replication/ replication.asmx

or http://198.0.25.214/CMS400replication/replication.asmx

You must enter the username and password needed to access that folder before pressing the Add button to add a destination folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 187

Site Replication

Field

Windows Username

Password

Send Button

Description

Username used for authentication on receiving (production) server. If you are setting up a receiving server that uses a trusted connection, this user needs sysadmin access for MSSQL. Enter the domainname\username

.

It must match the WS Username on the production server’s

Configuration Receiving Server screen.

Password for the above user.

Begin the Site Replication process. If you scheduled a date/time, the process is delayed until then.

Destinations Screen

.

Field

Destinations

Destination to add

Windows Username

Password

Description

A Display-only field that lists the path to the replication.asmx file on every production server that will be updated by this staging server.

Enter the path to the replication.asmx file on every production server that will be updated by this staging server. For example: http://productionserver1/CMS400replication/ replication.asmx

or http://198.0.25.214/CMS400replication/replication.asmx

You must enter the username and password needed to access that folder before pressing the Add button to add a destination folder.

Username used for authentication on receiving (production) server. If you are setting up a receiving server that uses a trusted connection, this user needs sysadmin access for MSSQL. Enter the domainname\username

.

It must match the WS Username on the production server’s

Configuration Receiving Server screen.

Password for the above user.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 188

Site Replication

Field

Add Button

Preview Changes Button

Description

Add a new Destination. See Also: ”Destinations” on page 187

Before pressing this button, make sure that a valid destination appears in the Destinations field, and the username and password needed to access that folder appear in their respective fields.

Preview a list of changes to take place when the Site Replication occurs. Use this feature to examine which changes are scheduled before replication begins.

Before pressing this button, make sure a valid destination appears in the Destinations field, and the username and password needed to access that folder appear in their respective fields.

Then, select a production server from the Destinations field.

See Also:

”Previewing the Site Replication Process” on page 194

Remote DB Screen

.

Field

DB Server’s Temp Dir

Send DB Temp Dir

Description

Most databases can only back up and restore to a local drive. So, if your database server is on a different machine than your CMS, both machines must share a domain/group and a user/password for directory access.

Ektron recommends setting up a separate directory named

SiteReplication.Temp and sharing it on the site replication server.

The database server can connect to this network share via a UNC path.

So, if the sending server uses a remote database server, enter the site replication server’s shared directory.

If the sending server uses a remote database server, enter the UNC path to the shared directory on that server.

Notification Screen

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 189

Site Replication

.

Field

email Notification to

Description

Use this field to notify someone when the site replication is finished.

Enter the email address of the person you want to notify.

Note: email notification only works if the sending server’s SMTP mail service is enabled.

See Also:

”If you will use email to communicate the completion of the replication, SMTP must be running on the sending (staging) server’s IIS.” on page 177

Here is an example of the email resulting from a successful replication.

Completed At 10/7/2005 9:50:26 AM

Make Staging Screen

This screen helps you to set up a staging server when only a production server is currently available. The screen facilitates the setup of the staging server by

.

copying Web site and database information from the production server to the staging server

initializing the staging server with content from the production server

For more information, see

”Setting up a Staging Server” on page 192 .

Field

New Connection String

MSSQL Data Directory

MSSQL Log Directory

Description

Enter a connection string pointing to the new database.

Enter the location of the staging server’s MSSQL database directory.

The default is: c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL\Data

Enter the location of the staging server’s MSSQL Log directory, which stores your MSSQL .ldf files.

Temp Directory

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 190

Field

Windows Username

Password

Site Replication

Description

Enter the Username used for authentication on receiving

(production) server. If you are setting up a receiving server that uses a trusted connection, this user needs sysadmin access for MSSQL.

Enter the domainname\username

.

It must match the WS Username on the production server’s

Configuration Receiving Server screen.

Enter the password for the above user.

Click this button when you are ready to create the staging server based on the information entered on the screen.

Before pressing this button, make sure you completed ”Setting up a

Staging Server” on page 192

.

When you click the Create Staging button, Site Replication copies the CMS400Demo directory, the assetlibrary directory, and the

CMS400 database form the production server to the staging server.

The Site Replication Status Page

The status page keeps you informed of the Site Replication process. Specifically, it lists the current status of the Site

Replication. Also, If a replication is currently in progress, the page displays

the percentage of completion

the file currently being replicated

the destination server’s URL

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 191

Site Replication

Setting up a Staging Server

Follow these directions if you are migrating from a single-server model to a two-server model, that is, a staging and production server. Your current server becomes a production server, and the new server will be a staging server.

After purchasing the appropriate licensing and downloading the

Site Replication software, follow these steps.

W

ARNING

!

Only follow these steps to set up a sending server. After that, you can perform Site

Replication by following

”Performing Site Replication” on page 194

.

1. Install

Ektron CMS400.NET

on the staging server. Set it up exactly like the production server (for example, all directories must have the same name).

N

OTE

This procedure is described in the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Setup Manual.

During installation, when you are asked to specify Setup Type, choose Minimal.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 192

Site Replication

2. Install Site Replication software on both servers. See

”Installing the Site Replication Utility” on page 162 .

3. Follow the steps described in ”Additional Steps Prior to

Configuring the Site Replication Utility” on page 175 .

4. Configure Site Replication software on the production server

according to instructions in ”Configuring the Receiving Server” on page 182 .

5. On the sending server, enter the following into the browser address bar: http://localhost/ConfigReplSend.aspx

6. Click the Destinations tab.

7. In the Destinations to Add field, enter the path to the replication.asmx file on the production server. For example: http://productionserver1/CMS400replication/replication.asmx

or http://198.0.25.214/CMS400replication/replication.asmx

Enter only one destination.

8. Enter the username and password needed to access that folder.

9. Press the Add button.

10. Click the Configuration tab.

11. In the Send Directory field, enter the send server’s site root directory.

12. Click the Make Staging tab. This screen facilitates the setup of the staging server by

copying Web site and database information from the production server to the staging server

initializing the staging server with content from the production server

13. In the New Connection String field, enter a connection string pointing to the new database. You can copy this from the web.config file. For example server=(local);database=remotedb;Integrated Security=true;user=sams;pwd=sam123;

14. In the MSSQL Data Directory and MSSQL Log Directory fields, specify the location of the MSSQL data and log directories.

15. Enter the username and password needed to access the production server.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 193

Site Replication

16. Click Create Staging.

17. The Site Replication software initializes the staging server with content from the production server.

Previewing the Site Replication Process

After you configure the Site Replication utility, you can preview which files the replication will transfer before beginning the replication.

If the list looks correct, proceed with the replication. If the list looks wrong or incomplete, review the contents of the sending (staging) server to make sure all content was updated properly. Then, run the preview again to make sure the list of files to be moved is correct before beginning the replication.

To use the preview feature, follow these steps.

1. To access the Site Replication utility, enter the following into your Web browser’s address field: http://localhost/cms400replication/ConfigReplication.aspx

2. Click Configure Send.

3. In the Destination field, select the production server with which you will synchronize.

4. Enter the password required to access that production server.

5. Click the Preview Changes button.

6. A list of files to be transferred to the production server appears.

Performing Site Replication

For background information about Site Replication, see

”Site

Replication” on page 156

.

You must configure the Site Replication utility before beginning the actual replication.

I

MPORTANT

!

Make sure that the system clock on both servers is set to the same time. The Site

Replication software uses the clock to determine which files to replicate.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 194

Site Replication

Before beginning the site replication, check free space on the receiving (production) server to make sure it can accommodate your site directory on the sending (staging) server. Also, Ektron recommends using the Preview feature to identify which files will be moved by the replication prior to beginning. See Also:

”Previewing the Site Replication Process” on page 194

To use the Site Replication, follow these steps.

1. To access the Site Replication utility, enter the following into your Web browser’s address field: http://localhost/cms400replication/ConfigReplication.aspx

2. Click Configure Send.

3. In the Destination field, select the production server with which you will synchronize.

4. Enter the Username and password required to access that production server.

5. If you want to begin the replication in the future, use the

Schedule on field. See Also: ”Schedule On” on page 187 .

Otherwise, proceed to the next step.

6. Click the Send button.

7. The replication begins.

8. The main screen of the sending server changes to the following, indicating you cannot edit its configuration information while replication is taking place.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 195

Site Replication

9. To view the progress of the replication, click Status. A screen like the following displays.

The screen displays the following information:

Destination - the receiving server

Overall - the number of files already transferred/the total number of files to be transferred

Current File - the file currently being transferred

Status - Information about the replication (number of kilobytes sent so far, time elapsed, speed of transfer)

10. A list of files transferred to the production server appears.

After completing the replication, it’s a good idea to spot check the content on the production server to verify that the replication was successful.

Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the Production

Server

When you run a Site Replication, a backup is made of the receiving

(production) server before any new or updated files are copied from the sending (staging) server. Only files with the same name but a earlier edit date/time are backed up.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 196

Site Replication

On the receiving (production) server’s Configure Receive screen, you can see how many backups are available. Below that, a dropdown box displays information about each backup, such as its creation date.

You can also view a log of the selected backup, which lists every file copied from the sending to the receiving server. To see the log, click the Show Log button.

See Also:

”How Backup Files Are Maintained and Numbered” on page 197

”Restoring a Backup” on page 197

How Backup Files Are Maintained and Numbered

The Site Replication utility only keeps the 10 most recent backups.

So, if 10 are already available and you initiate a new replication, the oldest backup is removed, and the current files about to be replaced are saved as the number one backup. All remaining backups are renumbered one higher.

Restoring a Backup

When you restore a backup, only files that were overwritten and the web.config, assetmanagement.config, assetmanagementdata.config files are restored. Any new files copied to the production server are not deleted.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 197

Site Replication

To restore a backup of files on the receiving (production) server, follow these steps.

1. To access the Site Replication utility, enter the following into your Web browser’s address field: http://localhost/cms400replication/ConfigReplication.aspx

2. Click Configure Receive.

3. In the bottom section of the screen, display the drop-down selection box under Replication backups.

4. Select the backup that you want to restore.

5. Click Restore.

Replicating to Multiple Sites

If you want to replicate the staging server content to multiple Web sites at one time, follow these guidelines.

1. While configuring the Replication Send screen, use the Add button to identify all destination directories. See Also:

”Configuring the Site Replication Utility” on page 180

2. Run the Site Replication procedure for each site. In the

Destination field, select the appropriate destination directory.

See Also:

”Performing Site Replication” on page 194

Supporting Several Sites on One Staging Server

If you want to maintain more than one site on the staging server, follow these guidelines.

1. Install the Site Replication feature separately for each site. On the second screen of the installation, be sure the site is unique.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 198

Site Replication

2. When asked to identify the site path directory, be sure the directory name is unique for each site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 199

Site Replication

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 200

Site Replication

3. If your receiving server uses a remote database server, each site needs its own temporary folder to store the database prior to replication. Specify a unique temporary folder for each site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 201

4. Specify a unique backup directory for each site.

Site Replication

Testing Site Replication Software

On the main Site Replication Screen, a Test Configuration option lets you verify that your Site Replication software is working properly. You can also use this screen to diagnose problems.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 202

Site Replication

When you click Test Configuration, the following screen appears.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 203

Site Replication

This screen lets you verify that Site Replication is configured properly. If all tests pass on your sending, receiving, and remote machines, Site Replication should function properly.

Tests are grouped by tabs into the following areas.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 204

Site Replication

Group

System Privileges

Local DB

Remote DB

File Transfer

Notifications

These tests verify...

Users have been assigned privileges to write files, restart services, etc. These activities occur during the Site

Replication process.

For more information, see

”Prerequisites” on page 160

”If you are not using a trusted connection, the login user defined in the

Ektron CMS400.NET web.config file needs sysadmin privileges.” on page 175

”Viewing and Restoring a Backup of the

Production Server” on page 196

If

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

runs on the same machine as the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

database server, you can back up and restore the

E k t r o n

C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

database.

If you installed a database on a separate server, you can back up and restore it.

The transfer of files and databases between sending and receiving servers.

The notification email can be sent.

”What Information is Synchronized” on page 158

”If you will use email to communicate the completion of the replication, SMTP must be running on the sending (staging) server’s IIS.” on page 177

Listing of Tests Per Server

Tab/Function

System Privileges

Verify CMS and DMS update directories are unique

Identity on current server:

Use on sending server

Use on receiving server

Use on remote database server

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 205

Tab/Function

Verify MS SQLDMO is installed

Identity on destination server

Test start/stop indexing service on current server

Test writing to a file in receive directory

Test writing to SiteReplication.Backups directory

Test writing to SiteReplication.Temp directory

Local DB

Test backup CMS DB using Send settings:

Test restore DB using Receive settings:

Remote DB

Test backing up DB using

SiteReplication.Temp:

Test restoring DB using

SiteReplication.Temp

File Transfer

Transfer file to destination using

WebDAV

Check SQL Server Compatibility

Use on sending server

Use on receiving server

Site Replication

Use on remote database server

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 206

Tab/Function Use on sending server

Use on receiving server

Site Replication

Use on remote database server

Check Site Replication Compatibility

Notifications

Sent Email to:

Quick Deploy

The Quick Deploy feature is explained through the following topics.

”Introduction” on page 207

”Information Copied During Quick Deploy” on page 208

”Quick Deploy Prerequisites” on page 209

”Using Quick Deploy” on page 210

Introduction

Quick Deploy is a simpler form of Site Replication that quickly moves updated content from a staging to production server. It also moves data collected on the production server back to the staging server, such as Content Analytics and Poll/Survey results.

When to Use Quick Deploy

Use Quick Deploy when content authors are updating specific content items (for example, press releases), new blog entries, and new blog comments but do not need to replicate an entire site.

You also use Quick Deploy to copy to the staging server information collected on the production server from site visitors, such as content rating data, content hits, and poll/survey results.

When Not to Use Quick Deploy

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 207

Site Replication

You cannot use Quick Deploy when making the following changes.

In these cases, use Site Replication.

Moving new folders from staging to production server

Moving content items that can be edited on the production server. Quick Deploy moves read-only content.

Information Copied During Quick Deploy

From Staging to Production Server

During Quick Deploy, the following information is copied from the staging to production server.

Content that is published (whether new or updated) or deleted

(if its folder is enabled for Quick Deploy)

New Blog and Discussion Forum comments that have been entered through the Workarea (only Blogs and Discussion

Forums whose Quick Deploy property is checked. See

”Quick

Deploy Prerequisites” on page 209

)

New or updated files in the uploadedfiles, uploadimages, and assets directories

From Production to Staging Server

The following information is copied from the production to the staging server. If the information already exists on the staging server, it is overwritten by the production server information.

New Blog and Discussion Forum comments entered through the Web site

New form submissions and submission tasks. (When forms are submitted, new tasks direct users to handle the forms, and notification email is sent to the users.)

Poll/survey results

Site Analytic information

Content rating data

Search phrases

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 208

Site Replication

Quick Deploy Prerequisites

Your license key supports Quick Deploy.

N

OTE

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Site Replication software is an extra cost option.

Please contact your Ektron Sales representative for details on purchasing it.

Identify the staging server. To do this, edit the Settings >

Configuration > Setup screen and check the This is a

staging server checkbox (see illustration below).

Both servers have the same build (minimum build 6.0.2)

On both servers, enable Quick Deploy in the web.config. To do this, open

siteroot/web.config

. Then, change the value of the

<add key="ek_EnableReplication"

element to true.

In the staging server's web.config, specify the Quick Deploy

Web service URL. To do this, open

siteroot/web.config and find the line that specifies the URL.

<add key="ek_ReplicationWS" value="http:// localhost /CMS400Demo/WorkArea/WebServices/

ReplicationService.asmx"/>

Within that line, replace localhost

with the production server.

For example:

<add key="ek_ReplicationWS" value="http:// 555.555.555.55

/CMS400Demo/WorkArea/WebServices/

ReplicationService.asmx"/>

WIthin

Ektron CMS400.NET

, check the Quick Deploy property for folders, Blogs and Discussion Forums that contain content that will be replicated dynamically.

N

OTE

You can only set these folder properties after the above settings are made.

To do this, access the folder then click View > Folder

Properties. Near the bottom of the screen is Quick Deploy followed by Yes or No.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 209

Site Replication

To change the Quick Deploy setting, click the Edit button ( ) then change the value of the Replicate Folder Contents check box (illustrated below).

Unlike some other folder properties, there is no inheritance of this value -- you must individually set each folder to be replicated.

Enabling Multiple Production Destinations

If you want to have Quick Deploy update more than one production server, identify each one in the staging server’s web.config file at the ek_ReplicationWS

element. Separate each URL with a comma(,).

The

Ektron CMS400.NET

database is only synchronized to the first server in the list. Other servers only receive static file updates, that is, files in the uploadedfiles, uploadedimages, assets, and assetlibrary directories

Using Quick Deploy

Moving Content with Quick Deploy

Before running Quick Deploy for the first time, both servers must have the same folder structure and content. You can accomplish this either by copying the database from staging to production

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 210

Site Replication

server, or running a Site Replication. See Also:

”Performing Site

Replication” on page 194

To use Quick Deploy to move content from staging to production server, publish the content. As content is published, it is automatically moved to the production server. The Ektron Windows

Service handles this process. See Also:

”Ektron Windows Service” on page 271

Whenever content is published, all information ready to be moved between the two servers is also moved. An example of this information is Blog and Discussion Forum comments. For a

complete list see, ”Information Copied During Quick Deploy” on page 208 .

Moving non-Content Information with Quick Deploy

If you want to move information other than content between the two servers and no content is ready to be published, follow these steps.

1. Complete all prerequisites listed in ”Quick Deploy

Prerequisites” on page 209

.

2. Click Settings > Configuration > Quick Deploy.

3. Click the Replicate button.

4. Starting Replication... appears.

5. Once the connection is established, the screen displays the status of the replication. For example:

CMS400.net Replication Started with: http://192.168.0.nnn/CMS400Demo/WorkArea/WebServices/

ReplicationService.asmx at 5/4/2006 11:31:41 AM

6. When Quick Deploy completes, the screen displays a list of moved files and the completion date and time.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 211

Site Replication

T

ECHNICAL

N

OTE

Replication log information is also captured in the Windows Event log. If you set web.config's ek_LogLevel to 1, every database row that was changed is logged.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 212

Content Analytics Feature

C o n t e n t A n a l y t i c s F e a t u r e

The Content Analytics feature lets you track statistics about visits to your Web site. You can use it to determine the following kinds of information:

how often your content was viewed

how many site visitors viewed for first time, and how many returned

the most popular referral pages (that is, the Web page from which visitors clicked to arrive on your site)

Several options for selecting a date range let you compare activity across different weeks, months, and years.

This section explains the Content Analytics feature through the following subtopics.

”Enabling the Content Analytics Feature” on page 213

”Determining Which Templates are Tracked” on page 214

”Specifying the Frequency of Writing to the Database” on page 215

”The Statistical Data” on page 216

”Writing to the IIS Log” on page 217

”Content Analytics Reporting” on page 218

”Changing the Date Range of the Statistical Data” on page 224

Enabling the Content Analytics Feature

By default, the Content Analytics feature is enabled in the web.config file, under the

<analyticsSettings>

tag. To disable it, set the value of the enableAnalytics

property to false

.

<analyticsSettings>

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 213

Content Analytics Feature

<!-- globally enables or disabled all visitor tracking -->

<add key=" enableAnalytics " value="true" />

If this property is set to true

, and you later change it to false

, statistical data remains within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, but no additional data is collected.

Determining Which Templates are Tracked

Analytic data is tracked for every template that has a Content

Analytics server control.

N

OTE

Ektron CMS400.NET can only track template views if the viewer’s browser’s cookies are enabled.

Inserting a Content Analytics Server Control

For details about dropping this server control onto a template, see the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Developer Manual section “Content

Analytics Server Control.”

Best Practice

Drop the control onto an area that does not disrupt the template layout, such as the bottom.

Tracking Templates vs. Individual Content Items

To track visitor activity to a template (for example, customerservice.aspx), drop the server control onto it. To track activity for a content item within that template, set the

DefaultContentID property to the ID of that content.

N

OTE

You can only track one content item per template.

Display of Analytic Data on Template

If a user is logged in, each template that has a server control displays statistics for that template. So, you can immediately see how many times a template has been viewed, and by how many visitors (as illustrated below).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 214

Content Analytics Feature

You can get a more detailed breakdown of activity for a template by

viewing the Top Templates statistics. See Also: ”Top Templates” on page 223

Specifying the Frequency of Writing to the

Database

N

OTE

The following feature only works with a SQL database. It does not work with

Oracle.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 215

Content Analytics Feature

Once you set up the Content Analytics feature, your database is subject to a continuous barrage of write activity, generated by visits to your site.

To mitigate the effect of this activity on your database’s performance, you can hold visit activity in application server memory until a predetermined amount of data is collected. When that amount is collected, it is moved in one packet to the database.

So, the database is “hit” much less frequently.

You can specify the amount of data saved in memory prior to being written to the database using these web.config file elements.

recordsBeforeWrite

- the number of unique template visits

timeBeforeWrite

- the number of seconds since the last time a database write occurred

When either element reaches the value set in web.config, all records stored in application server memory are written to the database. That event also resets the value of both elements to zero (0).

The Statistical Data

For every template view, the following statistical information is captured:

url - the visited page

content_id - the ID of the visited content. Only captured if a content block ID was entered in the server control’s

DefaultContentID property. See Also:

”Tracking Templates vs.

Individual Content Items” on page 214

visitor_id - a unique GUID that identifies a visitor

hit_date - date and time when a page view occurred

referring_url - the URL a user was viewing before jumping to the visited page

visit_type - zero (0) indicates new visitor, 1 indicates returning

visitor, 2 indicates all other views. See Also: ”Tracking Site

Visitors” on page 217

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 216

Content Analytics Feature

In a session, the first page hit tracks the visit as zero (0) (if the user is new) or 1 (if the user previously visited the page). From then on, 2 is logged.

Tracking Site Visitors

The Content Analytics feature provides information about visits made by new versus returning visitors. To capture this data, the feature asks this question whenever a page is visited: is the user logged in as either a membership or regular user?

If yes, capture the user ID with the statistical data

If no, place a cookie on the visitor’s computer

So, the first time a user visits a page, either user information is captured or a cookie is created.

The next time the user visits that page, the feature checks the visit history for the user ID, or for a cookie. If either is found, the visit is considered a return.

New Visitor Statistical Tracking

The same user visit may be considered new on one view but not on another. For example, someone visits on January 30 (Monday) then again February 2 (Thursday). On the monthly statistics, that visitor is new, but on the weekly statistics, the February 2 hit would be a return visit (his second this week).

Now consider a second visitor, who browses to your site on the first and 20th of the month. These visits would appear on weekly statistics as two new visits, but on the monthly statistics, only the first visit would show up on that month's tally of new visitors. The second visit would add to the return visitor statistics.

Writing to the IIS Log

In addition to writing Site Analytic data to the database, you can write it to the IIS log. To do this, enable the appendToIISLog element in the web.config file.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 217

Content Analytics Feature

Note that if you set appendToIISLog to true

, Site Analytic data is written to the IIS log, but does not appear in the Workarea. Only data written to the database appears in the Workarea.

Content Analytics Reporting

The Content Analytics feature has extensive reporting features which are based on drilling down from a top-level view of the entire site, to individual templates, all the way down to individual content items (if specified).

To access Content Analytics Reports, follow these steps.

Either

1. Browse to a content item for which analytic data is being captured.

2. Right click the mouse.

3. Click View Template Activity to see analytic data for the current content item (to learn more about data captured for one

content item, see ”Top Content” on page 222 ).

4. Click View Site Analytics to view analytic data for the entire

Web site.

or

1. Go to Modules > Site Analytics to view analytic data for the entire Web site.

Five levels of reporting are available.

”Site Statistics” on page 219

”Site Activity” on page 220

”Top Content” on page 222

”Top Templates” on page 223

”Top Referrers” on page 224

Summary of Statistical Data Available

The following table lists the kinds of analytic statistics that can be viewed at each level of the site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 218

Content Analytics Feature

Type of Statistical Information Site-wide

Views of Any Template

Visitors: New and Return

Pie Chart of New vs. Return Visitors

Pie Chart of Views/Visitors Ratio

Bar Graph of Views/Visitors Ratio

Visited Pages

Visited Content Blocks

URLs from which Site Visitors Accessed

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Template-

Level

X

Content-Level

X

X

X

X

X

X

Site Statistics

The Site Statistics screen offers an overview of all tracked activity within the selected date range. You see actual data for the

number of views

number of visitors

ratio of visitors per view

number of new and returning visitors

ratio of new to return visitors

Below this data are pie charts of the ratio of views to visitors and new vs. return visitors.

N

OTE

To understand how new and returning visitors are tracked, see ”Tracking Site

Visitors” on page 217

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 219

Content Analytics Feature

Site Activity

The Site Activity view shows relative activity during the selected time period. The red bar indicates views, and the blue bar indicates visitors.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 220

Content Analytics Feature

Site Activity Time Increments

The graph’s time increments are one level below the Quick View selection. For example, in the screen above, Quick View is set to

Day. So, the statistics are broken down by hours of the day.

The following table lists the Site Activity time increments for each

Quick View selection.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 221

Content Analytics Feature

Quick view time increment

day week month year

Site Activity Graph display broken down by these units

hourly daily weekly monthly

Top Content

The Top Content View shows the most frequently-accessed content items on your Web site.

See Also:

”Tracking Templates vs. Individual Content Items” on page 214 ;

You can click on any content item to view

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 222

Content Analytics Feature

Content Statistics - statistics for that content item only (See

Also:

”Site Statistics” on page 219 )

Content Activity - relative activity for that content item only

(See Also:

”Site Activity” on page 220

)

Audit Content - all users who viewed the selected content item; to the right of each user are the date and time when the content was viewed

N

OTE

Only users who viewed the content after logging in appear on the list. Visitors to your site who do not log in affect statistics but are not tracked on this report.

Top Templates

The Top Templates View shows all viewed templates on your Web site, with the most frequently-accessed templates on top.

By default, the templates at the top of the list are those with the highest number of unique visitors. You can change the sort by clicking on any column header. For example, to sort the templates by the number of views, click Views.

You can click on any template to view

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 223

Content Analytics Feature

Template Statistics - statistics for that template only (See

Also:

”Site Statistics” on page 219 )

Template Activity - relative activity for that template only (See

Also:

”Site Activity” on page 220 )

Content in Template - if a content items was specified for the template in the Content Analytic server control, this view show statistics for the template. You can click the template to view

Template Level activity. (See Also:

”Top Templates” on page 223 )

Top Referrers

The Top Referrers View shows the Web pages from which your site was most frequently accessed.

Changing the Date Range of the Statistical Data

When you first view statistical data, the default date range is today

(one day).

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 224

Content Analytics Feature

If you view statistics for different date ranges, when you return to the screen, the last selected date range is the default selection.

You can change it if needed.

Using Quick View Options

Use Quick View options to view analytic statistics for any of the following time periods.

one day

one week

one month

one year

When you click Quick View [week], [month] or [year], the current end date is used as the last day of the range. Here are some examples.

Quick

View

Option

Week

Month

Year

If end date is today, begin date is

one week earlier than today one month earlier than today one year earlier than today

Using Jump To Options

Use Jump To options to view analytic statistics for a time period before and after the current date range. The time period is determined by the Quick View increment. For example, if the Quick

View option is Day, you can jump to the previous day, the following day, or today.

Regardless of the Quick View increment, you can always view statistics for today.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 225

Quick

View

Option

Day

“Jump to” options

Week

Month

Year

previous day

next day

today

previous week

next week

today

previous month

next month

today

previous year

next year

today

Content Analytics Feature

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 226

Support for Multiple Sites

S u p p o r t f o r M u l t i p l e S i t e s

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Multi-site Support feature lets you set up and manage several Web sites under one CMS. For example:

www.ektron.com

support.ektron.com

forums.ektron.com

All sites share a single database. The Multi-site Support feature does not support multiple databases.

Multisite support is explained through the following topics.

”Advantages of Multiple Sites” on page 227

”Prerequisites” on page 228

”Using Multiple Sites” on page 228

”Installing the Multi-site Support Feature” on page 229

”Effect on Site Replication” on page 236

Advantages of Multiple Sites

The URL can communicate to site visitors the nature of the site.

All sites can share

-

common content, but appear within their own site and templates

-

the library of images and files. These files can be stored once, yet authors can insert them into content from any site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 227

Support for Multiple Sites

Prerequisites

The server must run Windows Server 2003 or 2005

N

OTE

Windows XP supports only one Web site.

All sites must reside on the same server

At minimum, an enterprise license

Using Multiple Sites

When authoring content, sites appear with

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s folder structure look but the icon is a globe (see illustration below).

So, the author can create and edit content in the additional site in the same way he creates or updates content in the root site.

Authors should log into the root site prior to editing content in an additional site. Regardless of which site he is using, an author can use the library to insert hyperlinks, images, files, and quicklinks.

When a folder has at least a production domain assigned to it, it is a domain folder. Links to content in a domain folder are activated via linkit.aspx, which redirects to the appropriate domain name and uses the appropriate ASPX template for the folder or content.

W

ARNING

!

You cannot create a hyperlink within content, a collection, menu, etc. to a form that resides in another site.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 228

Support for Multiple Sites

Installing the Multi-site Support Feature

1. Install

Ektron CMS400.NET

.

2. In IIS, create a new IP address for each additional site.

3. If the server is used as a staging server with the Site

Replication Feature, go to the

Ektron CMS400.NET

Workarea then Settings > Configuration > Setup. Edit the setup screen and make sure the This is a staging server checkbox is checked. See Also:

”Site Replication” on page 156

4. In

Ektron CMS400.NET

, create a new top-level folder for each site.

W

ARNING

!

You can only use a folder directly under the root folder.

5. Assign multi-site capabilities to each folder created in Step 4.

To do this, click the View Folder Properties button ( ) and access the Folder Properties screen. The Multi-Site Domain

Configuration fields appear on that screen.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 229

Support for Multiple Sites

6. In the Staging Domain and Production Domain fields, insert the domains you created in Step 2.

N

OTE

Staging Domain appears only if This is a staging server is checked on the

Configuration >Setup screen.

Within

Ektron CMS400.NET

, the new domains are indicated by a globe icon.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 230

Support for Multiple Sites

When a folder has at least a domain assigned to it, it is a

domain folder. Links to content in a domain folder are managed by linkit.aspx, which redirects to the appropriate domain name and uses the appropriate ASPX template for that folder or content.

7. Using Windows Explorer, create a new Windows folder for each new site within the server’s file system. Create site folders underneath the site root folder.

8. Copy the following CMS files from the root folder into each new site folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 231

Support for Multiple Sites

all individual files (not subdirectories)

these subdirectories:

-

bin

-

WorkArea

-

CSSMenu, App_Code

9. Within each new folder, open the web.config file and update the value of ek_sitePath

as appropriate for the new site. Most likely, it will be

/site name/foldername/

. For example,

/CMS400Demo/

Ektron Site

/.

10. In IIS, for each new Web site, create new virtual folders for the following shared folders:

assets

uploadedfiles

uploadedimages

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 232

Support for Multiple Sites

Link the new folders to corresponding subfolders in the root folder.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 233

Support for Multiple Sites

This subfolder needs read-only permissions: images

These subfolders need read and write permissions: uploadedfiles, uploadedimages, assets, assetlibrary

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 234

Support for Multiple Sites

11. Set permissions on the new folders. To do this, follow these steps:

-

Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the new folder(s) you created in Step 7.

-

Right click the folder and click Sharing and Security.

-

Click the Security tab.

-

Click the Advanced button.

-

Click the check box next to Inherit from the parent the

permission entries that apply

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 235

Support for Multiple Sites

Effect on Site Replication

If you are using

Ektron CMS400.NET

’s Site Replication feature to copy content from your staging to production server, you must replicate all files at one time. You cannot replicate only one site, since all sites share library files.

Best Practice for Setting up Multi-Site Folders for Site

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 236

Support for Multiple Sites

Replication

Place all sites under one master folder for your

Ektron CMS400.NET

solution. For example, if you have two secondary sites, create a the following directory structure under

\inetpub\wwwroot

.

Ektron (with web.config)

Ektron\Site1\bin

Ektron\Site1\App_Code

Ektron\Site1\CSSMenu

Ektron\Site1\WorkArea

Ektron\Site1\web.config file

Ektron\Site2\bin

Ektron\Site2\App_Code

Ektron\Site2\CSSMenu

Ektron\Site2\WorkArea

Ektron\Site2\web.config file

Ektron\WorkArea

Ektron\CSSMenu

Ektron\bin

Ektron\images

Ektron\uploadimages

Ektron\uploadedfiles

Ektron\assets

Ektron\assetlibrary

If you use this structure, when you perform Site Replication, you can specify one root directory for your site.

N

OTE

During setup, you created virtual subdirectories for these common directories: images

,

Uploadedimages

,

Uploadedfile

.

E k t r o n C M S 4 0 0 . N E T A d m i n i s t r a t o r M a n u a l , Ve r s i o n 6 . 0 f o r . N e t 2 . 0 , R e v i s i o n 9 237

Web Alert Feature

We b A l e r t F e a t u r e

The Web Alert feature enables

Ektron CMS400.NET

to generate email for a list of registered users whenever new content appears on your site, or existing content is updated.

For example, anyone may register to be notified whenever new information about your product is published. As soon as the page is published on your site, registered users receive an email announcement with a link to the new/updated page. The recipient clicks the link and immediately accesses the page.

As a result, a self-selected group of users can be instantly notified of changes on your Web site relating to their interests. Once the system is set up, you d